simulcast proposal dodge county · july 16, 2018 bob missel 427 n birchwood fremont, nebraska 68025...

DODGE COUNTYSIMULCAST

PROPOSALDODGE COUNTY, NEBRASKA

PS-000087526

1. Solution Overview....................................................................................................... 6

1.1 The Benefits of ASTRO 25 IP-Based Technology......................................... 7

1.2 800 MHz IP Simulcast System.......................................................................... 7

1.3 System Map Overview...................................................................................... 8

1.4 Technical Overview .......................................................................................... 10

1.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................... 10

1.4.2 Proposed New RF Site Locations:............................................................. 10

1.4.3 Existing Locations:....................................................................................... 11

1.4.4 Solution Overview........................................................................................ 11

1.4.5 System Migration......................................................................................... 11

1.4.6 P25 Phase 2 TDMA Operation.................................................................... 12

1.5 800 MHz Coverage Design................................................................................ 12

1.5.1 Coverage Acceptance Test Plan — ASTRO 25 System......................... 12

1.6 ASTRO 25 Infrastructure................................................................................... 17

1.7 Simulcast Sites................................................................................................... 18

1.7.1 Simulcast Prime Site.................................................................................... 18

1.7.2 Simulcast Remote Site................................................................................ 18

1.7.3 Components.................................................................................................. 21

1.8 Project 25 (P25) User Radios............................................................................ 23

1.9 Logging Recording............................................................................................. 24

2. Equipment Lists........................................................................................................... 26

3. Implementation Plan.................................................................................................. 43

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.1 Project Resources............................................................................................. 43

3.2 Standards and Guidelines................................................................................ 45

3.3 Existing System Equipment.............................................................................. 46

3.4 Intermodulation and ERP Values..................................................................... 47

3.5 Site Readiness Survey...................................................................................... 47

3.6 Implementation Schedule................................................................................. 47

3.7 Coverage Acceptance Testing........................................................................ 47

3.8 Milestone Completions..................................................................................... 48

3.9 Site Development............................................................................................... 48

3.10 End User Training Plan.................................................................................... 48

3.11 Responsibility Matrix....................................................................................... 49

3.12 Appendix A: Site Development...................................................................... 56

3.12.1 Site Development at Four (4) Greenfield Sites (Dodge Snyder,

Nickerson, North Bend and Uehling)................................................................... 57

3.12.2 Site Development at Elkhorn Water Tank Site....................................... 60

3.12.3 Site Development at Fremont Power Station Site................................ 62

3.12.4 Site Development at OPPD Cedar Bluffs Tower Site............................ 65

3.12.5 Site Development at Dodge County Building......................................... 67

3.13 Project Schedule.............................................................................................. 70

3.14 Acceptance Test Plan..................................................................................... 80

4. 1st Year Warranty Support Plan............................................................................... 102

4.1 Advanced Services Overview.......................................................................... 104

4.2 Services Description......................................................................................... 105

4.2.1 Centralized Service Delivery...................................................................... 105

4.2.2 Field Service Delivery.................................................................................. 105

4.2.3 Network Hardware Repair.......................................................................... 106

4.2.4 Security Management Operations............................................................ 106

4.3 Motorola Solutions Service Capabilities........................................................ 106

4.3.1 On-Call Support through the Solutions Support Center (SSC) ............. 106

4.3.2 On-Site Service through a Field Service Team....................................... 106

4.3.3 Centralized Repair Management through Motorola Solutions'

Repair Depot............................................................................................................ 107

4.3.4 Direct Access to System Information through MyView Portal............ 107

4.4 Eltek DC Power and Nokia Microwave Maintenance Support Services. 108

5. Pricing Summary......................................................................................................... 109

6. Communications System And Services Agreement (Lease).............................. 117

6.1 MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT AND SUA ADDENDUM.................................... 118

6.1.1 Statements of Work..................................................................................... 119

July 16, 2018

Bob Missel427 N BirchwoodFremont, Nebraska 68025

RE: Motorola Solutions Dodge County Simulcast

Dear Mr. Missel,

Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola Solutions) appreciates the opportunity to provide Dodge County qualitycommunications equipment and services for your First Responders. Motorola Solutions' project team has taken greatcare to finalize a solution and provide exceptional value that address your consultants requested changes:

1. Recommended tower heights of 330’ with antenna top mounted.

2. Changed APX6000XE to APX4000 portables for fire departments.

3. Changed single head APX6500 to APX4500 mobiles for the fire departments.

4. Optional Towers, Tower Lighting, Shelters, Generators, and all site construction related engineering, drawings, and labor associated with the four green sites.

This proposal is subject to the terms and conditions of the enclosed Communications System and Services Agreement, including the Maintenance, Support and SUA Addendum and remains valid through July 27, 2018. The contract price is based on Nebraska State Contract 14534OC. Any questions Dodge County has regarding this proposal can be directed to Adam Schmidt, Account Manager at (402) 939-9805,([email protected]).

Sincerely,

Chris LonnettVP, Government Sales, N.A. Central Region

Motorola Solutions, Inc.

July 16, 2018Use or disclosure of this proposal is subject to the restrictions on the disclosure page.

July 16, 2018

SECTION 1

SOLUTION OVERVIEWSee the following pages for System Solution Overview and Descriptions.


July 16, 2018

ASTRO® 25 is the most widely used Project 25, Mission-Critical, Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) communicationnetwork for public safety agencies. Installed worldwide, ASTRO 25 solutions meet and exceed IV&D requirements forday-to-day operations, as well as emergency response in the most demanding situations. ASTRO 25 is a wirelessplatform that combines uncompromising, real-world performance and the legendary reliability of Motorola Solutions,Inc. (Motorola).

From single-site to nationwide deployments, ASTRO 25 is a flexible, modular network with advanced call processingcapabilities designed to meet the needs of public safety. ASTRO 25 can adapt to accommodate additional users,increased geographic coverage, enhanced data applications, and connectivity to other networks—all to ensure anefficient and cost-effective solution for decades to come.

ASTRO 25 is optimized for the rigorous demands of public safety, providing reliable communications. When anemergency involves multiple agencies, first responders can share voice and data communication among their teams.In addition, centralized command and control can deploy resources efficiently, maintain communication security, andtrack personnel effectively.

1.1 THE BENEFITS OF ASTRO 25 IP-BASED TECHNOLOGYMotorola Solutions’ proposed solution for the County is our ASTRO 25 platform with IV&D, the foundation of theMission-Critical portfolio. ASTRO offers a Project 25, standards-based Internet Protocol (IP) modular solution,providing your first responders with:

• Cost savings–ASTRO 25 reduces costs by integrating your voice and data needs into a single solution.• Interoperability–ASTRO 25 is compliant with APCO Project 25 standards, offering seamless interoperability

with other compliant systems and radios, putting the highest level of interoperability in the end-users’hands, without the need of gateways or console patches.

• Reliability–Pre-release software and upgrade testing, third-party hardware and software certificationprocess, fault-tolerant architecture with multiple fallback modes, multiple levels of redundancy, and real-time network and security monitoring provide Mission-Critical reliability.

• Increased security–Information Assurance (IA) enhances the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of theRadio Network Infrastructure (RNI). Multiple encryption algorithms keep end-to-end voice and datatransmissions confidential.

• Enhanced productivity–Easy and intuitive interfaces to critical, real-time information is delivered to userswhen and where they need it.

• Flexibility–Scalable, flexible design allows ASTRO 25 to dynamically adapt to the operational demands ofany size organization. The IP-based design supports a unique mix of voice, data, and geographicalrequirements, permitting easy system enhancements as the users’ needs evolve.

A description of the features, benefits, system architecture, and hardware components are provided in thisdocument.

1.2 800 MHZ IP SIMULCAST SYSTEMA simulcast land mobile radio system provides continuous coverage over a large geographic region using a singleset of frequencies. Simulcast solutions extend a system’s RF coverage, especially in areas where availablefrequencies are limited, and in areas where physical barriers (e.g., mountains and buildings) can cause reducedsignal coverage.

Trunked simulcast was developed by Motorola Solutions to meet the needs of users who were outgrowing theirsingle-site radio systems. Simulcast offers the following advantages:


July 16, 2018

• Improved Coverage–One radio site may not provide the coverage necessary for the application in question.Simulcast expands the coverage area by expanding the number of radio sites without adding additionalfrequencies.

• Efficient Use of Frequencies – Adding sites typically requires more frequencies. In a simulcast system, thesame frequencies are used at every site in the system. This makes very efficient use of the availablespectrum.

• Simplified Radio Operations–Because the simulcast architecture operates like a single-site system,operations are simplified and radios are easy to use.

The prime site contains the prime site simulcast controller, simulcast comparators, and networking equipment tointerface to the remote simulcast sites. The simulcast RF transmitters and receivers are located at the simulcastremote sites. These sites simultaneously transmit identical information from each site to the radios. The receivers atthese sites receive the audio from the user radios, and pass the audio back to the prime site for voting. Audio and sitecontrol comes from the prime and master sites. Equipment at a simulcast remote site includes a simulcast baseradios, fault management equipment, and networking equipment to interface to the prime site.

1.3 SYSTEM MAP OVERVIEWThis is an overall view of the system when complete including the network backhaul with Microwave and Fiber. Themicrowave radios are represented as symbols on static or geographical map including capability to mark-linkrelation between specific microwave radios. Each circle is an RF site that includes 800 MHz Simulcast, UHF Paging,and 8TAC 800 MHz.

See the following page for System Map described above.


July 16, 2018

Uehling CR 18 & CR C

Dodge Snyder CR 3 & CR D

North Bend CR10 Foothill

Fremont Power Station

PSAP

County Court House New Prime

Site

Douglas PSAP 156th Maple

Elkhorn Water Tower

City Dark Fiber with new connection shown

PROPOSED NETWORK MAP

DODGE CO NE PROPOSED NETWORK MAP

TITLE:

CONTRACT:

PROJECT:

ENGINEER: PM: SCALE: SIZE:

PROGRAM: SHEET:

FILE NAME:

DRAWN:

DATE:

REV:

DRAWING NO:

CHECKED:

CODE IDENT:

MS VISIO 2016 1 OF 1

NONE BERGMAN

13 JULY 2018

T5 SOUTH

Engineering Notes: Drawing is not to scale. Distance between sites is an estimate only. Network Bandwidth is an estimate and based on tower location. City fiber network is drawn as a network topology map and does not represent the actual fiber routes.

OPPD Network

ORION Core to be moved

in future

0PPD Tower Cedar Bluffs

Nickerson Hooper CR N CR 18

11 Ghz

Existing Tower Self Supporting

Existing Guyed

Existing Building

New Tower Site

1.4 TECHNICAL OVERVIEW 1.4.1 IntroductionDodge County Communications (Dodge County) currently operates a multi conventional site infrastructure.Additionally, Dodge County operates a UHF Fire Paging system.

Motorola and Dodge County conducted a review of the current conventional system. This included a review of thecoverage and future capacity needs of the county. It was determined that the county would benefit from improvedsignal coverage to address coverage concerns from first responders. This included a re-evaluation of the systemdesign to examine the county’s population and size. To maximize Dodge County’s investment and provide a solidfoundation to build future public safety applications and a more efficient infrastructure, it was determined that an IP-based network infrastructure would create the best foundation for growing bandwidth applications, improvingnetwork security, and relying upon the monitoring capabilities of the system.

Motorola would like to propose a migration plan that would allow the existing infrastructure to transition to an all IP-based network. The new Dodge County simulcast cell will consist of one (1) existing simulcast remote site (FremontPower Station site) and four (4) new greenfield sites (locations to be determined). The Fremont site is currently partof the Washington County simulcast cell and will re-configured as a Dodge County simulcast remote site in theproposed five (5) site 800 MHz simulcast cell design.

The five (5) simulcast remote sites would be equipped with TDMA channels to allow the system to migrate to a 6-channel system with ten (10) talk paths. Additionally, the Prime Site located at the County Courthouse is designed tobe geographically located away from the ORION Master Core to better disperse radio infrastructure and improveupon disaster recovery in the event of a natural disaster occurrence.

The proposed design also includes a five (5) site one (1) channel UHF Analog Paging simulcast sub-system and 8TACPTAC Consolettes which will be co-located with the five (5) 800 MHz remote simulcast trunking system.

1.4.2 Proposed New RF Site Locations:Site Name Latitude Longitude Type Assets at Site

North Bend CR10 & FoothillRD

41.53969 -96.733577 New 330' Self SupportTower Site

800MHz Simulcast, UHF Paging,Microwave Ring,

8TAC PTAC

Dodge-Snyder CR3 & CR D 41.69567 -96.858389 New 330' Self SupportTower Site


8TAC PTAC

Uehling CR 18 CR C 41.71751 -96.577953 New 330' Self SupportTower Site


8TAC PTAC

Nickerson Hooper CR 18 &CR N

41.55468 -96.579257 New 330' Self SupportTower Site


8TAC PTAC


July 16, 2018

1.4.3 Existing Locations:Site Name Latitude Longitude Type Assets at Site

Fremont Power 41.42786 -96.462464

Existing 180’ structure800MHz Simulcast, UHF Paging,Microwave Ring, Fiber Ring

Dodge CountyBuilding 435 N Park Ave

FremontExisting 130' tower Microwave Ring, Fiber Ring Prime Site

Fremont Dispatch 725 N Park Ave Fremont Existing Dispatch E911 PSAP and Fiber Ring

An Ethernet IP-Based Microwave and Fiber network ring would be installed at each of the five (5) radio sites, CountyCourt House and the Police Station PSAP. The ring would provide a bandwidth throughput of 160 Mbps and serve as aself-directing packet-delivery system in the event of a site or equipment failure occurrence. This self-directingsystem institutes a beneficial architecture of “network redundancy” without the need for additional site equipment.

Below is a listing of existing Dodge County equipment that will be re-used and/or re-implemented within the projectsinfrastructure and updated with latest firmware release.

Fremont Power Site Equipment

• (1) GTR 8000 Expandable Site Subsystem (ESS).• (6) GTR 8000 Repeater/Base Radio.• (2) GGM 800 Site Gateway.• (1) TRAK 9100 Simulcast Site Reference.• (1) SDM 3000• Sub-Site Switch

Dispatch

• Four (4) MCC 7500• One (1) GCP 8000• Two (2) GGM8000• Two (2) HP 2620-24 Site Switches • Five (5) CCGW LD 4 Port Modules • One (1) SDM 3000 and Expansion

1.4.4 Solution OverviewToday, Dodge County operates disparate conventional infrastructure and MCC 7500 dispatch console sub-system formission critical public safety voice and data communication.

The new P25 IP-based Simulcast infrastructure will transition onto the Douglas County Core via the new Microwavebackhaul network. This will provide the County with a simple and seamless transition of the old system to the newsystem architecture.

During the migration, the conventional voice operations will transfer to the new P25 IP-based Simulcast technology.In addition, the transport network interface will change to microwave and Ethernet.

All frequency coordination for the microwave backhaul, 800 MHz, and UHF frequencies will be provided by Motorola.

1.4.5 System Migration


July 16, 2018

System migration of the radio infrastructure is a critical component of the overall project. It is imperative that aSystem Migration Plan is established and followed to ensure on-going operations when the system is migrated fromthe old-to-new. The objective of the plan is to provide quality communications with Dodge, maintain mission-criticaloperations, and minimize any system outages. The Motorola Project Manager and Post-Sale Engineer will beresponsible for providing a complete System Migration Plan prior to implementing any infrastructure modifications.

Some of the key migration tasks include:

• Frequency Coordination.• Microwave Backhaul Installation and Operability.• RF Distribution System Installations.• Infrastructure Installation.• Conventional to P25 System Cutover.• UHF Fire Paging Cutover.• Dispatch Center Upgrades and Cutover.• Subscriber installation and template updates.• System Testing and Verification.

During the system migration, the RNI will be expanded for the new IP-based Simulcast P25 Trunked digital voicesites. The IP Simulcast system will utilize an Ethernet-based Microwave Backhaul network for network connectivityof the Prime and Remote sites.

The existing P25 Trunked IP-based simulcast and conventional infrastructure will remain operational and sites will beadded as network infrastructure allows. Five (5) TDMA channels with Two (2) Dual Dynamic Mode (FDMA or TDMA)at all the RF sites allow trunked calls to be granted in TDMA modes of operation.

The IP-based simulcast cell includes TDMA and requires diversity antennas at each RF site. Dual diversity receiveantennas provide two receive paths at each tower to improve upon inbound system coverage. This occurs from thetransceiver comparing both receive paths and choosing the better signal between the two. This comparisontechnique provides a diversity system gain that is beneficial to a narrowed channel TDMA system.

1.4.6 P25 Phase 2 TDMA OperationSome of the critical performance parameters of TDMA include:

• Coverage—the coverage footprint remains the same as FDMA.• Simulcast Capability—the ability to simulcast TDMA, saving on frequencies and improving in-building

coverage.• Audio Quality—The Delivered Audio Quality (DAQ) will be consistent with FDMA.• FCC Compliance—Meets narrow band 6.25 kHz equivalent requirements.

1.5 800 MHZ COVERAGE DESIGNThe proposed five (5) site simulcast sub-system is designed for meeting Dodge County’s requirement for RFCoverage. The 800 MHz design meets the 95% service area reliability requirement for Portable on street andPortable in 6dB building loss throughout the County. Motorola and Dodge County will spend extensive time reviewingand approving the CATP process outlined in Section 6 of this proposal.

1.5.1 Coverage Acceptance Test Plan — ASTRO 25 System1.5.1.1 IntroductionThe Coverage Acceptance Test Plan (CATP) is designed to test and verify the voice radio system being implementedby Motorola. The test plan validates the proposed coverage design meets or exceeds the required coverage


July 16, 2018

reliability within the Dodge County service area. The CATP defines the coverage testing method and procedure, thecoverage acceptance criterion, the test documentation, and the responsibilities for both Motorola and Dodge County.

This coverage testing methodology is in accordance with the standards defined in TIA-TSB 88.3-C.

The purpose of this section is to provide a detailed description of Motorola’s Coverage Acceptance Test Plan andmethodology to ensure a quality design and verification test for the radio system infrastructure being implemented.

1.5.1.2 CATP DefinitionsSeveral definitions are needed to accurately describe the coverage test method. Where cited, these terms ormethods are defined within TIA TSB-88.1D1 or TSB-88.3-C2.

1.5.1.3 Coverage AreaThe coverage area is defined as the jurisdictional terrestrial area boundary for Dodge County, NE

1.5.1.4 Channel Performance Criterion (CPC)The CPC is the specified minimum design performance level in a faded channel. {TSB 88.1-D, Section5.2}

1. Wireless Communications Systems --- Performance in Noise- and Interference-Limited Situations --- Part 1:Recommended Methods for Technology Independent Performance Modeling Technical Service Bulletin TSB-88.1-D,Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA), Arlington VA, 2012.

2. Wireless Communications Systems --- Performance in Noise- and Interference-Limited Situations --- Part 3:Performance Verification, Technical Service Bulletin TSB-88.3-C, Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA),Arlington VA, 2008.

For this voice radio system, the CPC is a Delivered Audio Quality of DAQ-3.4. The definition of DAQ 3.4 is “Speechunderstandable with repetition only rarely required. Some noise/distortion.

For digital voice systems, the Bit Error Rate (BER) is the performance metric used for evaluating the fadedperformance threshold and establishing the specified CPC. This test is performed using adjustments for antennaperformance and in-building or in-vehicle losses. {TSB-88.1-C, Section5.4.2, Figure 5}

For this project, a TDMA system test will be performed. The BER threshold is 2.4%.

1.5.1.5 ReliabilityThe reliability is the percentage of locations within the coverage area that meets or exceeds the specified CPC.

1.5.1.6 Equipment ConfigurationsBelow, is an example of the coverage test equipment and setup configuration that will be used during the coverageacceptance test. The coverage setup configuration consists of the following:

1. Coverage testing will be carried out using predetermined attenuation losses based upon a 3-watt APXportable radio supplied with either a quarter or half-wave flex whip antenna. A speaker microphone will beutilized for performing any PTT transmissions.

2. In order to test the appropriate in-building attenuation loss factors (6 db, 12 dB and 18 dB), a configurableattenuator will be used and configured to meet the appropriate attenuation values. Below, is an examplesetup configuration that will be used during the CATP.

User Equipment Outdoor/In-Building

DefinedTestArea

Tile Size(miles) Reliability CPC CPC Pass/Fail Direction

of Test


July 16, 2018

APX 6000 Portablewith 1/2 wave

whip antenna inswivel case withremote speakermicrophone for

transmit andreceive

Outdoor: 6 dBloss throughoutthe country In-

Building: 6dBloss throughoutthe county 12dB

loss in towns

DodgeCounty 0.5 x 0.5

95% for 6dBin-building

loss

DAQ3.4

2.4% BEROutbound

withSubjective

DAQ Re-TestAllowed

Outbound

Table 1: Coverage Acceptance Test Configuration ASTRO 25 800MHz FDMA System

1.5.1.6 CATP MethodThe method used to test coverage is a statistical sampling of the predicted coverage area to verify that the CPC ismet or exceeded at the required reliability for the defined equipment configuration. It is impossible to verify every testpoint within the coverage area. This is due to the inability of accessing test points outside of normal drivingconditions. Therefore, coverage reliability will be verified by sampling a statistically significant number of randomlyselected locations, quasi-uniformly distributed throughout the predicted coverage area.

This CATP provides a quantitative method of measurement using Motorola Voyager℠ software tool. The methodfollows the general guidelines in TIA TSB-88.3-C Section5.0, “Performance Confirmation” and has direct correlationwith Motorola coverage prediction methodology.

1.5.1.6 Accessibility to test tilesPrior to performing the coverage acceptance test, Motorola and Dodge County will review the pre-determined testtiles and decide upon which test tiles will be considered accessible or inaccessible for the coverage test (due to lackof roads, restricted land, etc.) Inaccessible tiles will be eliminated from the acceptance test calculation. {TSB-88.3-C,Section5.5.4}

1.5.1.6 Test locations within each TileUsing the Voyager℠ test equipment, the actual test locations within each test tile will be reviewed and selectedbetween Motorola and Dodge County. If the selected test location is in an underground parking garage or in a tunnel,the test locations will be marked as not tested.

1.5.1.6 Perform Measurements in Each TileIn each test tile, a series of sequential measurements (sub samples) will be made. These test locationsmeasurements, containing a number of sub samples (up to 200 within a 40 wavelength period), constitutes the testsamples for the tile. The test samples will establish the local median BER within the test tile. A median of multipleBER sub samples is used rather than a single measurement to ensure that the measurement is not biased by taking asingle sample that might be at a peak or null point on the radio wave.

In order to automate this test, a system test signal (V52 test pattern for Phase-1 C4FM modulation, or a 1031 Outboundtone for H-DQPSK modulation (TDMA)) will be deployed at each of the sites. The portable test radio and Voyager testcomputer will receive signal transmissions and record the data being received. The system infrastructure will beconfigured to utilize a radio channel that continuously transmits a test pattern signal. The Voyager test unit(s) willrecord, capture and display the signal being received by the portable subscriber unit.

1.5.1.6 Determine If Each Test Tile Passes or Fails the CPC RequirementIf a simple majority of the individual test points within a grid tile are better than the threshold BER, then the squareshall be deemed a Pass. If an equal number of test points exist above and below the threshold, then the median BERvalue being measured shall determine the Pass or Fail of the grid square.


July 16, 2018

For each test tile, the pass/fail criterion is the Bit Error Rate (BER) that provides the specified CPC. To measure BER,the coverage test will be performed with the appropriate attenuator value installed in the test receiver’s antenna line,to establish an equivalent signal level performance for the portable radio.

1.5.1.6 Determine the Coverage Area Reliability for AcceptanceAfter all accessible tiles in the service area have been tested; the service area reliability percentage will bedetermined by dividing the number of tiles that pass by the total number of tiles tested. {TSB-88.3-C, Section 5.1,equation 1}. The coverage test acceptance criterion for the portable radio is that the tested service area reliabilitymust be equal to or greater than the required reliability.

1.5.1.6 Responsibilities and PreparationThis information will help set the expectations of Dodge County and Motorola regarding requirements for equipment,personnel, and time during the coverage test.

The County will provide the following for the duration of the coverage test:

• One test vehicle (Van) and power outlets to connect 3 test kits.• One representative to operate the test vehicle.• One representative to handle one (1) of the Voyager℠ test kits.• One radio channel from the system.

Motorola Solutions will provide the following for the duration of the coverage test:

• At least one Motorola Solutions representative, to navigate and to operate two (2) of the Voyager℠.• Three set of calibrated Motorola Voyager℠ coverage testing packages.• Three laptop computers equipped with the Voyager℠ software.• Three APX Portable Subscribers.• Variable Attenuator required to simulate portable performance.• One splitter to connect three test kits to one antenna (TBD).

Coverage acceptance testing will be performed on roads in the Dodge County service area.

Motorola Solutions and the County will plan the route for the test vehicle through the coverage test area, to ensurethat each tile which is accessible by public road is tested. If possible, any tiles not accessible to the test vehicle willbe identified while planning the route.

Motorola Solutions will calibrate the test receivers used with the Voyager℠ coverage testing package.

Motorola Solutions will provide the attenuator values required to evaluate each equipment configuration for the BERmeasurements. The attenuators will be sized to handle the portable’s transmit power.

Motorola Solutions will conduct this test only once if it is successful. If any portion of the test is determined to beunreliable because of proven equipment malfunctions or failures, Motorola Solutions will repeat the portion of thetest affected by the equipment malfunction or failure. The County will have the option to accept the coverage at anytime prior to completion of the coverage test. Any such acceptance shall be provided by Dodge in writing.

Before starting the test, the County and Motorola Solutions will agree upon the time frame for Motorola Solutionssubmission of a report containing the coverage test results.

1.5.1 CATP ProceduresA coverage acceptance test will be performed using the Motorola Solutions Voyager℠ test package, to provideverification that the system meets the faded performance threshold for the specified CPC of DAQ 3.4.


July 16, 2018

Outbound radio coverage direction shall be tested and evaluated.

Voyager℠ consists of the following:

• A calibrated digital voice test receiver, connected to an antenna installed in a representative location on thetest vehicle. The test receiver will monitor transmissions from the fixed network radio sites.

• A Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, which will provide the computer with the location and speed ofthe test vehicle.

• A laptop computer with Voyager℠ software and a mapping database, which includes highways and localstreets.

• A laptop computer with Voyager℠ infrastructure software to interface with the system infrastructure.

The procedure for the coverage test will be as follows:

• A Voyager℠ package will be installed in each test vehicle. County personnel will drive the test vehicle(s)over a route planned to cover the accessible tiles within the coverage test area.

Motorola Solutions personnel will operate the Voyager℠ package.

• During the coverage test, the laptop computer will display the vehicle’s location on a map of the coveragetest area overlaid with the test grid. The mobile Voyager℠ units will be performing BER measurements whilereceiving a defined timing pattern. The mobile Voyager computer will provide a visual indication that anoutbound measurement has been completed in a tile.

• Attenuation of the test receiver will be used to evaluate whether each tile passes or fails the required BERfor portable radios.

• Any tile that fails the objective BER test for 6dB in-building scenario described above will be retested usinga subjective DAQ test. Any tile that fails the objective BER test, but passes a subjective DAQ re-test will bedeclared passed.

• If a location of interest fails the drive test in 12dB and 18dB in-building scenarios then that location will bere-tested with a subjective DAQ test.

• At the conclusion of primary BER testing for 6dB in-building scenario, the results shall be evaluated usingthe evaluation criteria described.

1.5.1.1 Pass/Fail EvaluationAfter all testing is completed; the total number of passed tiles and total number of failed tiles will be tabulated.

If the results show that 95% or more of the total valid tested tiles have passed for the 6dB in-building scenario test,then the CATP will be deemed as a passed system test.

1.5.1.1 Failure RemediesIf, during the coverage test, a test grid is deemed failed, a subjective DAQ test shall be performed if the overallcoverage test shows less than 95% of the test tiles as passing the test, Motorola will work with the County soMotorola can determine the cause of the failure.

• If a coverage test, or a portion thereof, is suspected by Motorola as having failed due to equipmentanomalies, external interference, or those tiles suspected of being affected by an interferer may be re-tested. If the test tiles being re-tested are found to have failed due to interference, those test tiles will bereviewed by Motorola and the County so that potential solutions to interference issues can be resolved byboth parties.


July 16, 2018

If it is determined that the failure is not caused by third party interference, then Motorola shall offer viable solutionsto meet the guaranteed coverage requirement. The solutions will be at no cost to Dodge County.

Solutions may not degrade areas of coverage that were previously accepted. A re-test of coverage shall beconducted in those areas (previously failed or not) potentially affected by the solution in order to verify thatcomposite coverage is maintained. These solutions may include, but are not limited to:

• Modification of antenna or repeater configurations, as long as those modifications complies with regulatoryand zoning restrictions.

1.5.1.1 CATP Documentation and Coverage AcceptanceDuring the coverage acceptance test, Voyager℠ generates computer files that include the Reference Tile Levels for each test tile. A copy of this raw data will be provided to the County for informational purposes only at the conclusion of the coverage test. Motorola will process this data to determine whether the coverage test was passed for portable radios and produce a map detailing the coverage test results.

Motorola will submit to the County a report detailing the coverage test results for 6dB, 12dB and 18dB in-building scenarios. This report will include a document specifically for the 6dB in-building scenario, which is to be signed by both the County and Motorola, indicating the test was performed in accordance with this CATP and the results of the test shall indicate the acceptance or no acceptance of the coverage portion of the system. Dodge County will have the option to accept the coverage at any time prior to completion of the coverage test or documentation process, any such acceptance shall be provided in writing.

1.6 ASTRO 25 INFRASTRUCTUREMotorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola Solutions) ASTRO 25 networks are designed to meet the current and future requirements for Project 25 (P25) solutions. Our portfolio of RF stations, receivers, site controllers, and comparators is designed to maximize channel up-time, simplify system technology refresh, enable smaller, more efficient site design, and minimize the cost of ownership.

G-series site equipment has many features built in to support ease of service. Six basic modules create the entire G-series platform resulting in reduced spare parts inventory. Modules have front access to improve serviceability, withhot-swap support to ensure channels are back on the air in minimum possible time. Standard Battery Revert andCharging capability is built into every G-series power supply. Integrating these capabilities eliminates the need for alarge uninterrupted power supply and saves valuable site space.

Software upgrades are more stable and performed with less downtime in the GTR 8000 base radio. One version of software can run actively while another version is downloading. Using a remote IP connection, the user can decide when to switch between the two versions of software allowing the system manager to prepare for software downloads.

Information Assurance capabilities are standard with G-series equipment and can be configured or disabled depending on your specific system maintenance and security requirements. G-series products provide the necessary boundary defense capabilities required in mission-critical infrastructure today including local user accounts and password controls, user privilege model support (two levels), local and remote access services controls, secure shell services support, SNMPv3, central authentication, general operating system and network services hardening, and device test services controls.

Motorola Solutions' proposed solution for the Dodge County, Nebraska is our ASTRO 25 Simulcast site addition to the existing Motorola Solutions ASTRO 25 system.


July 16, 2018

1.7 SIMULCAST SITESA simulcast land mobile radio system provides continuous coverage over a large geographic region using a singleset of frequencies. Simulcast solutions extend a system’s RF coverage, especially in areas where availablefrequencies are limited, and in areas where physical barriers (for example, mountains and buildings) can causereduced signal coverage.

Trunked simulcast was developed by Motorola Solutions to meet the needs of users who were outgrowing theirsingle-site radio systems. Simulcast offers the following advantages:

• Improved Coverage – One radio site may not provide the coverage necessary for the application in question.Simulcast expands the coverage area by expanding the number of radio sites without adding additionalfrequencies.

• Efficient Use of Frequencies – Adding sites typically requires more frequencies. In a simulcast system, thesame frequencies are used at every site in the system. This makes very efficient use of the availablespectrum.

• Simplified Radio Operations – Because the simulcast architecture operates like a single-site system,operations are simplified and radios are easy to use.

The ASTRO 25 simulcast infrastructure consists of a central simulcast prime site and up to 32 distributed simulcastremote sites, each with up to 30 channels. The prime site acts as a control and digitized audio center for thesimulcast subsystem. Audio is routed to the prime site from each simulcast remote site. To ensure that the best audiofrom the simulcast receivers is processed, a voting comparator selects the best signal.

The prime site contains the prime site simulcast controller, simulcast comparators, and networking equipment tointerface to the remote simulcast sites. The simulcast RF transmitters and receivers are located at the simulcastremote sites. These sites simultaneously transmit identical information from each site to the radios. The receivers atthese sites receive the audio from the user radios, and pass the audio back to the prime site for voting. Audio and sitecontrol comes from the prime and master sites. Equipment at a simulcast remote site includes a simulcast baseradios, fault management equipment, and networking equipment to interface to the prime site.

1.7.1 Simulcast Prime SiteThe ASTRO 25 Simulcast Prime Site consists of the following components, described in the Component Descriptionssection of this System Description:

• GCP 8000 Site Controller.• GCM 8000 Comparator.• GGM 8000 Site Gateway .• TRAK 9100 Simulcast Site Reference.• Sub-site Access Router.• Prime Site Ethernet Switch.• Sub-site Ethernet Switch.

1.7.2 Simulcast Remote SiteThe ASTRO 25 Simulcast Remote Site consists of the following components, described in the ComponentDescriptions section of this System Description:

• GTR 8000 Expandable Site Subsystem (ESS).• GTR 8000 Repeater/Base Radio.• GGM 800 Site Gateway.


July 16, 2018

• TRAK 9100 Simulcast Site Reference.• Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS).• Sub-Site Ethernet Switch.

Diagrams of the Prime and Remote Sites are provided on the following pages.


July 16, 2018

Xhub

Xhub

Xhub

Xhub

Backhaul LAN SW 01

TRAK 9100 GPS

GCP8000 SimulcastPrime Site Controller 2

GCM8000 Comparator CH 1 and 3

GCP8000 SimulcastPrime Site Controller 1

Prime LAN Switch 1

Xhub

2610-24 (CLN1836)

Backhaul LAN SW 02

Prime Site Gateway # 1 Sub-Site Access Gateway # 1

Sub-Site Access Gateway # 2

MLC 8000 Comparator

Prime LAN Switch 2

2610-24 (CLN1836)

To co-located VHF GTR Stationand MLC AGU Gateway

Simulcast Prime Site at Dodge County BuildingGPS Time Reference

LEGEND

10/100 BaseT

1 PPS / 5 MHz

1 PPS

GPS Antennas 4 Wire

Licensed MW Radios

Ethernet Micowave backhaul to ORION Core andthe five remote sub-sites

Prime Site at Dodge County Building

Dodge County Simulcast System

Ravinder S Dhoophur 07-13-18

TITLE:

DESIGNED BY: DATE:

PROJECT:

Prime Site Gateway # 2

GCM8000 Comparator CH 5 GCM8000 Comparator CH 6

GCM8000 Comparator CH 2 and 4

LD ECCGW

Nokia 7705 SAR8 Redundant MPLS RouterBatt. A

-

+

-

+

Batt. B

SLOT IDCSM AMDA 1MDA 3MDA 5

CSM BMDA 2MDA 4MDA 6

Mgmt Port Cons olePwr

Stat Act

In

CSM

Out

Sync

Mgmt Port ConsolePwr

Stat Ac t

In

CSM-V2

Out

Sy nc

ToD in ToD out

-48V / 24V

Expandable Site SubsystemChannels 1 - 6

GTR Standard Cabinet

GTR 8000 6 Pack Cabinet

5-

10-

20-

25-

30-

35-

40-

TX Combiner

GTR8000MOTOROLA

Motorola

0 I ALARMSTATUS

FAN

Motorola

0 I ALARMSTATUS

FAN

Motorola

0 I ALARMSTATUS

FAN

Motorola

0 I ALARMSTATUS

FAN

Motorola

0 I ALARMSTATUS

FAN

Motorola

0 I ALARMSTATUS

FAN

FANALA

RM

FANALA

RM

FANALA

RM

FANAL

ARM

FANAL

ARM

FANAL

ARM

RX Multicoupler

Site Router

MOSCAD SDM 3000 RTU

Five (5) Simulcast Remote Sub-Sites at North Bend, Dodge-Snyder, Uehling, Nickerson Hooper and Fremont Power

MLC 8000 Gateway

UHF GTR 8000

Xhub

RF

LEGEND

10/100 BaseT

GGM8000 Gateway # 2

Site LAN Switch 1

To Site’s Equipment and Environmental Alarms

To Tower

GPS Time Reference

4 Wire

Five Remote Simulcast Sub-sites

Dodge County Simulcast System

Ravinder S Dhoophur 07-13-18

TITLE:

DESIGNED BY: DATE:

PROJECT:

To TowerTx

UHF

GGM8000 Gateway # 1

Site LAN Switch 2

Dual DiversityTTA

To Tower

Rx 1 Rx 2

GPS Antennas

CMU

Surge

Surge

Licensed MW Radios

Ethernet Microwave Backhaul toPrime Site

GPS Antenna

TRAK 8835

LD ECCGW

Nokia 7705 SAR8 Redundant MPLS Router

Batt. A

-

+

-

+

Batt. B

SLOT IDCSM AMDA 1MDA 3MDA 5

CSM BMDA 2MDA 4MDA 6


Stat Ac t

In

CSM

Out

Sync


Stat Ac t

In

CSM-V2

Out

Sync

ToD in ToD out

-48V / 24V

8TAC – APX Consolette

SurgeSuppressor

To Tower

800 MHz

1 PPS / 5 MHz

VTAC – APX Consolette

SurgeSuppressor

To Tower

VHF

1.7.3 ComponentsEach site type in an ASTRO 25 system contains various components. Components included in this system design aredescribed in this section.

1.7.3.1 GTR 8000 Expandable Site SubsystemThe GTR 8000 Expandable Site Subsystem (ESS) enclosure can contain reconfigured GTR 8000 base stations, siteLAN switches, and GCP 8000 controllers, along with an optional Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS),depending on your configuration needs.

Voice traffic is routed from each of the site base stations to the system for distribution all sites associated with thecall. Benefits of the ESS include:

• Integrated Design – Provides a smaller footprint at the site.• Front/Top Access Design – Minimized cabling reduces install and service labor.• Increased Power Supply – Provides redundancy through common power bus.

1.7.3.2 GTR 8000 Site Repeater/Base RadioThe GTR 8000 Base Radio consists of a transceiver module, power amplifier module, fan module, and power supply.The transceiver module includes the functionality for the exciter, receiver, and station control. The base radiosoftware, configuration, and network management, as well as inbound/outbound traffic handling, are performedthrough this transceiver module. On-board serial and Ethernet ports are located on this module for local servicing viaConfiguration/Service Software (CSS).

The power amplifier module amplifies the low-level modulated RF signal from the transceiver module and delivers theamplified signal on the path to the transmit antenna. The power supply module supports the transceiver and poweramplifier modules, and can also provide auxiliary power to a connected site controller or Receive Multicoupler/LowNoise Amplifier (RMC/LNA).

1.7.3.3 GGM 8000 GatewayThe GGM 8000 Gateway is a modular multi-purpose network communications platform, designed to interconnectdevices and networks within ASTRO 25 public safety network systems.

The GGM 8000 provides a connection to a Wide Area Network (WAN) with no conventional channel interface (V.24,analog, and/or IP). A GGM 8000 with a connection to a WAN and with a conventional channel interface (v.24, analog,and/or IP) functions as a Site and Conventional Channel Gateway.

1.7.3.4 GCP 8000 Site ControllerThe GCP 8000 Site Controller (GCP 8000) is the control interface between the transmitter/receiver subsystem and theZone Controller. The GCP 8000 Site Controller comprises redundant site controller modules; one site controllermodule acts as the active module, and the second module acts as a standby. The redundancy minimizes thepossibility of a single point of failure at the site.

The GCP 8000 provides the following functions:

• Manages the channels to maximize throughput and channel availability.• Administers registration and context activation requests.• Monitors base stations and RF distribution equipment and interacts with the MOSCAD site device manager

to facilitate centralized alarm and control monitoring.• Provides redundant site control.• Enables redundant site link routing for patch redundancy.

Additionally, the GCP 8000 provides the following functions at the simulcast site:


July 16, 2018 Page 21

• Provides a time and frequency reference signal to the base stations, maximizing frequency stability andallowing for further site separation in a simulcast configuration.

• Provides IP simulcast capability, enabling true end-to-end IP connectivity in a simulcast configuration.

1.7.3.5 GCM 8000 Site ComparatorThe GCM 8000 Comparator ensures the broadcast of the best possible voice signal by combining the best parts of asingle signal that has been received by multiple sites in a Multisite (simulcast) system.

The comparator features a digital voting methodology: Frame Diversity Reception. The comparator selects the dataframe or signals with the lowest Bit Error Rate (BER) and forwards it. By using the best pieces of each input signal,the result is the best possible composite signal.

1.7.3.6 Radio Frequency Distribution SystemThe Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) provides interconnect between the base radios and antennas,allowing for a completely contained and more compact installation footprint. For the transmitters, this can includeisolators, combiners, TX filters, diplexers, and power monitors.

For the receivers, this can include duplexers, site preselectors, and multicouplers. Various RFDS options exist foreach of the GTR 8000 Base Radio, GTR 8000 Site Subsystem, and GTR 8000 Expandable Site Subsystem.

TRAK 9100 Simulcast Site Reference The TRAK 9100 Simulcast Site Reference is a GPS-based frequency and time reference. The TRAK frequencyreference provides the simulcast system 1 PPS (Pulse per Second), 5 MPPS, and 1 PPS + 5 MPPS composite signals.These signals are used to synchronize the transmission of a simulcast system to improve overall performance andcoverage.

This unit provides a high-level redundancy, including redundant GPS receivers, backup rubidium standard, andredundant power supplies.

Sub-Site Access RoutersThe sub-site access routers, located at the prime site, provide the IP network routing interfaces between the primesite and all of the sub-sites. In the single sub-site link configuration, two sub-site access routers are deployed in acooperative WAN routing arrangement for T1/E1 subsystems. In the dual sub-site link configuration, two sub-siteaccess routers each serve as the endpoint for one of the sub-site’s WAN links. The sub-site access routers supportT1, FT1, E1, FE1 and Ethernet sub-site links.

Note that the total number of access routers utilized at a trunking IP multi-site subsystem depends on the number ofsub-sites. IP multi-site subsystems with 15 or less sub-sites require two access routers. Subsystems with more than15 sub-sites, however, require two access router pairs (that is, four access routers) where each access router paircan support up to 16 sub-sites.

1.7.3.7 Prime Site Ethernet SwitchTwo paired Ethernet switches form the prime site LAN in an IP multi-site subsystem. They are paired for redundancyso if one of them fails, half of the hosts (site controllers, comparators) on the LAN are still connected to a workingEthernet switch. In addition to these switches, a third Ethernet switch is required for IP multi-site subsystemsequipped with more than 15 sub-sites. For this configuration, all four access routers will have their LAN two portsconnected to the third Ethernet LAN switch (crossover Ethernet cable is no longer utilized). Although the third switchprovides additional available ports, these ports should not be utilized for devices affecting critical services (forexample, comparators).

Customers may choose to improve resource availability further via the “Simulcast Prime Site High Availability”feature. This feature replaces the standard two LAN switch configuration (three switches for more than 15 sub-sites)


July 16, 2018 Page 22

at the simulcast prime site with four LAN switches set up in a mesh configuration. When the same site resources arespread across four LAN switches, the failure of a single switch will remove fewer resources hence improving thegeneral availability of resources as well as improving the likelihood of preserving redundancy.

Note: For subsystems with greater than 15 sub-sites, all four access routers will utilize the fourth switch for their LAN twoconnections.

In a single prime site link configuration, there is a single prime site router which is attached to one of the Ethernetswitches. The entire subsystem is therefore, dependent on this Ethernet switch for its connection to the master site.

In a dual prime site link configuration, there are two prime site routers, each of which is attached to a different primesite LAN switch. This ensures that if either switch fails, there is still a path to a prime site router for connectivity tothe master site.

1.7.3.8 Sub-Site Ethernet SwitchThere may be either one or two Ethernet switches at the sub-site to form the sub-site LAN. In a single sub-site linkconfiguration, only one switch is used unless a second switch is needed to provide enough port capacity for all of thehosts at the sub-site. In a dual sub-site link configuration, two switches are used so that there is no single point offailure for the sub-site’s entire IP network.

1.8 PROJECT 25 (P25) USER RADIOSThe APXTM line of Project 25 (P25) two-way radios (portable and mobile) delivers exceptional performance bycombining advanced voice and data technology with legendary Motorola Solutions quality. To develop the APXplatform, Motorola Solutions’ product engineers met with personnel from public safety and law enforcementagencies to identify and design the specific functionality essential for mission critical communications. Through thatresearch and collaboration, every feature and function in APX portable and mobile radios has been designed with itsusers in mind—from its rugged, easy-to-operate form factor to the loudest, clearest audio (see the figure titled "APXSeries of P25 Two-Way Radios".

Figure 1: APX Series of P25 Two-Way Radios – Motorola Solutions offers a variety of APX radios, each designedwith its users in mind.

Motorola Solutions’ IP-enabled APX radios offer a full array of sophisticated features and progressive technology,and are the most sophisticated interoperable and rugged two-way radios on the market. Every APX radio includesthe following advanced software, hardware, and future-ready technology:


July 16, 2018 Page 23

• Support for Project 25 and Legacy Infrastructures – All APX radios are compatible with the Project 25 Phase1 and Phase 2 standards for analog and digital trunking, and support the P25 interoperability features fromboth Motorola Solutions and other manufacturers. They also operate on analog conventional, Project 25conventional, and Project 25 trunking systems, as well as systems using Motorola Solutions Project 16analog trunking, SMARTNET, and SmartZone technologies.

• Extreme Audio Profiles for Chaotic, High-Noise Environments – APX two-way radios possess intelligent 2-microphone noise reduction software and the latest AMBE vocoder technology used for audio todynamically adjust for rapidly changing, high-noise environments. When combined with the microphonesand speakers in our APX portables and control heads, these components and software enable the loudest,clearest two-way radio audio available.

• Intuitive Audio-Visual Signaling to Increase Personnel Safety – Every APX radio includes auditory andvisual alerts to improve user awareness and reduce response time. Digital Tone Signaling instantly alertson/off duty responders of emergency events. Intelligent Lighting uses color alerts to notify users of the radiomode, potential emergencies, or specific events. These audio-visual alerting mechanisms can beconfigured on both a radio and a fleet basis, enabling each user and agency to customize audio, lighting,and tone alerts to meet their needs in specific work conditions.

• Functions to Enable Easy Operation – The APX platform includes features to allow personnel tocommunicate quickly and easily in the midst of chaotic situations and extreme environments. Each radiocan be configured to announce channels, talkgroups, and zones while the user navigates through theradio’s available options—saving valuable time and eliminating the need for the user to look at the radiowhile operating it. All information associated with each contact in the radio can be consolidated into oneunified call list, reducing the time needed to navigate the radio’s software.

• Easy Radio Programming – The APX platform includes easy-to-use Customer Programming Software (CPS),a Windows-based application with drag-and-drop, clone wizard, and programming over IP capabilities. Thissoftware drastically decreases the time needed to configure and update radio programming, and simplifiesthe addition of new software and future enhancements. All APX radios can be configured with MotorolaSolutions’ Programming Over P25 (POP25) over-the-air programming functionality, which enables radios tobe programmed over the air via the ASTRO 25 system while remaining in the field without needing to bebrought in from the field. POP25 functionality reduces the time, effort, and costs needed to update radiofunctionality by allowing radios’ configuration to be accessed and updated over the air.

• Rugged and Robust Testing Standards – APX radios undergo testing for extreme conditions and physicaltreatment to ensure that they will remain operational even years of wear and tear in the field. These testsinclude include temperature shock, temperature cycling, drop, display impact, vibration, blowing rain, dust,salt fog, UV exposure and Electro-Static discharge (ESD). The basic test procedures replicate thoseconducted by the military for field equipment, and APX radios exceed the applicable Military Specification810 C, D, E, F, and G. Motorola Solutions has supplemented the MIL-STD testing process with an internaltesting process that reuses the same test unit for all environmental tests, rather than testing a new uniteach time. This ensures that the radios perform to specification regardless of the amount and type of abusethey receive.

1.9 LOGGING RECORDINGSee the following pages for Logging Recorder description.


July 16, 2018 Page 24

SECTION 2

DISPATCH CONSOLE LOGGING RECORDER Motorola is pleased to propose a new Eventide logging recorder add-on to the MCC 7500 IP Dispatch Site for Dodge County, NE. The logging recorder will record both digital and analog audio at the dispatch site.

About EventideEventide NexLog Communications Recorders and software are designed to meet the specialized needs of publicsafety and other critical communication users.

Figure 1: Eventide NexLog Communications Recorder

Contents of this system include Qty 1 NexLog740, with

• Dual Hot Swap Power Supplies• DVD-RAM Drive• 2x1TB Hot Swap RAID1 Hard Drive (1TB Storage)• 8 Analog Recording Ports, for analog console output or other analog source• 16 VoIP Recording channels for ASTRO 25 recording, for recording up to 16 talk paths• 8 Simultaneous connections to the recorder for replay using MediaWorksPLUS• License for 911 NENA ANI/ALI CAD SPILL integration• License for Motorola ASTRO 25 recording via AIS• 66-Block punch down for analog connections

4 port DVSI for replay of ASTRO 25 calls

• 1 Archiving Interface Server (AIS)• 1 Fortinet Firewall

Remote technical support and preparation for ASTRO 25 AIS integration.

October 2, 2017Use or disclosure of this proposal is subjectto the restrictions on the disclosure page.October 2, 2017 Page 6July 16, 2018

Use or disclosure of this proposal is subject to the restrictions on the disclosure page.July 16, 2018 Page 25

SECTION 2

EQUIPMENT LISTSSee the following pages for detailed Equipment included with this solution.


July 16, 2018 Page 26

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 - 1 SQM01SUM0273 MASTER SITE CONFIGURATIONMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 a 4 UA00159AA ADD: P25 PHASE 2 TDMA TRKNG OP SITE LICMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 b 24 UA00161AA ADD: P25 PHASE 2 TDMA SW BASE RADIO LICMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 c 1 UA00152AA ADD:500 RADIO USER LICENSESMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 d 8 UA00162AA ADD: PHASE 2 DYNAMIC CH BASE RADIO LICMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 f 4 UA00153AA ADD: ASTRO 25 FDMA SITE LICENSEMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 g 4 UA00160AA ADD: PHASE 2 DYNAMIC TG ASGNMT SITE LICMASTER SITE LICENSE 1 h 2 CA01316AA ADD: UNC ADDTL DEVICE LIC (QTY 10)Dodge County BLDG MOSCAD 2 - 1 F4544 SITE MANAGER ADVANCEDDodge County BLDG MOSCAD 2 a 3 V592 AAD TERM BLCK & CONN WIDodge County BLDG MOSCAD 2 b 1 VA00905 ADD:24/48 VDC PS TO SMDodge County BLDG MOSCAD 2 c 1 VA00872 ADD: SDM ASTRO RTU FW CURR ASTRO RELDodge County BLDG GCM8000 3 - 1 T7321 GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 3 a 2 CA01183AA GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 3 b 2 CA01185AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE OPERATIONDodge County BLDG GCM8000 3 c 2 CA01901AA ADD: P25 TDMA COMPARATOR SOFTWAREDodge County BLDG GCM8000 3 d 1 CA02310AA ADD: R&TTE CERTIFICATIONDodge County BLDG GCM8000 3 e 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREDodge County BLDG GCM8000 4 - 1 T7321 GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 4 a 2 CA01183AA GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 4 b 2 CA01185AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE OPERATIONDodge County BLDG GCM8000 4 c 2 CA01901AA ADD: P25 TDMA COMPARATOR SOFTWAREDodge County BLDG GCM8000 4 d 1 CA03111AA ADD: CEC COMPLIANCEDodge County BLDG GCM8000 4 e 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREDodge County BLDG GCM8000 5 - 1 T7321 GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 5 a 1 CA01183AA GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 5 b 1 CA01185AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE OPERATIONDodge County BLDG GCM8000 5 c 1 CA01901AA ADD: P25 TDMA COMPARATOR SOFTWAREDodge County BLDG GCM8000 5 d 1 CA02310AA ADD: R&TTE CERTIFICATIONDodge County BLDG GCM8000 5 e 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREDodge County BLDG GCM8000 6 - 1 T7321 GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 6 a 1 CA01183AA GCM 8000 COMPARATORDodge County BLDG GCM8000 6 b 1 CA01185AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE OPERATIONDodge County BLDG GCM8000 6 c 1 CA01901AA ADD: P25 TDMA COMPARATOR SOFTWAREDodge County BLDG GCM8000 6 d 1 CA02310AA ADD: R&TTE CERTIFICATIONDodge County BLDG GCM8000 6 e 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREDodge County BLDG GCP8000 7 - 1 T7038 GCP 8000 SITE CONTROLLERDodge County BLDG GCP8000 7 a 1 CA00303AA ADD: QTY (1) SITE CONTROLLERDodge County BLDG GCP8000 7 b 5 CA02206AA ADD: SIMULCAST REMOTE SITE LICENSE IV&DDodge County BLDG GCP8000 7 c 1 CA01194AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE SITE CONTROLLER SOFTWAREDodge County BLDG GCP8000 7 d 1 CA02310AA ADD: R&TTE CERTIFICATIONDodge County BLDG GCP8000 7 e 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREDodge County BLDG GCP8000 8 - 1 T7038 GCP 8000 SITE CONTROLLERDodge County BLDG GCP8000 8 a 1 CA00303AA ADD: QTY (1) SITE CONTROLLERDodge County BLDG GCP8000 8 b 5 CA02206AA ADD: SIMULCAST REMOTE SITE LICENSE IV&DDodge County BLDG GCP8000 8 c 1 CA01194AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE SITE CONTROLLER SOFTWAREDodge County BLDG GCP8000 8 d 1 CA02310AA ADD: R&TTE CERTIFICATIONDodge County BLDG GCP8000 8 e 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREDodge County BLDG GPS 9 - 1 DSTRAK91008EDC PRIME/MASTER SITE REDUNDANT MODULAR FREQUENCY TIMING SYSTEM DCDodge County BLDG GPS 10 - 50 L1700 FSJ1-50A CABLE: 1/4" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTDodge County BLDG GPS 11 - 4 DDN9769 F1PNM-HC 1/4" TYPE N MALE CONNECTOR FOR FSJ1-50A CABLEDodge County BLDG PrimeGateway 12 - 2 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYDodge County BLDG PrimeGateway 12 a 2 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERDodge County BLDG PrimeSwitch 13 - 2 CLN1859 2620-48 ETHERNET SWITCHDodge County BLDG Subsite Gateway 14 - 2 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYDodge County BLDG Subsite Gateway 14 a 2 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERDodge County BLDG BackHaulSwitch 15 - 2 CLN1856 2620-24 ETHERNET SWITCHDodge County BLDG RACK 16 - 2 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKDodge County BLDG RACK 17 - 4 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETDodge County BLDG SPARES 18 - 1 DSTRAK91061 FOUR PORT DDMDodge County BLDG SPARES 19 - 1 CLN1859 2620-48 ETHERNET SWITCHDodge County BLDG SPARES 20 - 1 DLN6966 FRU: GCP 8000/GCM 8000/GPB 8000Dodge County BLDG SPARES 21 - 1 DLN6455 CONFIGURATION/SERVICE SOFTWAREDodge-Snyder MOSCAD 22 - 1 F4544 SITE MANAGER ADVANCEDDodge-Snyder MOSCAD 22 a 1 VA00872 ADD: SDM ASTRO RTU FW CURR ASTRO RELDodge-Snyder MOSCAD 22 b 3 V592 AAD TERM BLCK & CONN WIDodge-Snyder MOSCAD 22 c 1 VA00905 ADD:24/48 VDC PS TO SMDodge-Snyder NETWORK 23 - 2 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYDodge-Snyder NETWORK 23 a 2 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 - 1 SQM01SUM7054 GTR 8000 EXPANDABLE SITE SUBSYSTEMDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 m 6 CA01842AA ADD: P25 TDMA SOFTWAREDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 a 1 CA00855AA ADD: 700/800 MHZDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 b 2 CA01902AA ADD: P25 DYNAMIC CHANNEL SOFTWAREDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 c 1 X306AC ADD: QTY (6) GTR 8000 BASE RADIOS

800 MHZ SIMULCAST EQUIPMENT


July 16, 2018 Page 27

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 d 6 CA01193AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE BASE RADIO SOFTWAREDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 e 1 CA01943AA ADD:2ND BRANCH DIVERSITYDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 f 1 CA00861AA ADD: CABINET RMC W/ CAPABILITY OF 6 BRSDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 g 1 CA00879AA ADD: PRIMARY 6 PORT CAVITY COMBINERDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 h 1 CA00883AA ADD: 800 MHZ TX FILTER W/PMUDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 i 2 CA01536AA ADD: GPB 8000 REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION MODULEDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 j 2 CA01537AA ADD: REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION SOFTWAREDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 k 1 X882AH ADD: 7.5 FT OPEN RACK, 48RUDodge-Snyder GTR8000 24 l 1 CA02686AA ADD: AC DC POWER DISTRIBUTIONDodge-Snyder GTR8000 25 - 2 PMUG1017A GNSS REMOTE RECEIVER ASSYDodge-Snyder GTR8000 26 - 2 DSWM4 HEAVY DUTY W STYLE WALL MOUNT WITH 4 INCH STAND-OFFDodge-Snyder GTR8000 27 - 2 DSP04268 ALUMINUM 6061-T6. PIPE 1 INCH SCHED 40Dodge-Snyder GTR8000 28 - 2 DS30C87465CO1 125FT OUTDOOR UV PROTECTED CABLE 6 PR, 22AWG DB15 CABLEDodge-Snyder RACK 29 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKDodge-Snyder RACK 30 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETDodge-Snyder RFDS 31 - 1 DS43783i01T TTA, 796-824MHZ, SINGLE / DUAL NETWORK, TEST PORTDodge-Snyder RFDS 32 - 1 DS9100123 TTA MOUNTING BRACKET FOR 428D, 432, 433, 434, AND 435 SERIESDodge-Snyder RFDS 33 - 1 DS43783I01C48 CONTROL MONITORING UNIT, 796-824MHZ,DUAL DIVERSITY,ETHERNET,48VDCDodge-Snyder SPARES 34 - 1 DLN6455 CONFIGURATION/SERVICE SOFTWAREDodge-Snyder SPARES 35 - 1 DLN6781 FRU: POWER SUPPLYDodge-Snyder SPARES 36 - 1 DLN6895 FRU: PA 7/800 MHzDodge-Snyder SPARES 37 - 1 DLN6885 FRU: XCVR 7/800 MHZ V2Dodge-Snyder SPARES 38 - 1 DLN6898 FRU: FAN MODULEDodge-Snyder SPARES 39 - 1 DLN6634 FRU: 700/800 MHZ SITE LNADodge-Snyder SPARES 40 - 1 DLN1306 FRU: 700/800 MHZ CABINET RMC MODULEREC Dodge Snyder ANTENNA 41 - 2 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDREC Dodge Snyder ANTENNA 42 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSREC Dodge Snyder UPPERJUMPR 43 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Dodge Snyder UPPERJUMPR 44 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Dodge Snyder UPPERJUMPR 45 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Dodge Snyder JUMPER 46 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGREC Dodge Snyder TTAJUMPR 47 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Dodge Snyder TTAJUMPR 48 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Dodge Snyder TTAJUMPR 49 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 50 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETREC Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 51 - 1 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORREC Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 52 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITREC Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 53 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 54 - 20 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC Dodge Snyder TESTLINE 55 - 360 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Dodge Snyder TESTLINE 56 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Dodge Snyder TESTLINE 57 - 1 DDN1089 L4TNF-PSA TYPE N FEMALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Dodge Snyder TESTLINE 58 - 7 DSSG1212B2U SG12-12B2U, SUREGROUND 1/2", 48"REC Dodge Snyder TESTLINE 59 - 2 DSL4SGRIP L4SGRIP SUPPORT HOIST GRIP 1/2" LDFREC Dodge Snyder ANTACC 60 - 12 MDN6816 STD HANGERS FOR 1/2IN CABLE & EW180/EW220/EW-HANGER KIT STAINLESS-10PKREC Dodge Snyder ANTACC 61 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSREC Dodge Snyder ANTACC 62 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKREC Dodge Snyder SURGE 63 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGREC Dodge Snyder SURGE 64 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGXMIT Dodge Snyder ANTENNA 65 - 1 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDXMIT Dodge Snyder ANTENNA 66 - 1 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSXMIT Dodge Snyder UPPERJUMPR 67 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMIT Dodge Snyder UPPERJUMPR 68 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMIT Dodge Snyder JUMPER 69 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXMIT Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 70 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXMIT Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 71 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXMIT Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 72 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXMIT Dodge Snyder MAINLINE 73 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXMIT Dodge Snyder ANTACC 74 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXMIT Dodge Snyder SURGE 75 - 1 DSTSXDFMBF RF SPD, 698-2700MHZ DC BLOCK HIGH PWR, DIN FEM/MALE BI-DIR W/ BRACKETXMIT Dodge Snyder SURGE 76 - 1 DSGSAKITD GROUND STRAP KIT - DINXMIT Dodge Snyder LOWERJUMPR 77 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMIT Dodge Snyder LOWERJUMPR 78 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMIT Dodge Snyder LOWERJUMPR 79 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEUehling MOSCAD 80 - 1 F4544 SITE MANAGER ADVANCEDUehling MOSCAD 80 a 1 VA00872 ADD: SDM ASTRO RTU FW CURR ASTRO RELUehling MOSCAD 80 b 3 V592 AAD TERM BLCK & CONN WIUehling MOSCAD 80 c 1 VA00905 ADD:24/48 VDC PS TO SMUehling NETWORK 81 - 2 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYUehling NETWORK 81 a 2 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERUehling GTR8000 82 - 1 SQM01SUM7054 GTR 8000 EXPANDABLE SITE SUBSYSTEMUehling GTR8000 24 m 6 CA01842AA ADD: P25 TDMA SOFTWAREUehling GTR8000 82 a 1 CA00855AA ADD: 700/800 MHZUehling GTR8000 82 b 2 CA01902AA ADD: P25 DYNAMIC CHANNEL SOFTWAREUehling GTR8000 82 c 1 X306AC ADD: QTY (6) GTR 8000 BASE RADIOS


July 16, 2018 Page 28

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONUehling GTR8000 82 d 6 CA01193AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE BASE RADIO SOFTWAREUehling GTR8000 82 e 1 CA01943AA ADD:2ND BRANCH DIVERSITYUehling GTR8000 82 f 1 CA00861AA ADD: CABINET RMC W/ CAPABILITY OF 6 BRSUehling GTR8000 82 g 1 CA00879AA ADD: PRIMARY 6 PORT CAVITY COMBINERUehling GTR8000 82 h 1 CA00883AA ADD: 800 MHZ TX FILTER W/PMUUehling GTR8000 82 i 2 CA01536AA ADD: GPB 8000 REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION MODULEUehling GTR8000 82 j 2 CA01537AA ADD: REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION SOFTWAREUehling GTR8000 82 k 1 X882AH ADD: 7.5 FT OPEN RACK, 48RUUehling GTR8000 82 l 1 CA02686AA ADD: AC DC POWER DISTRIBUTIONUehling GTR8000 83 - 2 PMUG1017A GNSS REMOTE RECEIVER ASSYUehling GTR8000 84 - 2 DSWM4 HEAVY DUTY W STYLE WALL MOUNT WITH 4 INCH STAND-OFFUehling GTR8000 85 - 2 DSP04268 ALUMINUM 6061-T6. PIPE 1 INCH SCHED 40Uehling GTR8000 86 - 2 DS30C87465CO1 125FT OUTDOOR UV PROTECTED CABLE 6 PR, 22AWG DB15 CABLEUehling RACK 87 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKUehling RACK 88 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETUehling RFDS 89 - 1 DS43783i01T TTA, 796-824MHZ, SINGLE / DUAL NETWORK, TEST PORTUehling RFDS 90 - 1 DS9100123 TTA MOUNTING BRACKET FOR 428D, 432, 433, 434, AND 435 SERIESUehling RFDS 91 - 1 DS43783I01C48 CONTROL MONITORING UNIT, 796-824MHZ,DUAL DIVERSITY,ETHERNET,48VDCUehling ANTENNA 92 - 2 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDREC Uehling ANTENNA 93 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSREC Uehling UPPERJUMPR 94 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Uehling UPPERJUMPR 95 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Uehling UPPERJUMPR 96 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Uehling JUMPER 97 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGREC Uehling TTAJUMPR 98 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Uehling TTAJUMPR 99 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Uehling TTAJUMPR 100 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Uehling MAINLINE 101 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETREC Uehling MAINLINE 102 - 1 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORREC Uehling MAINLINE 103 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITREC Uehling MAINLINE 104 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC Uehling MAINLINE 105 - 20 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC Uehling TESTLINE 106 - 360 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Uehling TESTLINE 107 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Uehling TESTLINE 108 - 1 DDN1089 L4TNF-PSA TYPE N FEMALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Uehling TESTLINE 109 - 7 DSSG1212B2U SG12-12B2U, SUREGROUND 1/2", 48"REC Uehling TESTLINE 110 - 2 DSL4SGRIP L4SGRIP SUPPORT HOIST GRIP 1/2" LDFREC Uehling ANTACC 111 - 12 MDN6816 STD HANGERS FOR 1/2IN CABLE & EW180/EW220/EW-HANGER KIT STAINLESS-10PKREC Uehling ANTACC 112 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSREC Uehling ANTACC 113 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKREC Uehling SURGE 114 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGREC Uehling SURGE 115 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGXMITT Uehling ANTENNA 116 - 1 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDXMITT Uehling ANTENNA 117 - 1 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSXMITT Uehling UPPERJUMPR 118 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMITT Uehling UPPERJUMPR 119 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMITT Uehling JUMPER 120 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXMITT Uehling MAINLINE 121 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXMITT Uehling MAINLINE 122 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXMITT Uehling MAINLINE 123 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXMITT Uehling MAINLINE 124 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXMITT Uehling ANTACC 125 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXMITT Uehling SURGE 126 - 1 DSTSXDFMBF RF SPD, 698-2700MHZ DC BLOCK HIGH PWR, DIN FEM/MALE BI-DIR W/ BRACKETXMITT Uehling SURGE 127 - 1 DSGSAKITD GROUND STRAP KIT - DINXMITT Uehling LOWERJUMPR 128 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMITT Uehling LOWERJUMPR 129 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMITT Uehling LOWERJUMPR 130 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLENorth Bend CR10 MOSCAD 131 - 1 F4544 SITE MANAGER ADVANCEDNorth Bend CR10 MOSCAD 131 a 1 VA00872 ADD: SDM ASTRO RTU FW CURR ASTRO RELNorth Bend CR10 MOSCAD 131 b 3 V592 AAD TERM BLCK & CONN WINorth Bend CR10 MOSCAD 131 c 1 VA00905 ADD:24/48 VDC PS TO SMNorth Bend CR10 NETWORK 132 - 2 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYNorth Bend CR10 NETWORK 132 a 2 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 - 1 SQM01SUM7054 GTR 8000 EXPANDABLE SITE SUBSYSTEMNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 24 m 6 CA01842AA ADD: P25 TDMA SOFTWARENorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 a 1 CA00855AA ADD: 700/800 MHZNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 b 2 CA01902AA ADD: P25 DYNAMIC CHANNEL SOFTWARENorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 c 1 X306AC ADD: QTY (6) GTR 8000 BASE RADIOSNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 d 6 CA01193AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE BASE RADIO SOFTWARENorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 e 1 CA01943AA ADD:2ND BRANCH DIVERSITYNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 f 1 CA00861AA ADD: CABINET RMC W/ CAPABILITY OF 6 BRSNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 g 1 CA00879AA ADD: PRIMARY 6 PORT CAVITY COMBINERNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 h 1 CA00883AA ADD: 800 MHZ TX FILTER W/PMUNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 i 2 CA01536AA ADD: GPB 8000 REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION MODULENorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 j 2 CA01537AA ADD: REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION SOFTWARE


July 16, 2018 Page 29

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 k 1 X882AH ADD: 7.5 FT OPEN RACK, 48RUNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 133 l 1 CA02686AA ADD: AC DC POWER DISTRIBUTIONNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 134 - 2 PMUG1017A GNSS REMOTE RECEIVER ASSYNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 135 - 2 DSWM4 HEAVY DUTY W STYLE WALL MOUNT WITH 4 INCH STAND-OFFNorth Bend CR10 GTR8000 136 - 2 DSP04268 ALUMINUM 6061-T6. PIPE 1 INCH SCHED 40North Bend CR10 GTR8000 137 - 2 DS30C87465CO1 125FT OUTDOOR UV PROTECTED CABLE 6 PR, 22AWG DB15 CABLENorth Bend CR10 RACK 138 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKNorth Bend CR10 RACK 139 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETNorth Bend CR10 RFDS 140 - 1 DS43783i01T TTA, 796-824MHZ, SINGLE / DUAL NETWORK, TEST PORTNorth Bend CR10 RFDS 141 - 1 DS9100123 TTA MOUNTING BRACKET FOR 428D, 432, 433, 434, AND 435 SERIESNorth Bend CR10 RFDS 142 - 1 DS43783I01C48 CONTROL MONITORING UNIT, 796-824MHZ,DUAL DIVERSITY,ETHERNET,48VDCREC North Bend ANTENNA 143 - 2 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDREC North Bend ANTENNA 144 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSREC North Bend UPPERJUMPR 145 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC North Bend UPPERJUMPR 146 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC North Bend UPPERJUMPR 147 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC North Bend JUMPER 148 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGREC North Bend TTAJUMPR 149 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC North Bend TTAJUMPR 150 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC North Bend TTAJUMPR 151 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC North Bend MAINLINE 152 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETREC North Bend MAINLINE 153 - 1 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORREC North Bend MAINLINE 154 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITREC North Bend MAINLINE 155 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC North Bend MAINLINE 156 - 20 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC North Bend TESTLINE 157 - 360 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC North Bend TESTLINE 158 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC North Bend TESTLINE 159 - 1 DDN1089 L4TNF-PSA TYPE N FEMALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC North Bend TESTLINE 160 - 7 DSSG1212B2U SG12-12B2U, SUREGROUND 1/2", 48"XMITT North Bend TESTLINE 161 - 2 DSL4SGRIP L4SGRIP SUPPORT HOIST GRIP 1/2" LDFXMITT North Bend ANTACC 162 - 12 MDN6816 STD HANGERS FOR 1/2IN CABLE & EW180/EW220/EW-HANGER KIT STAINLESS-10PKXMITT North Bend ANTACC 163 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXMITT North Bend ANTACC 164 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKXMITT North Bend SURGE 165 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGXMITT North Bend SURGE 166 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGXMITT North Bend ANTENNA 167 - 1 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDXMITT North Bend ANTENNA 168 - 1 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSXMITT North Bend UPPERJUMPR 169 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMITT North Bend UPPERJUMPR 170 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMITT North Bend JUMPER 171 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXMITT North Bend MAINLINE 172 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXMITT North Bend MAINLINE 173 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXMITT North Bend MAINLINE 174 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXMITT North Bend MAINLINE 175 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXMITT North Bend ANTACC 176 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXMITT North Bend SURGE 177 - 1 DSTSXDFMBF RF SPD, 698-2700MHZ DC BLOCK HIGH PWR, DIN FEM/MALE BI-DIR W/ BRACKETXMITT North Bend SURGE 178 - 1 DSGSAKITD GROUND STRAP KIT - DINXMITT North Bend LOWERJUMPR 179 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMITT North Bend LOWERJUMPR 180 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMITT North Bend LOWERJUMPR 181 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLENickerson Hooper MOSCAD 182 - 1 F4544 SITE MANAGER ADVANCEDNickerson Hooper MOSCAD 182 a 1 VA00872 ADD: SDM ASTRO RTU FW CURR ASTRO RELNickerson Hooper MOSCAD 182 b 3 V592 AAD TERM BLCK & CONN WINickerson Hooper MOSCAD 182 c 1 VA00905 ADD:24/48 VDC PS TO SMNickerson Hooper NETWORK 183 - 2 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYNickerson Hooper NETWORK 183 a 2 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 - 1 SQM01SUM7054 GTR 8000 EXPANDABLE SITE SUBSYSTEMNickerson Hooper GTR8000 24 m 6 CA01842AA ADD: P25 TDMA SOFTWARENickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 a 1 CA00855AA ADD: 700/800 MHZNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 b 2 CA01902AA ADD: P25 DYNAMIC CHANNEL SOFTWARENickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 c 1 X306AC ADD: QTY (6) GTR 8000 BASE RADIOSNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 d 6 CA01193AA ADD: IP BASED MULTISITE BASE RADIO SOFTWARENickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 e 1 CA01943AA ADD:2ND BRANCH DIVERSITYNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 f 1 CA00861AA ADD: CABINET RMC W/ CAPABILITY OF 6 BRSNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 g 1 CA00879AA ADD: PRIMARY 6 PORT CAVITY COMBINERNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 h 1 CA00883AA ADD: 800 MHZ TX FILTER W/PMUNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 i 2 CA01536AA ADD: GPB 8000 REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION MODULENickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 j 2 CA01537AA ADD: REFERENCE DISTRIBUTION SOFTWARENickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 k 1 X882AH ADD: 7.5 FT OPEN RACK, 48RUNickerson Hooper GTR8000 184 l 1 CA02686AA ADD: AC DC POWER DISTRIBUTIONNickerson Hooper GTR8000 185 - 2 PMUG1017A GNSS REMOTE RECEIVER ASSYNickerson Hooper GTR8000 186 - 2 DSWM4 HEAVY DUTY W STYLE WALL MOUNT WITH 4 INCH STAND-OFFNickerson Hooper GTR8000 187 - 2 DSP04268 ALUMINUM 6061-T6. PIPE 1 INCH SCHED 40Nickerson Hooper GTR8000 188 - 2 DS30C87465CO1 125FT OUTDOOR UV PROTECTED CABLE 6 PR, 22AWG DB15 CABLEREC Nickerson Hooper RACK 189 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACK


July 16, 2018 Page 30

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONREC Nickerson Hooper RACK 190 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETREC Nickerson Hooper RFDS 191 - 1 DS43783i01T TTA, 796-824MHZ, SINGLE / DUAL NETWORK, TEST PORTREC Nickerson Hooper RFDS 192 - 1 DS9100123 TTA MOUNTING BRACKET FOR 428D, 432, 433, 434, AND 435 SERIESREC Nickerson Hooper RFDS 193 - 1 DS43783I01C48 CONTROL MONITORING UNIT, 796-824MHZ,DUAL DIVERSITY,ETHERNET,48VDCREC Nickerson Hooper ANTENNA 194 - 2 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDREC Nickerson Hooper ANTENNA 195 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSREC Nickerson Hooper UPPERJUMPR 196 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Nickerson Hooper UPPERJUMPR 197 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Nickerson Hooper UPPERJUMPR 198 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Nickerson Hooper JUMPER 199 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGREC Nickerson Hooper TTAJUMPR 200 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Nickerson Hooper TTAJUMPR 201 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Nickerson Hooper TTAJUMPR 202 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 203 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETREC Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 204 - 1 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORREC Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 205 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITREC Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 206 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 207 - 20 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPREC Nickerson Hooper TESTLINE 208 - 360 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTREC Nickerson Hooper TESTLINE 209 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Nickerson Hooper TESTLINE 210 - 1 DDN1089 L4TNF-PSA TYPE N FEMALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEREC Nickerson Hooper TESTLINE 211 - 7 DSSG1212B2U SG12-12B2U, SUREGROUND 1/2", 48"REC Nickerson Hooper TESTLINE 212 - 2 DSL4SGRIP L4SGRIP SUPPORT HOIST GRIP 1/2" LDFREC Nickerson Hooper ANTACC 213 - 12 MDN6816 STD HANGERS FOR 1/2IN CABLE & EW180/EW220/EW-HANGER KIT STAINLESS-10PKREC Nickerson Hooper ANTACC 214 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXMITT Nickerson Hooper ANTACC 215 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKXMITT Nickerson Hooper SURGE 216 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGXMITT Nickerson Hooper SURGE 217 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGXMITT Nickerson Hooper ANTENNA 218 - 1 DSCC80711 OMNI, CORPORATE COLLINEAR, 10.5DBD, 746-870MHZ, PIM & 25KW PIP RATEDXMITT Nickerson Hooper ANTENNA 219 - 1 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSXMITT Nickerson Hooper UPPERJUMPR 220 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMITT Nickerson Hooper UPPERJUMPR 221 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMITT Nickerson Hooper JUMPER 222 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXMITT Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 223 - 360 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXMITT Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 224 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXMITT Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 225 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXMITT Nickerson Hooper MAINLINE 226 - 2 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXMITT Nickerson Hooper ANTACC 227 - 12 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXMITT Nickerson Hooper SURGE 228 - 1 DSTSXDFMBF RF SPD, 698-2700MHZ DC BLOCK HIGH PWR, DIN FEM/MALE BI-DIR W/ BRACKETXMITT Nickerson Hooper SURGE 229 - 1 DSGSAKITD GROUND STRAP KIT - DINXMITT Nickerson Hooper LOWERJUMPR 230 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXMITT Nickerson Hooper LOWERJUMPR 231 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXMITT Nickerson Hooper LOWERJUMPR 232 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLE

UHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 1 - 1 T7039 GTR 8000 Base RadioUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 1 a 1 CA01949AA ADD: ANALOG ONLY CONV SWUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 1 b 1 CA01950AA ADD: CONVENTIONAL MULTI-NAC MULTI-PLUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 1 c 1 CA01952AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST SOFTWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 1 d 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 1 e 1 CA01504AA ADD: ANTENNA RELAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 1 f 1 X640AL ADD: UHF R2 (435-524 MHZ)UHF Paging Dodge Snyder NETWORK 2 - 2 CLN1856 2620-24 ETHERNET SWITCHUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 3 - 1 F2979 MLC 8000UHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 3 a 1 VA00011AA 19INCH RACK MOUNT HARDWARE KIT CABINET OR RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 3 b 1 VA00012AA ADD: 120/240VAC TO +12VDC POWER ADAPTERUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 3 c 1 VA00783AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST COMPARATOR/GATEWAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder GPS 4 - 1 DSTRAK88358M GPS CLOCK, 10MHZ, DOCXO, 48VDC INCL ANT,100' COAX W/DONGLE SNMPV3UHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 5 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 6 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETXmit Remote UHF ANTENNA 7 - 1 DSOA8067DIN OFFSET, EXPOSED DIPOLE ARRAY, 11 DBD, 400-520 MHZ, PIM RATEDXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 8 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 9 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 10 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 11 - 310 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 12 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 13 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXmit Dodge-Snyder UHF MAINLINE 14 - 10 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXmit Remote UHF ANTACC 15 - 11 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXmit Remote UHF SURGE 16 - 1 DSVHF50DMAPGR RF SPD, 100-512MHZ, DC BLOCK HIGH POWER DIN MALE ANT, DIN FEMALE EQUIPXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 17 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 18 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 19 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 - 1 T7039 GTR 8000 Base RadioUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 a 1 CA01949AA ADD: ANALOG ONLY CONV SWUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 b 1 CA01950AA ADD: CONVENTIONAL MULTI-NAC MULTI-PL

UHF PAGING EQUIPMENT


July 16, 2018 Page 31

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 c 1 CA01952AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST SOFTWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 d 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 f 1 CA01504AA ADD: ANTENNA RELAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 e 1 X640AL ADD: UHF R2 (435-524 MHZ)UHF Paging Dodge Snyder NETWORK 21 - 2 CLN1856 2620-24 ETHERNET SWITCHUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 22 - 1 F2979 MLC 8000UHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 22 a 1 VA00011AA 19INCH RACK MOUNT HARDWARE KIT CABINET OR RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 22 b 1 VA00012AA ADD: 120/240VAC TO +12VDC POWER ADAPTERUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 22 c 1 VA00783AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST COMPARATOR/GATEWAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder GPS 23 - 1 DSTRAK88358M GPS CLOCK, 10MHZ, DOCXO, 48VDC INCL ANT,100' COAX W/DONGLE SNMPV3UHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 24 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 25 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETXmit Remote UHF ANTENNA 26 - 1 DSOA8067DIN OFFSET, EXPOSED DIPOLE ARRAY, 11 DBD, 400-520 MHZ, PIM RATEDXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 27 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 28 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 29 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 30 - 310 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 31 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 32 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXmit Dodge-Snyder UHF MAINLINE 33 - 10 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXmit Remote UHF ANTACC 34 - 11 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXmit Remote UHF SURGE 35 - 1 DSVHF50DMAPGR RF SPD, 100-512MHZ, DC BLOCK HIGH POWER DIN MALE ANT, DIN FEMALE EQUIPXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 36 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 37 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 38 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 39 - 1 T7039 GTR 8000 Base RadioUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 39 a 1 CA01949AA ADD: ANALOG ONLY CONV SWUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 39 b 1 CA01950AA ADD: CONVENTIONAL MULTI-NAC MULTI-PLUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 39 c 1 CA01952AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST SOFTWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 f 1 CA01504AA ADD: ANTENNA RELAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 39 d 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 39 e 1 X640AL ADD: UHF R2 (435-524 MHZ)UHF Paging Dodge Snyder NETWORK 40 - 2 CLN1856 2620-24 ETHERNET SWITCHUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 41 - 1 F2979 MLC 8000UHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 41 a 1 VA00011AA 19INCH RACK MOUNT HARDWARE KIT CABINET OR RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 41 b 1 VA00012AA ADD: 120/240VAC TO +12VDC POWER ADAPTERUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 41 c 1 VA00783AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST COMPARATOR/GATEWAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder GPS 42 - 1 DSTRAK88358M GPS CLOCK, 10MHZ, DOCXO, 48VDC INCL ANT,100' COAX W/DONGLE SNMPV3UHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 43 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 44 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETXmit Remote UHF ANTENNA 45 - 1 DSOA8067DIN OFFSET, EXPOSED DIPOLE ARRAY, 11 DBD, 400-520 MHZ, PIM RATEDXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 46 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 47 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 48 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 49 - 310 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 50 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 51 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXmit Dodge-Snyder UHF MAINLINE 52 - 10 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXmit Remote UHF ANTACC 53 - 11 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXmit Remote UHF SURGE 54 - 1 DSVHF50DMAPGR RF SPD, 100-512MHZ, DC BLOCK HIGH POWER DIN MALE ANT, DIN FEMALE EQUIPXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 55 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 56 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 57 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 58 - 1 T7039 GTR 8000 Base RadioUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 58 a 1 CA01949AA ADD: ANALOG ONLY CONV SWUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 58 b 1 CA01950AA ADD: CONVENTIONAL MULTI-NAC MULTI-PLUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 58 c 1 CA01952AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST SOFTWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 58 d 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 20 f 1 CA01504AA ADD: ANTENNA RELAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder CONV_GTR 58 e 1 X640AL ADD: UHF R2 (435-524 MHZ)UHF Paging Dodge Snyder NETWORK 59 - 2 CLN1856 2620-24 ETHERNET SWITCHUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 60 - 1 F2979 MLC 8000UHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 60 a 1 VA00011AA 19INCH RACK MOUNT HARDWARE KIT CABINET OR RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 60 b 1 VA00012AA ADD: 120/240VAC TO +12VDC POWER ADAPTERUHF Paging Dodge Snyder MLC8000 60 c 1 VA00783AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST COMPARATOR/GATEWAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder GPS 61 - 1 DSTRAK88358M GPS CLOCK, 10MHZ, DOCXO, 48VDC INCL ANT,100' COAX W/DONGLE SNMPV3UHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 62 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder RACK 63 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETXmit Remote UHF ANTENNA 64 - 1 DSOA8067DIN OFFSET, EXPOSED DIPOLE ARRAY, 11 DBD, 400-520 MHZ, PIM RATEDXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 65 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 66 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF UPPERJUMPR 67 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 68 - 310 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 69 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXmit Remote UHF MAINLINE 70 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KIT


July 16, 2018 Page 32

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONXmit Dodge-Snyder UHF MAINLINE 71 - 10 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXmit Remote UHF ANTACC 72 - 11 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXmit Remote UHF SURGE 73 - 1 DSVHF50DMAPGR RF SPD, 100-512MHZ, DC BLOCK HIGH POWER DIN MALE ANT, DIN FEMALE EQUIPXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 74 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 75 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF LOWERJUMPR 76 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 77 - 1 T7039 GTR 8000 Base RadioUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 77 a 1 CA01949AA ADD: ANALOG ONLY CONV SWUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 77 b 1 CA01950AA ADD: CONVENTIONAL MULTI-NAC MULTI-PLUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 77 c 1 CA01952AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST SOFTWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 77 d 1 X153AW ADD: RACK MOUNT HARDWAREUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 20 f 1 CA01504AA ADD: ANTENNA RELAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 77 e 1 X640AL ADD: UHF R2 (435-524 MHZ)UHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 78 - 2 CLN1856 2620-24 ETHERNET SWITCHUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 79 - 1 F2979 MLC 8000UHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 79 a 1 VA00011AA 19INCH RACK MOUNT HARDWARE KIT CABINET OR RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 79 b 1 VA00012AA ADD: 120/240VAC TO +12VDC POWER ADAPTERUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 79 c 1 VA00783AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST COMPARATOR/GATEWAYUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 80 - 1 DSTRAK88358M GPS CLOCK, 10MHZ, DOCXO, 48VDC INCL ANT,100' COAX W/DONGLE SNMPV3UHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 81 - 1 TRN7343 SEVEN AND A HALF FOOT RACKUHF Paging Dodge Snyder UHF Paging Dodge Sny 82 - 1 BLN6200 AC POWER STRIP, 6 OUTLETXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 83 - 1 DSOA8067DIN OFFSET, EXPOSED DIPOLE ARRAY, 11 DBD, 400-520 MHZ, PIM RATEDXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 84 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 85 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 86 - 2 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 87 - 310 L3599 AVA6-50 CABLE: 1-1/4" AVA6-50, COAX CORRUG COPPER, BLACK PE JACKETXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 88 - 2 DS114EZDF 114EZ DIN FEMALE CONNECTORXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 89 - 7 DSSG11412B2U SG114-12B2U 1-1/4" SUREGROUND GROUNDING KITXmit Dodge-Snyder UHF Xmit Dodge-Snyder UH 90 - 10 DSL6SGRIP L6SGRIP 1-1/4" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 91 - 11 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 92 - 1 DSVHF50DMAPGR RF SPD, 100-512MHZ, DC BLOCK HIGH POWER DIN MALE ANT, DIN FEMALE EQUIPXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 93 - 25 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 94 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEXmit Remote UHF Xmit Remote UHF 95 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLEPrime Site MLC8000 96 - 1 F2979 MLC 8000Prime Site MLC8000 96 a 1 VA00783AA ADD: ANALOG CONVENTIONAL SIMULCAST COMPARATOR/GATEWAYPrime Site MLC8000 96 b 1 VA00012AA ADD: 120/240VAC TO +12VDC POWER ADAPTERPrime Site MLC8000 96 c 1 VA00011AA 19INCH RACK MOUNT HARDWARE KIT CABINET OR RACKPrime Site CCGW 97 - 1 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYPrime Site CCGW 97 a 1 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERPrime Site CCGW 97 b 1 CA02141AA ADD: LOW DENSITY ENH CONV GATEWAY

Prime Site 1 - 1 DS255589 DC SYSTEM FP2 -48/300 LVBD 4BTPrime Site 2 - 3 DS241115105 RECTIFIER, FLATPACK 2 48/2000 HEPrime Site 3 - 1 DS265503 INVERTER, 1000VA 48VDC/120VAC ESI SERIES 1KVA/800WPrime Site 4 - 1 ds502656 25 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERPrime Site 5 - 2 ds506574 48V 155AH 12V155FS ENERSYS BATT SETPrime Site 6 - 2 ds502660 BREAKER 50A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETPrime Site 7 - 10 ds502657 BREAKER 30A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETPrime Site 8 - 2 ds502650 1 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERPrime Site 9 - 2 DS219593 BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANEL-/+ 24/48, 1U 6/6PPrime Site 10 - 4 DS502666 100 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site 1 11 - 1 DS255589 DC SYSTEM FP2 -48/300 LVBD 4BTRemote Site 1 12 - 5 DS241115105 RECTIFIER, FLATPACK 2 48/2000 HERemote Site 1 13 - 1 DS265503 INVERTER, 1000VA 48VDC/120VAC ESI SERIES 1KVA/800WRemote Site 1 14 - 1 ds502656 25 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site 1 15 - 3 ds506574 48V 155AH 12V155FS ENERSYS BATT SETRemote Site 1 16 - 2 ds502660 BREAKER 50A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site 1 17 - 10 ds502657 BREAKER 30A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site 1 18 - 2 ds502650 1 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site 1 19 - 2 DS219593 BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANEL-/+ 24/48, 1U 6/6PRemote Site 1 20 - 4 DS502666 100 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site2 21 - 1 DS255589 DC SYSTEM FP2 -48/300 LVBD 4BTRemote Site2 22 - 5 DS241115105 RECTIFIER, FLATPACK 2 48/2000 HERemote Site2 23 - 1 DS265503 INVERTER, 1000VA 48VDC/120VAC ESI SERIES 1KVA/800WRemote Site2 24 - 1 ds502656 25 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site2 25 - 3 ds506574 48V 155AH 12V155FS ENERSYS BATT SETRemote Site2 26 - 2 ds502660 BREAKER 50A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site2 27 - 10 ds502657 BREAKER 30A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site2 28 - 2 ds502650 1 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site2 29 - 2 DS219593 BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANEL-/+ 24/48, 1U 6/6PRemote Site2 30 - 4 DS502666 100 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site3 31 - 1 DS255589 DC SYSTEM FP2 -48/300 LVBD 4BTRemote Site3 32 - 5 DS241115105 RECTIFIER, FLATPACK 2 48/2000 HERemote Site3 33 - 1 DS265503 INVERTER, 1000VA 48VDC/120VAC ESI SERIES 1KVA/800W

DC POWER EQUIPMENT


July 16, 2018 Page 33

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONRemote Site3 34 - 1 ds502656 25 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site3 35 - 3 ds506574 48V 155AH 12V155FS ENERSYS BATT SETRemote Site3 36 - 2 ds502660 BREAKER 50A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site3 37 - 10 ds502657 BREAKER 30A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site3 38 - 2 ds502650 1 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site3 39 - 1 DS219593 BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANEL-/+ 24/48, 1U 6/6PRemote Site3 40 - 2 DS502666 100 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site4 41 - 1 DS255589 DC SYSTEM FP2 -48/300 LVBD 4BTRemote Site4 42 - 5 DS241115105 RECTIFIER, FLATPACK 2 48/2000 HERemote Site4 43 - 1 DS265503 INVERTER, 1000VA 48VDC/120VAC ESI SERIES 1KVA/800WRemote Site4 44 - 1 ds502656 25 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site4 45 - 3 ds506574 48V 155AH 12V155FS ENERSYS BATT SETRemote Site4 46 - 2 ds502660 BREAKER 50A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site4 47 - 10 ds502657 BREAKER 30A 1P AUX 5/16 BULLETRemote Site4 48 - 2 ds502650 1 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKERRemote Site4 49 - 2 DS219593 BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANEL-/+ 24/48, 1U 6/6PRemote Site4 50 - 4 DS502666 100 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER

e911 APX7500CON 1 - 3 L30URS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE 7/800e911 APX7500CON 1 a 3 GA00244 ADD: 7/800MHZ PRIMARY BANDe911 APX7500CON 1 b 3 G806 ADD: ASTRO DIGITAL CAI OPERATIONe911 APX7500CON 1 c 3 G51 ENH: SMARTZONE OPERATION APXe911 APX7500CON 1 d 3 G361 ADD: P25 TRUNKING SOFTWAREe911 APX7500CON 1 e 3 GA00580 ADD: TDMA OPERATIONe911 APX7500CON 1 f 3 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEYe911 APX7500CON 1 g 3 G996 ENH: OVER THE AIR PROVISIONINGe911 APX7500CON 1 h 3 QA03399 ADD: ENHANCED DATAe911 APX7500CON 1 i 3 GA09008 ADD: GROUP SERVICESe911 APX7500CON 1 j 3 W969 ADD: MULTIPLE KEY ENCRYPTION OPERATIONe911 APX7500CON 1 k 3 G851 ADD: AES/DES-XL/DES-OFB ENCRYPTIONe911 APX7500CON 1 l 3 GA00236 ADD: 3 DAY KEY RETENTION APXe911 APX7500CON 1 m 3 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDEDe911 APX7500CON 1 n 3 CA01598 ADD: AC LINE CORD USe911 APX7500CON 1 o 3 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VUe911 APX7500CON 1 p 3 G78 ADD: 3 YEAR SERVICE FROM THE START LITEe911 APX7500CON 2 - 3 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KITe911 APX7500CON 3 - 1 DVN4046B MASTER SYSTEM KEY STARTER KITe911 RFDS 4 - 1 dscs0496080531 SHORT HAUL CONTROL STATION COMBINER, 40-960 MHZ 8 CH.e911 RFDS 5 - 1 DSCS0496080531 SHORT HAUL CONTROL STATION COMBINER, 40-960 MHZ 8 CH.e911 RFDS 6 - 1 DSMFBW7463 WIDEBAND FIBERGLASS OMNI ANTENNA 746-869 NFM BULKHEADe911 RFDS 7 - 6 DDN9769 F1TNM-HC 1/4" TYPE N MALE CONNECTOR FOR FSJ1-50A CABLEe911 RFDS 8 - 60 l1700 FSJ1-50A CABLE: 1/4" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTe911 RFDS 9 - 250 l1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTe911 RFDS 10 - 4 DSF4PNMV2 F4PNMV2 1/2" TYPE N MALE CONNECTOR IN FSJ4-50B CABLEe911 RFDS 11 - 1 DSISB50LNC2 RF SPD, 10-1000MHZ DC BLOCK BROADBAND BULKHEAD MT, NF ANT, NF EQUIPe911 RFDS 12 - 3 DSSG1206B2A SG12-06B2A 1/2IN SURE GROUND GROUNDING KITe911 RFDS 13 - 3 0784469Y02 BRKT, CBL SUPPORT

VTAC APX7500CON 1 - 1 L30KSS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE VHFVTAC APX7500CON 1 a 1 GA00306 ADD: VHF MP PRIMARY BANDVTAC APX7500CON 1 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)VTAC APX7500CON 1 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATIONVTAC APX7500CON 1 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEYVTAC APX7500CON 1 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDEDVTAC APX7500CON 1 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORDVTAC APX7500CON 1 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VUVTAC APX7500CON 1 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICEVTAC APX7500CON 2 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KITVTAC APX7500CON 1 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 3 - 1 L30URS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE 7/8008TAC APX7500CON 3 a 1 GA00244 ADD: 7/800MHZ PRIMARY BAND8TAC APX7500CON 3 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)8TAC APX7500CON 3 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATION8TAC APX7500CON 3 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEY8TAC APX7500CON 3 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDED8TAC APX7500CON 3 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORD8TAC APX7500CON 3 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VU8TAC APX7500CON 3 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICE8TAC APX7500CON 4 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KIT8TAC APX7500CON 3 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 5 - 1 HKN6184C CABLE CH, PROGRAMMING,USBRFDS RFDS 6 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSRFDS RFDS 7 - 1 DSCOL54174 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 6 DBD, 162-174 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 8 - 1 DSCOL85930 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 7 DBD, 850-930 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 9 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOT

PSAP CONSOLETTE EQUIPMENT

RF SITE CONSOLETTE (INTEROP) EQUIPMENT


July 16, 2018 Page 34

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONRFDS RFDS 10 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 11 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 12 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGRFDS RFDS 13 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 14 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 15 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 16 - 400 L3323 AVA5-50, 7/8 IN VIRTUAL AIR COAXIAL CABLE, CORRUGATED COPPERRFDS RFDS 17 - 1 DDN1078 78EZDM-M DIN MALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 18 - 1 DDN1079 78EZNF-M N FEMALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 19 - 8 DSSG7806b2a SG78-06B2A GROUNDING KIT FOR 7/8 IN COAXIAL CABLERFDS RFDS 20 - 20 DSL5SGRIP L5SGRIP 7/8" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPRFDS RFDS 21 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKRFDS RFDS 22 - 13 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSRFDS RFDS 23 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 24 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 25 - 25 L1700 FSJ1-50A CABLE: 1/4" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 26 - 2 DDN9769 F1PNM-HC 1/4" TYPE N MALE CONNECTOR FOR FSJ1-50A CABLERFDS RFDS 27 - 25 L1702 FSJ4-50B CABLE: 1/2" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 28 - 1 DDN9682 F4PNMV2-HC 1/2" TYPE N MALE PLATED CONNECTORRFDS RFDS 29 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLECCGW CCGW 30 - 1 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYCCGW CCGW 30 a 1 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERCCGW CCGW 30 b 1 CA02141AA ADD: LOW DENSITY ENH CONV GATEWAYVTAC APX7500CON 31 - 1 L30KSS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE VHFVTAC APX7500CON 31 a 1 GA00306 ADD: VHF MP PRIMARY BANDVTAC APX7500CON 31 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)VTAC APX7500CON 31 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATIONVTAC APX7500CON 31 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEYVTAC APX7500CON 31 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDEDVTAC APX7500CON 31 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORDVTAC APX7500CON 31 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VUVTAC APX7500CON 31 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICEVTAC APX7500CON 32 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KITVTAC APX7500CON 31 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 33 - 1 L30URS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE 7/8008TAC APX7500CON 33 a 1 GA00244 ADD: 7/800MHZ PRIMARY BAND8TAC APX7500CON 33 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)8TAC APX7500CON 33 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATION8TAC APX7500CON 33 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEY8TAC APX7500CON 33 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDED8TAC APX7500CON 33 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORD8TAC APX7500CON 33 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VU8TAC APX7500CON 33 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICE8TAC APX7500CON 34 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KIT8TAC APX7500CON 33 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 35 - 1 HKN6184C CABLE CH, PROGRAMMING,USBRFDS RFDS 36 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSRFDS RFDS 37 - 1 DSCOL54174 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 6 DBD, 162-174 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 38 - 1 DSCOL85930 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 7 DBD, 850-930 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 39 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 40 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 41 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 42 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGRFDS RFDS 43 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 44 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 45 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 46 - 400 L3323 AVA5-50, 7/8 IN VIRTUAL AIR COAXIAL CABLE, CORRUGATED COPPERRFDS RFDS 47 - 1 DDN1078 78EZDM-M DIN MALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 48 - 1 DDN1079 78EZNF-M N FEMALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 49 - 8 DSSG7806b2a SG78-06B2A GROUNDING KIT FOR 7/8 IN COAXIAL CABLERFDS RFDS 50 - 20 DSL5SGRIP L5SGRIP 7/8" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPRFDS RFDS 51 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKRFDS RFDS 52 - 13 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSRFDS RFDS 53 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 54 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 55 - 25 L1700 FSJ1-50A CABLE: 1/4" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 56 - 2 DDN9769 F1PNM-HC 1/4" TYPE N MALE CONNECTOR FOR FSJ1-50A CABLERFDS RFDS 57 - 25 L1702 FSJ4-50B CABLE: 1/2" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 58 - 1 DDN9682 F4PNMV2-HC 1/2" TYPE N MALE PLATED CONNECTORRFDS RFDS 59 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLECCGW CCGW 60 - 1 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYCCGW CCGW 60 a 1 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERCCGW CCGW 60 b 1 CA02141AA ADD: LOW DENSITY ENH CONV GATEWAYVTAC APX7500CON 61 - 1 L30KSS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE VHFVTAC APX7500CON 61 a 1 GA00306 ADD: VHF MP PRIMARY BAND


July 16, 2018 Page 35

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONVTAC APX7500CON 61 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)VTAC APX7500CON 61 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATIONVTAC APX7500CON 61 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEYVTAC APX7500CON 61 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDEDVTAC APX7500CON 61 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORDVTAC APX7500CON 61 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VUVTAC APX7500CON 61 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICEVTAC APX7500CON 62 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KITVTAC APX7500CON 61 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 63 - 1 L30URS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE 7/8008TAC APX7500CON 63 a 1 GA00244 ADD: 7/800MHZ PRIMARY BAND8TAC APX7500CON 63 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)8TAC APX7500CON 63 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATION8TAC APX7500CON 63 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEY8TAC APX7500CON 63 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDED8TAC APX7500CON 63 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORD8TAC APX7500CON 63 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VU8TAC APX7500CON 63 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICE8TAC APX7500CON 64 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KIT8TAC APX7500CON 63 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 65 - 1 HKN6184C CABLE CH, PROGRAMMING,USBRFDS RFDS 66 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSRFDS RFDS 67 - 1 DSCOL54174 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 6 DBD, 162-174 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 68 - 1 DSCOL85930 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 7 DBD, 850-930 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 69 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 70 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 71 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 72 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGRFDS RFDS 73 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 74 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 75 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 76 - 400 L3323 AVA5-50, 7/8 IN VIRTUAL AIR COAXIAL CABLE, CORRUGATED COPPERRFDS RFDS 77 - 1 DDN1078 78EZDM-M DIN MALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 78 - 1 DDN1079 78EZNF-M N FEMALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 79 - 8 DSSG7806b2a SG78-06B2A GROUNDING KIT FOR 7/8 IN COAXIAL CABLERFDS RFDS 80 - 20 DSL5SGRIP L5SGRIP 7/8" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPRFDS RFDS 81 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKRFDS RFDS 82 - 13 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSRFDS RFDS 83 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 84 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 85 - 25 L1700 FSJ1-50A CABLE: 1/4" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 86 - 2 DDN9769 F1PNM-HC 1/4" TYPE N MALE CONNECTOR FOR FSJ1-50A CABLERFDS RFDS 87 - 25 L1702 FSJ4-50B CABLE: 1/2" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 88 - 1 DDN9682 F4PNMV2-HC 1/2" TYPE N MALE PLATED CONNECTORRFDS RFDS 89 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLECCGW CCGW 90 - 1 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYCCGW CCGW 90 a 1 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERCCGW CCGW 90 b 1 CA02141AA ADD: LOW DENSITY ENH CONV GATEWAYVTAC APX7500CON 91 - 1 L30KSS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE VHFVTAC APX7500CON 91 a 1 GA00306 ADD: VHF MP PRIMARY BANDVTAC APX7500CON 91 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)VTAC APX7500CON 91 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATIONVTAC APX7500CON 91 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEYVTAC APX7500CON 91 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDEDVTAC APX7500CON 91 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORDVTAC APX7500CON 91 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VUVTAC APX7500CON 91 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICEVTAC APX7500CON 92 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KITVTAC APX7500CON 91 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 93 - 1 L30URS9PW1 N APX CONSOLETTE 7/8008TAC APX7500CON 93 a 1 GA00244 ADD: 7/800MHZ PRIMARY BAND8TAC APX7500CON 93 b 1 G241 ENH: SW ASTRO READY (ANALOG)8TAC APX7500CON 93 c 1 G48 ENH: CONVENTIONAL OPERATION8TAC APX7500CON 93 d 1 QA01648 ADD: ADVANCED SYSTEM KEY - HARDWARE KEY8TAC APX7500CON 93 e 1 G90 ADD: NO MICROPHONE NEEDED8TAC APX7500CON 93 f 1 CA01942 ADD: DC CORD8TAC APX7500CON 93 g 1 L999 ADD: FULL FP W/05/KEYPAD/CLOCK/VU8TAC APX7500CON 93 h 1 G78 ADD: 3Y ESSENTIAL SERVICE8TAC APX7500CON 94 - 1 HKN6233 ASSEMBLY,ACCESSORY,APX CONSOLETTE RACK MOUNT TRAY HARDWARE KIT8TAC APX7500CON 93 i 1 W382 ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC8TAC APX7500CON 95 - 1 HKN6184C CABLE CH, PROGRAMMING,USBRFDS RFDS 96 - 2 DSUC1143 PIPE TO PIPE CLAMP, 1.5" TO 5" PIPE, SET OF 3 CLAMPSRFDS RFDS 97 - 1 DSCOL54174 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 6 DBD, 162-174 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 98 - 1 DSCOL85930 OMNI, MEANDER COLLINEAR, 7 DBD, 850-930 MHZ, PIM RATEDRFDS RFDS 99 - 15 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOT


July 16, 2018 Page 36

SUB SYS BLOCK LIM O QTY NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTIONRFDS RFDS 100 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 101 - 2 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 102 - 5 TDN9289 221213 CABLE WRAP WEATHERPROOFINGRFDS RFDS 103 - 5 L1705 LDF4-50A CABLE: 1/2" LDF HELIAX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 104 - 1 DDN1088 L4TNM-PSA TYPE N MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 105 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLERFDS RFDS 106 - 400 L3323 AVA5-50, 7/8 IN VIRTUAL AIR COAXIAL CABLE, CORRUGATED COPPERRFDS RFDS 107 - 1 DDN1078 78EZDM-M DIN MALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 108 - 1 DDN1079 78EZNF-M N FEMALE MOT CONNECTOR (MOTOROLA SPECIFIC)RFDS RFDS 109 - 8 DSSG7806b2a SG78-06B2A GROUNDING KIT FOR 7/8 IN COAXIAL CABLERFDS RFDS 110 - 20 DSL5SGRIP L5SGRIP 7/8" SUPPORT HOIST GRIPRFDS RFDS 111 - 13 MDN6817 42396A-5 7/8" CABLE HANGER STAINLESS, 10 PKRFDS RFDS 112 - 13 TDN7519 42396A-1 1-1/4" CABLE HANGER KIT STAINLESSRFDS RFDS 113 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 114 - 1 DSTSXDCDFM RF SPD, 698 MHZ-2.7 GHZ, 60VDC PASS, DIN, MALE/FEM PIM/PIP RATED, ASIGRFDS RFDS 115 - 25 L1700 FSJ1-50A CABLE: 1/4" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 116 - 2 DDN9769 F1PNM-HC 1/4" TYPE N MALE CONNECTOR FOR FSJ1-50A CABLERFDS RFDS 117 - 25 L1702 FSJ4-50B CABLE: 1/2" SUPERFLEX POLY JKT PER FOOTRFDS RFDS 118 - 1 DDN9682 F4PNMV2-HC 1/2" TYPE N MALE PLATED CONNECTORRFDS RFDS 119 - 1 DDN1090 L4TDM-PSA 7-16 DIN MALE PS FOR 1/2 IN CABLECCGW CCGW 120 - 1 SQM01SUM0205 GGM 8000 GATEWAYCCGW CCGW 120 a 1 CA01619AA ADD: DC POWERCCGW CCGW 120 b 1 CA02141AA ADD: LOW DENSITY ENH CONV GATEWAY

1 - 1 T9714 RADIO MANAGEMENT ONLINE2 - 300 UA00494AA ADD: RM ADDITIONAL LICENSE

1 - 60 A04RAC8JA2_N MINITOR VI, Non IS, 1 channel; battery pack, charger, belt clip, 2-year warranty

ENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 - 1 T7537 KVL 4000 KEYLOADERENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 a 1 U239AD ADD: ASTRO 25 MODEENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 b 1 X795AU ADD: ASN MODEENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 c 1 CA01598AA ADD: AC LINE CORD USENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 d 1 CA00182AP ADD: AES ENCRYPTION SOFTWAREENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 e 1 X423AF ADD: DES/DES-XL/DES-OFB ENCRYPTIONENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 f 1 C543 ADD: CABLE FOR RNC, DIU, MGEGENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 g 1 C724 CABLE, KEYLOADENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 1 h 1 CA01603AA ADD: USB COMM/CHARGE CABLE W/ CUPENCRYPTION KEYLOADED KVL 4000 2 - 1 HKN6182B CABLE KEYLOADING ADAPTER CGAI

Dodge Snyder Building 1 - 1 TT1000 MSB, 12' X 16.5' CONCRETE BLDG, INCLS UPS & GENERATOR, FULLY COMPLETE

Dodge Snyder Building 1 a 1 TT00003AA ADD: INDOOR GENERATOR (ADDS 10' LENGTH TO BLDG, OD GEN TO ID GEN)

Dodge Snyder Building 1 b 1 TT00023AA DEL: 120KVA/16KW UPS (QTY 1)

Dodge Snyder Tower 2 - 1 Tower Valmont V-35 330-foot self-supported tower

Dodge Snyder Tower 3 - 1 Strobe VAlmont Medium Intensity Strobe

Dodge Snyder DC power 4 - 1 DC_Bypass Shelter Manufaturer DC Bypass / inverter panel

Nickerson Hooper Building 6 - 1 TT1000 MSB, 12' X 16.5' CONCRETE BLDG, INCLS UPS & GENERATOR, FULLY COMPLETE

Nickerson Hooper Building 6a a 1 TT00003AA ADD: INDOOR GENERATOR (ADDS 10' LENGTH TO BLDG, OD GEN TO ID GEN)

Nickerson Hooper Building 6b b 1 TT00023AA DEL: 120KVA/16KW UPS (QTY 1)

Nickerson Hooper Tower 7 - 1 Tower Valmont V-35 330-foot self-supported tower

Nickerson Hooper Tower 8 - 1 Strobe Valmont E-1 LED Medium Intensity Strobe

Nickerson Hooper DC Power 9 - 1 DC_Bypass Shelter Manufacturer DC bypass switch/Inverter panel

North Bend Building 11 - 1 TT1000 MSB, 12' X 16.5' CONCRETE BLDG, INCLS UPS & GENERATOR, FULLY COMPLETE

North Bend Building 11a a 1 TT00003AA ADD: INDOOR GENERATOR (ADDS 10' LENGTH TO BLDG, OD GEN TO ID GEN)

North Bend Building 11b b 1 TT00023AA DEL: 120KVA/16KW UPS (QTY 1)

North Bend Building 11c c 1 TT00004AA ALT: DIESEL 50KW GENERATOR

North Bend Tower 12 - 1 Tower Valmont V-35 330-foot self-supported tower

North Bend Tower 13 - 1 Strobe Valmont Medium Intensity Strobe

North Bend DC Power 14 - 1 DC_Bypass Shelter Manufacture DC bypass / Inverter panel

Uehling Building 15 - 1 TT1000 MSB, 12' X 16.5' CONCRETE BLDG, INCLS UPS & GENERATOR, FULLY COMPLETE

Uehling Building 15a a 1 TT00003AA ADD: INDOOR GENERATOR (ADDS 10' LENGTH TO BLDG, OD GEN TO ID GEN)

Uehling Building 15b b 1 TT00023AA DEL: 120KVA/16KW UPS (QTY 1)

Uehling Tower 16 - 1 Tower Valmont V-35 330-foot self-supported tower

Uehling Tower 17 - 1 Strobe Valmont Medium Intensity Strobe

Uehling DC Power 18 - 1 DC_Bypass Shelter Manufacture DC bypass / Inverter Panel

RADIO MANAGEMENT

MINITOR VI PAGERS

KVL 4000 ENCRYPTION KEYLOADER

TOWER, SHELTERS, AND GENERATORS


July 16, 2018 Page 37

800 MHz Mobile and Portable Radios Needed for Dodge County NE Agencies

Revised 3-2-2018 Accessories

AgencyA

PX

85

00

All

Ba

nd

Mo

bil

e

w/A

ES

@ $

7,0

00

AP

X6

50

0 M

ob

ile

w/A

ES

@ $

4,9

00

AP

X6

50

0 M

ob

ile

Du

al

He

ad

no

AE

S @

$4

,90

0

AP

X4

50

0 M

ob

ile

no

AE

S @

$3

50

0

AP

X7

00

0 D

ua

l B

an

d P

ort

w/A

ES

@ $

6,0

00

AP

X6

00

0 P

ort

ab

le 2

.5

w/A

ES

@ $

5,1

00

AP

X4

00

0 P

ort

ab

le

no

AE

S @

$3

,30

0

80

0 M

hz R

F C

on

tro

l

Sta

tio

ns @

$6

,00

0

AP

X6

00

0X

E C

ha

rge

r

AP

X6

00

0X

E L

ap

el

Mic

AP

X6

00

0X

E B

att

ery

AP

X4

00

0 C

ha

rge

r

AP

X4

00

0 L

ap

el

Mic

AP

X4

00

0 B

att

ery

Fremont Police

Fremont Fire

Dodge County Sheriff 4 26 32 1 32 32 10

Dodge City Police 2 2 1 2 2 2

Dodge City Fire 2 7 15 1 15 15 6

Hooper Police 3 5 1 5 5 2

Hooper Fire 3 8 15 1 15 15 6

Fremont Rural Fire 3 8 15 1 15 15 6

Nickerson Fire 2 6 15 1 15 15 6

North Bend Fire 5 10 15 1 15 15 6

Scribner Fire 2 5 15 1 15 15 6

Scribner Police 2 5 1 5 5 2

Snyder Fire 2 5 15 1 15 15 6

Uehling Fire 3 5 15 1 15 15 6

Winslow Fire 3 4 15 1 15 15 6

Spare APX6500 1

Spare APX6000 1 1 1 1

Spare APX4500 1

Spare APX4000 1 1 1 1

GRAND TOTALS 4 34 25 59 0 45 136 13 45 45 17 136 136 55

Total Radios 316

3/15/2018July 16, 2018

Use or disclosure of this proposal is subject to the restrictions on the disclosure page.July 16, 2018 Page 38

Line # Item Number Description QuantityAPX™ 6500 Series APX6500

1 M25URS9PW1AN APX6500 7/800 MHZ 341a GA00580AA ADD: TDMA OPERATION APEX 341b QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 341c G996AS ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 341d G51AU ENH: SMARTZONE OPERATION APX6500 341e G361AH ENH: P25 TRUNKING SOFTWARE APEX 341f QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 341g G851AG ADD: AES/DES-XL/DES-OFB ENCRYP APEX 341h G298AS ENH: ASTRO 25 OTAR W/ MULTIKEY 341i G444AE ADD: APX7500 CONTROL HEAD SOFTWARE 341j GA00804AA ADD: APX O2 CH (GREY) 341k G142AD ADD: NO SPEAKER NEEDED APEX 341l G66AU ADD: DASH MOUNT 34

1m G806BE ADD: ASTRO DIGITAL CAI OPERATION 341n W22BA ADD: STD PALM MICROPHONE APEX 341o GA00226AA ADD: GPS ANTENNA 341p G335AW ADD: ANT 1/4 WAVE 762-870MHZ 341q G24AX ADD: 3 YEAR SERVICE FROM THE START LITE 34

APX™ 6000 Series APX60002 H98UCF9PW6BN APX6000 700/800 MODEL 2.5 PORTABLE 45

2a QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 452b QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 452c G996AU ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 452d H885BK ENH: 3 YR SFS LITE 452e Q15AK ADD: AES/DES-XL/DES-OFB ENCRYPTION 452f Q498AY ENH: ASTRO 25 OTAR W/ MULTIKEY 452g Q806BM ADD: ASTRO DIGITAL CAI OPERATION 452h H38BT ADD: SMARTZONE OPERATION 452i Q361AR ADD: P25 9600 BAUD TRUNKING 452j QA00580AC ADD: TDMA OPERATION 453 NNTN8860A CHARGER, SINGLE-UNIT, IMPRES 2, 3A, 115VAC, US/NA 45

4 PMMN4099AAUDIO ACCESSORY-REMOTE SPEAKER MICROPHONE,IMPRES WINDPORTING RSM, IP55 45

5 NNTN8930ABATTERY PACK,LITHIUM ION,BATT IMPRES 2 LIION TIA4950 R IP68 2650T 17

APX™ 85006 M37TSS9PW1AN APX8500 ALL BAND MP MOBILE 4

6a GA00580AA ADD: TDMA OPERATION APEX 46b QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 46c G51AT ENH:SMARTZONE 46d G996AS ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 46e G361AH ENH: P25 TRUNKING SOFTWARE APEX 46f QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 46g G851AG ADD: AES/DES-XL/DES-OFB ENCRYP APEX 46h G298AS ENH: ASTRO 25 OTAR W/ MULTIKEY 4


July 16, 2018 Page 39

6i G444AH ADD: APX CONTROL HEAD SOFTWARE 46j GA00804AA ADD: APX O2 CH (GREY) 46k G142AD ADD: NO SPEAKER NEEDED APEX 46l G806BL ENH: ASTRO DIGITAL CAI OP APEX 4

6m G67DD ADD: REMOTE MOUNT 02 MP 46n GA01517AA DEL: NO J600 ADAPTER CABLE NEEDED 46o GA01513AA ADD: ALL BAND MOBILE ANTENNA (7/8/V/U) 46p GA00250AA ADD: WIFI/GNSS FLEXIBLE CABLE LMR195 46q W22BA ADD: STD PALM MICROPHONE APEX 46r G78AT ADD: 3 YR SFS LITE 4

APX™ 6500 Series APX65007 M25URS9PW1AN APX6500 7/800 MHZ 25

7a GA00580AA ADD: TDMA OPERATION APEX 257b QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 257c G51AU ENH: SMARTZONE OPERATION APX6500 257d G996AS ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 257e G361AH ENH: P25 TRUNKING SOFTWARE APEX 257f QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 257g G67BZ ADD: REMOTE MOUNT 02 CH MID POWER 257h G444AE ADD: APX7500 CONTROL HEAD SOFTWARE 257i GA00092AM ADD: APX DUAL-CONTROL HARDWARE (O2 GREEN) 257j GA00804AB ADD: APX O2 CH (IMPACT GREEN) 257k G201AA ADD: GREEN COLORED HOUSING (O2 CH) 257l G142AD ADD: NO SPEAKER NEEDED APEX 50

7m G806BE ADD: ASTRO DIGITAL CAI OPERATION 257n G628AC ADD: REMOTE MOUNT CABLE 17 FT APEX 507o W22BA ADD: STD PALM MICROPHONE APEX 507p GA00226AA ADD: GPS ANTENNA 257q G335AW ADD: ANT 1/4 WAVE 762-870MHZ 257r G24AX ADD: 3 YEAR SERVICE FROM THE START LITE 25

APX™ 45008 M22URS9PW1AN APX4500 7/800 MHZ 59

8a G67CF ADD: REMOTE MOUNT MID POWER 598b GA00580AD ADD: TDMA OPERATION 598c QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 598d QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 598e QA02756AD ADD: 3600 OR 9600 TRUNKING BAUD SINGLE SYSTEM 598f G996BD ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 598g G444AH ADD: APX CONTROL HEAD SOFTWARE 598h GA00804AB ADD: APX O2 CH (IMPACT GREEN) 598i G201AA ADD: GREEN COLORED HOUSING (O2 CH) 598j G142AD ADD: NO SPEAKER NEEDED APEX 598k W22BA ADD: STD PALM MICROPHONE APEX 598l G335AY ADD: ANT 1/4 WAVE 762-870MHZ 59

8m GA00226AA ADD: GPS ANTENNA 598n G24AX ADD: 3 YEAR SERVICE FROM THE START LITE 59

APX™ 4000 Series APX4000


July 16, 2018 Page 40

9 H51UCF9PW6AN APX 4000 7/800 MHZ MODEL 2 PORTABLE 1369a QA04934AA ALT: IMPRES LI-ION 2500MAH RUGGED UL (NNTN8560) 1369b QA00580AF ADD: TDMA OPERATION 1369c QA02756AB ENH: 3600 OR 9600 TRUNKING BAUD SINGLE SYSTEM 1369d QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 1369e QA01833AD ADD: EXTREME NOISE REDUCTION 1369f G996AZ ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 1369g QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 1369h H885BK ENH: 3 YR SFS LITE 1369i H499JU ENH: SUBMERSIBLE (DELTA T) 1369j QA04865AA ADD: TWO KNOB CONFIGURATION 13610 PMMN4083A IMPRES RSM DELTA-T, 13611 NNTN8560A BATT IMPRES LIION TIA4950 IP67 2500T 5512 PMPN4174A CHGR DESKTOP SINGLE UNIT IMPRES, US/NA 136

APX™ 6500 Series APX650013 M25URS9PW1AN APX6500 7/800 MHZ 4

13a G91AE ADD: CNTRL STATION PWR SUPPLY APEX 413b GA00580AA ADD: TDMA OPERATION APEX 413c QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 413d G996AS ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 413e G51AU ENH: SMARTZONE OPERATION APX6500 413f G361AH ENH: P25 TRUNKING SOFTWARE APEX 413g W665BF ADD: BASE STATION OP W/PS APEX 413h QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 413i G298AS ENH: ASTRO 25 OTAR W/ MULTIKEY 413j G851AG ADD: AES/DES-XL/DES-OFB ENCRYP APEX 413k W382AM ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC 413l G444AE ADD: APX7500 CONTROL HEAD SOFTWARE 4

13m GA00804AA ADD: APX O2 CH (GREY) 413n G142AD ADD: NO SPEAKER NEEDED APEX 413o G66AU ADD: DASH MOUNT 413p G806BE ADD: ASTRO DIGITAL CAI OPERATION 413q GA00235AA ADD: NO GPS ANTENNA NEEDED APEX 413r G335AW ADD: ANT 1/4 WAVE 762-870MHZ 413s G24AX ADD: 3 YEAR SERVICE FROM THE START LITE 4

APX™ 450014 M22URS9PW1AN APX4500 7/800 MHZ 9

14a G91AE ADD: CNTRL STATION PWR SUPPLY APEX 914b W665BJ ADD: BASE STATION APEXWWM 914c GA00580AD ADD: TDMA OPERATION 914d QA01648AA ADD: HW KEY SUPPLEMENTAL DATA 914e QA03399AA ADD: ENHANCED DATA 914f QA02756AD ADD: 3600 OR 9600 TRUNKING BAUD SINGLE SYSTEM 914g G996BD ADD: PROGRAMMING OVER P25 (OTAP) 914h G444AH ADD: APX CONTROL HEAD SOFTWARE 914i GA00804AB ADD: APX O2 CH (IMPACT GREEN) 914j G201AA ADD: GREEN COLORED HOUSING (O2 CH) 9


July 16, 2018 Page 41

14k W382AM ADD: CONTROL STATION DESK GCAI MIC 914l G142AD ADD: NO SPEAKER NEEDED APEX 9

14m G66AW ADD: DASH MOUNT O2 CH WWM 914n GA00235AA ADD: NO GPS ANTENNA NEEDED APEX 914o G335AY ADD: ANT 1/4 WAVE 762-870MHZ 914p G24AX ADD: 3 YEAR SERVICE FROM THE START LITE 9


July 16, 2018 Page 42

SECTION 3

IMPLEMENTATION PLANThis document, known as the Statement of Work (SOW), describes the deliverables to be furnished to Dodge County,Nebraska (“Customer”), and the tasks to be performed by Motorola, its subcontractors, and Customer to implementthe proposed solution. It describes the actual work involved in installation and clarifies the responsibilities for bothMotorola and Customer during the project implementation.

Specifically, this SOW provides:

• A summary of the phases and tasks to be completed within the project lifecycle.• A list of the deliverables associated with the project.• A description of the responsibilities for both Motorola and Customer.

3.1 PROJECT RESOURCESMotorola Project Manager

The Project Manager has full responsibility for the successful completion of the implementation lifecycle from startto finish. The tasks of the Project Manager include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Act as main point of contact between Dodge County Contract Manager, consultants, and site constructioncontractor and Motorola Solutions resources throughout the entire project lifecycle.

• Develop and manage project plan, schedule, quality, and risk.• Completing and submitting all required submittals and documentation.• Oversee and manage day–to–day activities, deliverables, and milestone completions for all components of

the proposed system including site construction.• Manage/supervise field installation and implementation teams to ensure that all on–site installation,

integration, and optimization tasks are performed on–time and per contract requirements, industry bestpractices, and applicable standards and guidelines.

• Develop, update, and maintain a detailed implementation schedule to include work tasks with predecessors,milestones, start/end dates, and task resource(s).

• Participate with Dodge County in monthly progress review meetings or as deemed necessary throughoutthe project lifecycle:

• Generate mutually agreed upon meeting agenda.• Generate and distribute meeting minutes to project and Customer project members.• Manage and submit monthly project status reports that identify at a minimum completed activities of the

previous review period, as well as activities planned for the upcoming review period, including an updatedimplementation schedule.

• Develop, update, maintain, and distribute detailed project punchlist.• Inspect and maintain inventory of all received equipment to ensure total delivery.• Inspect each site with Dodge County project team member(s) to ensure readiness for receiving and

installing of site equipment.• Support hardware implementation with proper documentation, guidance and training to ensure quality

workmanship and Customer satisfaction by all Motorola Solutions vendors and subcontractors.• Monitor the project to ensure that support resources are available as scheduled and as identified in the

contract.• Assume accountability for all Motorola Solutions contractor and subcontractor supplied tasks within the

implementation schedule.


July 16, 2018 Page 43

• Review and administer, as necessary, change control procedures with Dodge County Contract Manager.• Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress raised by the Dodge County Contract

Manager.• Report to Dodge County Contract Manager all unexpected conditions or problems that may result in

delaying project implementation or add additional expense to Dodge County immediately upon discovery.

Project Status MeetingsThe Motorola Solutions PM will schedule a bi–weekly call or meeting as determined at the kick–off meeting. TheMotorola Solutions PM will be responsible for developing the agenda, providing project status reports (i.e. schedule,punch list, action items), and distributing meeting minutes to all participants within five (5) business days followingcompleted bi–weekly meeting.

If the team decides to have a conference call at times versus face–to–face meeting, the Motorola Solutions PM willprovide an 800 conference call number and pin for all meeting participants. For face–to–face meetings, DodgeCounty would be responsible for providing meeting facility.

The agenda will include at a minimum the following topics:

• Overall project status compared to the Implementation schedule.• Product or service related issues that may affect the Implementation schedule.• Statuses of the action items, project deliverables, punch list, changes, and risk.• Any miscellaneous concerns of either Dodge County or Motorola Solutions.

Motorola Systems Engineer

The Project Engineer has full responsibility for system design and performance. The Project Engineer’s primaryresponsibility is to ensure the technical integrity of the system design to contract throughout the entire projectlifecycle. The Project Engineer’s other tasks include:

• Development of system installation documents (i.e. equipment list or bill of materials, system level, floor, andrack–up drawings).

• Define Dodge County’s communication needs, design the preliminary system, and participate in the DetailedDesign Review (DDR) to finalize and confirm the system design to meet Customer’s requirements.

• Define Motorola Solutions and Customer demarcation points.• Define technical requirements for interfacing with Motorola Solutions–supplied equipment.• Complete the process of defining, documenting, and acquiring Dodge County’s approval of system

programming and configuration.• Participate in the system and functionality testing at the Customer Center for System Integration (CCSi)

(Motorola Solutions staging facility located in Elgin, IL).• Responsible for the process of defining, documenting and executing functionality acceptance testing once

the system is field installed.• Develop, participate, train/educate, and oversee execution of system and coverage acceptance test plans.• Develop cutover plan that will balance Dodge County’s needs and approval with installation logistics.• Provide systems and network engineering support throughout the implementation lifecycle.

Motorola Systems Technologist

The System Technologist(s) has the primary responsibility as the “hands–on” system expert. The SystemTechnologist’s tasks include:


July 16, 2018 Page 44

• Work with the Project Engineer to ensure the integrity of the design during system optimization and testing.• Participate in the staging and testing of the system at the Customer Center for System Integration (CCSi).• Assist Engineer in development of cutover plan.• Perform the optimization of the Radio Frequency (RF) equipment.• Participate in system equipment testing and acceptance.

Motorola Subcontractors

Motorola Solution’s Project Manager will coordinate the activities of Motorola Solutions subcontractors to assurecost–effective performance and resolution of technical interface issues during design as opposed to duringintegration activities.

Motorola Solution’s Project Manager will be the single authority for subcontract actions and reporting and will havethe full responsibility for quality performance, schedules, and cost control. We will use a straightforward procedurefor managing and controlling work assignments to subcontractors.

Subcontractors selected for this project based on their experience and many have worked for Motorola Solutions onnumerous projects. Each subcontractor will assign a lead manager who will be responsible for its company’sperformance. These managers will report directly to Motorola Solution’s Project Manager on scheduling andimplementation issues and to the System Engineer on specific technical assignments. All subcontractors will submitas–needed progress reports to Motorola Solutions describing progress, level of effort, and anticipated problemswhich will be integrated into the project’s tracking system. The subcontractors’ weekly progress reports will serve asMotorola Solution’s primary mechanism for ensuring that they remain on track to deliver their promised results.

3.2 STANDARDS AND GUIDELINESMotorola takes great care in designing our radio systems to meet or exceed the needs and safety of the users andthe applicable industry standards. Motorola’s end–user equipment also exceeds many of the Military Standards forharsh environments. When shipping products and installing radio equipment, Motorola meets all the legally requiredstandards and regulations.

Motorola shall be responsible for complete and fully operable installation of all items identified in accordance withthe latest version of the Motorola’s R56 standards, National Electrical Code, local building codes, environmentallaws, zoning and planning regulations or ordinances, land use restrictions, OSHA and state safety requirements, andall other local, state or Federal codes, regulations, laws and/or ordinances as applicable. In the event there is aconflict between the referenced drawings, codes, specifications or standards, the most stringent will govern.

Quality Management

It is the policy of Motorola to produce and provide products and services of the highest quality which are responsiveto the needs of our Customers. Motorola has a well–established reputation for designing and developing high qualityproducts and systems, on schedule, and within budget. Motorola adheres to the International StandardsOrganizations (ISO) quality standards.

All work will be performed consistent with high quality commercial practice and in accordance with Motorola’sQuality Standards for Fixed Equipment Installations and all applicable manufacturer installation and maintenancemanuals.

Safety and Health

Motorola holds safety as paramount; at no time shall any operation, task or evolution take place or be continued ifdeemed hazardous to the personnel, equipment or community. All safety practices shall be put in place and


July 16, 2018 Page 45

compliance with all local, state and federal laws and regulations shall be maintained. Motorola and itssubcontractors shall follow the following guidelines at all times during system installation:

• Work area will be posted in accordance with OSHA regulations (i.e. medical aide, hard hat, safety glasses,etc.).

• All personnel shall be compliant with OSHA regulations, and fully trained for the type of work to beperformed.

• All team members shall ensure that the workplace is maintained clean and free of safety hazards.• All trash and install debris shall be removed daily.• A safety and security check will be conducted at the close of the workday.

Site Cleanup

Motorola and its subcontractors shall clean–up and remove from the work site all rubbish and construction debris,resulting from their own work. Upon completion of work, the entire job site areas shall be left clean and free of trash,debris, scrap materials, and excess materials resulting from equipment installations. Upon completion of installationwork, the radio equipment shelters and rooms shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Motorola andCustomer Project Managers. Motorola understands failure to comply with these requirements may result in theCustomer contracting to have the inside and/or outside cleanup work performed at Motorola’s cost.

Equipment Labeling

Motorola Solutions shall label all Motorola Solutions provided and installed network, data, RF, and audio cables end–to–end.

Use of Sites

Motorola Solutions and its contractors shall confine operations at sites to only areas designated by law, ordinances,permits, and contract documents, and shall not encumber with any materials or equipment.

Submittals

Motorola Solutions understands no work requiring applicable drawings, product literature, test data, or otherapplicable information shall commence without Customer’s approval to proceed

Change Orders

Either Party may request changes within the general scope of the award contract agreement. If a requested changecauses an increase or decrease in the cost or time required to perform this Agreement, the Parties will agree to anequitable adjustment of the Contract Price, Implementation schedule, or both, and will reflect the adjustment in achange order. Neither Party is obligated to perform requested changes unless both Parties execute a written, jointlysigned change order.

3.3 EXISTING SYSTEM EQUIPMENTThe new radio system and related equipment, and the installation thereof, shall be accomplished with the minimuminterruption to existing, normal public safety operations and equipment without the expressed written consent fromDodge County.

Motorola Solutions Project Manager shall advise Dodge County Contract Manager in writing with ample notificationof any needed or planned system operations interruptions or outages. Motorola Solutions shall not proceed with anyneeded or planned interruptions without an expressed written permission from Dodge County.


July 16, 2018 Page 46

3.4 INTERMODULATION AND ERP VALUESMotorola Solutions will provide Intermodulation (IM) Studies and Effective Radiated Power (ERP) Values whereapplicable.

Since the interference situation changes whenever new radio equipment is added to an existing communicationssite, a new intermod interference analysis will be performed by Motorola Solutions Engineering to assess the impactof the new system on existing users at all co–location sites.

In preparation for a co–location Intermodulation interference analysis, an inventory is performed to identify allfrequencies, receive and transmit, in use at a site. These may include cellular, WiMax, Microwave, public safety, andAM, FM, TV broadcast transmitters.

Motorola Solutions is not responsible for issues outside of its immediate control. Such issues include, but are notrestricted to, improper frequency coordination by others and non–compliant operation, improper design, installation,or operation of systems installed of other vendor radio channels/systems that are causing interference to DodgeCounty channels.

3.5 SITE READINESS SURVEYPrior to starting any site upgrades or equipment installations, Motorola, Site Owner, and/or Customer shall conduct asite readiness review at each site to examine existing work, work performed by others, or work not included in thisSOW, that is required to support the new radio system. The site readiness review documents any conditions that willprevent start of site upgrade or equipment installation work to be performed by Motorola and its subcontractors.Issues will be noted and responsible party(ies) must correct their deficiencies prior to system installation. Additionalwalks may be needed to confirm deficiencies have been properly corrected.

3.6 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULEMotorola has developed a detailed implementation schedule outlining several key project tasks and milestones.During the implementation period, the Motorola Project Manager shall update the implementation schedule by the15th day of each month. The Motorola Project Manager shall also provide a monthly report laying out progressachieved, a description of any delays and the cause of those delays, and a discussion of the effort that will be madeto bring the Project back to the original schedule.

The following assumptions were considered when developing the project implementation schedule:

• Contract award date of July 27th 2018• Based on the system as proposed with this offering.• Detailed design review is completed and accepted within thirty (30) calendar days of contract award.• Site acquisitions, lease agreements/MOU’s, FCC licenses, FAA (if applicable) and other regulatory approvals

from outside agencies are completed by stated due dates.• Customer responsibilities are completed by stated due dates.• All work is performed during normal working hours M-F between 8 AM and 5 PM

3.7 COVERAGE ACCEPTANCE TESTINGMotorola has included coverage testing with this proposal. See System Overview and Responsibility Matrix foradditional details describing the Coverage Testing.


July 16, 2018 Page 47

3.8 MILESTONE COMPLETIONSSeveral key milestones have been provided as part of the implementation schedule. This list of milestones will bereviewed and approved by Motorola and Customer at the detailed design review. The Motorola PM will makenecessary adjustments to the implementation schedule to reflect the final list of milestones agreed to at the detaileddesign review.

The Motorola PM will be responsible for generating each milestone completion certificate for Customer’s review andwhen deemed necessary for Motorola and Customer to commemorate a completed milestone. The original copy ofthe signed certificate will be provided to Customer and a copy of the certificate will be provided to Motorola.

Major Key Milestones• Contract Award (one time)• Contract Design Review (one time)• Staging/Ship Acceptance (one time)• Site Development (per site)• Mobilization• Towers and/or Shelters• Substantial Completion• Closeout• Installation Acceptance (per site)• Subscriber Installation and Programming Acceptance• Final Acceptance Testing (one time)• Coverage Acceptance Testing (one time)• Final Acceptance (one time)

3.9 SITE DEVELOPMENTSee Appendix A.

Note: Site development for the four green sites are not included. New Towers, Tower Lighting, Shelters, Generators,and all site construction related engineering, drawings, and labor associated with the four green sites have beenremoved from Motorola's scope. This equipment and labor is to be provided by others.

3.10 END USER TRAINING PLANSee the following pages for Subscriber End User Training Plan

Course Title TargetAudience

Sessions Duration(days)

Location Date Participants

APX Mobileand Portable

Train theTrainer

(Instructor-led)

SubscriberTrainers

2

(8-hoursessions)

2 days DodgeCounty, NE

Prior toSystemCutover

30

(15 per)

Course Synopsis:

This course provides APX mobile and portable radio users with an introduction to their radio, its basic operationand tailored job aids available for assistance in operation. The learning experience is a mix of facilitation and


July 16, 2018 Page 48

hands-on activities to help users perform common tasks associated with their radio operation. Segmentationbetween user groups (i.e. Police, Fire/EMS and Public Service) is encouraged to help focus instruction on thespecific operational issues of the individual user group.

Note: The operator class is covered in the first half of the session. The Interactive End User Tool Kit andinstruction on how to deliver the class will be covered in the second half of the session.

3.11 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIXSee the following pages for detailed responsibility matrix.

Tasks MotorolaSolutions

Dodge County

Contract Finalization and Team Creation

Execute contract and distribute contract documents.

Assign a Project Manager as a single point of contact.

Assign resources.

Schedule project kickoff meeting.

Deliverable: Signed contract, defined project team, and scheduled project kickoff meeting.

Project Kickoff

Introduce team, review roles, and decision authority.

Present project scope and objectives.

Review SOW responsibilities and project schedule.

Schedule Design Review.

Deliverable: Completed project kickoff and scheduled Design Review.

Design Review

Present the system design and operational requirements for the solution.

Present installation plan.

Present preliminary cutover plan and methods to document final cutoverprocess.

Present configuration and details of sites required by system design.

Validate that customer sites can accommodate proposed equipment.

Provide approvals required to add equipment to proposed existing sites.

Review site safety, security, and access procedures.

Finalize site acquisition and development plan.

Review safety rules and procedures.

Present equipment layout plans and system design drawings.


July 16, 2018 Page 49


Dodge County

Provide backhaul performance specifications and demarcation points.

Provide heat load and power requirements for new equipment.

Provide information on existing system interfaces.

Provide frequency and radio information for each site.

Complete the required forms required for frequency coordination andlicensing.

Ensure that frequency availability and licensing meet project requirements,and pay licensing and frequency coordination fees.

Review and update design documents, including System Description,Statement of Work, Project Schedule, and Acceptance Test Plan, based onDesign Review agreements.

Execute applicable Change Order in accordance with all material changesto the Contract resulting from the Design Review.

Deliverable: Finalized design documentation based upon "frozen" design, along with any relevant Change Orderdocumentation.

Site Access

Provide site owners/managers with written notice to provide entry to sitesidentified in the project design documentation.

Maintain access roads in order to provide clear and stable entry to sites forheavy-duty construction vehicles, cement trucks and cranes. Ensure thatsufficient space is available at the site for these vehicles to maneuver undertheir own power, without assistance from other equipment.

Obtain site licensing and permitting, including site lease/ownership, zoning,permits, regulatory approvals, easements, power, and telco connections.

Deliverable: Access, permitting, and licensing necessary to install system equipment at each site.

Sheriff County Building Telco Room upgrades

General Information about the room: • Inside dimensions 6 foot 9 incheswide by 9 foot 9 inches long all cement block construction • Needs to hold 3racks total. 2 equipment racks 1 DC power it will fit but leaves little room forexpansion. • AC power and generator are in the rooms attached to the Telcoequipment room • Has cooling window AC in the wall to the garage suggestadding a split unit. • The RF equipment room with pathways to the monopoleis within 10 feet of the Telco equipment room • Large metal door with goodphysical security easy to move large equipment in and out of

• Relocate or extend the indoor phone cabling still being used in the building.o County phone system has moved to an IP based phone system which usesthe existing IT network infrastructure and has limited use of the old TelcoEquipment Room. o It is MSI's understanding the Phone equipment isscheduled to be removed. During that time a Telco technician candetermine what services are being used out of the traditional TelephoneEquipment room. The Telco technician and county can make adetermination to consolidate indoor cable to be repositioned next to theTelco demarcation point. Either a 110 or 66 block can be used as a splicepoint to extend the indoor cabling. The RF equipment racks will cover the


July 16, 2018 Page 50


Dodge County

indoor equipment connection blocks that are currently used to make movesadditions or changes.

Video server can be moved and place in to one of the RF equipment racks orin another location in the building. The Rack needs to be removed.

Hire an an electrician to add (2) two (30)Amp hardwired and (1) Singleduplex 15 Amp circuits or (5) 15amp single duplex circuits off of thegenerator panel to the DC Power Equipment rack.

Provide and install a Straight 2” Conduit from the RF equipment room to theTelco Equipment room with connectors on both ends. No 90 degree bends.Motorola provided and installed Microwave will be extended in to the Telcoequipment room.

Extend the City Fiber to the RF equipment rooms in the Fremont Power Plant,Police Dispatch and the Sheriff County Building.

Air Conditioning system that MSI recommends Customer provide and installis a commercial grade split unit in the equipment room and keep the windowAC as a backup unit. A prime site will generate 7000 BTU/hr max. If thecounty keeps additional hardware in the room they may want a unit capableof 10,000 BTU/hr max. Place the year round condenser outside of the garageareas.

Highly recommended R56 Grounding updates: o Provide and install a SinglePoint Ground (MGB) Master Ground Buss Bar at the main Power distributionRoom. The single point ground will be extended to the Subsystem GroundBar in RF equipment and then to the Subsystem Ground Bar in the TelcoEquipment room with a 3/0 AWG. o Provide and install a Surge ProtectionDevice type 2A for the building service entrance capable of being monitoredo Provide and install a Surge Protection Device type 2A for the generatorsub-panels that feed the RF equipment room and the Telco Equipment roomcapable of being monitored o Ground the metal door o Ground the AC units oSubsystem Ground bus bar in the RF and Telco Equipment room tied tobuilding steel , Power panel and back to the MGB o Provide and install #2ground halo in the RF and Telco equipment room o Upgrade the towergrounding and building entrance from the tower if not R56 compliant. .

Deliverable: Sites meet physical requirements for equipment installation.

Equipment Order and Manufactoring

Create equipment order and reconcile to contract.

Manufacture & procure Motorola Solutions-provided equipment necessaryfor system based on equipment order.

Deliverable: Equipment procured and ready for shipment.

System Staging

Ship all equipment needed for staging to Motorola’s Customer Center forSolutions Integration (CCSi).

Provide information on existing system interfaces, room layouts, or otherinformation necessary for the assembly to meet field conditions.

Set up and rack the solution equipment on a site-by-site basis, as it will beconfigured in the field at each of the sites.


July 16, 2018 Page 51


Dodge County

Cut and label the cables with to/from information to specify interconnectionfor field installation and future servicing needs.

Complete the cabling/connecting of the subsystems to each other("connectorization" of the subsystems).

Assemble required subsystems to assure system functionality.

Power up, load application parameters, program, and test all stagedequipment.

Confirm system configuration and software compatibility with the existingsystem.

Inventory the equipment with serial numbers and installation references.

Review and approve proposed Factory Acceptance Test Plan.

Pay for travel, lodging, meals, and all incidental expenses for Customerpersonnel and representatives to witness the Factory Acceptance Testing.

Perform factory functional acceptance tests of system features

Conduct site and system level testing.

Perform system burn-in 24 hours a day during staging to isolate and captureany defects.

Deliverable: System staged and ready for shipment.

Equipment Shipment and Storage

Provide secure location for solution equipment .

Pack and ship solution equipment to Customer provided local address.

Receive solution equipment.

Inventory solution equipment.

Deliverable: Solution equipment received and ready for installation

General Installation

Deliver solution equipment to installation locations.

Coordinate receipt of and inventory solution equipment with designatedcontact.

Install of all proposed fixed equipment as outlined in the System Descriptionbased upon the agreed-upon floor plans, connecting audio, control, andradio transmission cables to connect equipment to the power panels orreceptacles, and audio/control line connection points. Installationperformed in accordance with R56 standards and state/local codes.

Provide system interconnections that are not specifically outlined in thesystem design, including dedicated phone circuits, microwave links, or othertypes of connectivity.

Install and terminate all network cables between site routers and networkdemarcation points, including microwave, leased lines, and Ethernet.

Connect installed equipment to the provided ground system.

Label equipment, racks, and cables (end-to-end).


July 16, 2018 Page 52


Dodge County

Perform preliminary audit of installed equipment to ensure compliance withrequirements and R56 standards.

Note any required changes to the installation for inclusion in the "as-built"system documentation.

Remove, transport, and dispose of old equipment.

Deliverable: Equipment installed.

Mobile Radio Installation and Programming

Develop mobile radio programming templates.

Test features and functionalities of the mobile templates.

Program the mobile radios identified in the equipment list in accordancewith the programming templates, client software, and fleetmap. A “one-timeonly” programming is included in the project pricing.

Provide adequate number of vehicles for installations according to theproject/installation schedule.

Install all the mobiles in the vehicles, as identified in the equipment list, andaccording to the installation schedule.

Permanently mount the antennas on each vehicle according to the approvedprototype, appropriate for the vehicle type. Install the antennas close to thesame location as the existing antennas, where practical, in vehicles thatalready have antennas installed. If applicable, plug the old antenna holewith an appropriate rubber plug.

Install the antennas on the roof, where practical, on the new antennainstallations. If mobile antenna cannot be installed on the roof, determine analternative location.

Remove the existing mobiles from the vehicle at the time of installation ofthe new radios

Deliverable: Mobile radios installed and accepted

Portable Radio Programming and Distribution

Develop portable radio templates

Program test portable radios with each template version and activate themon the system.

Program the portable radios identified in the equipment list in accordancewith the programming templates, client software, and fleetmap. A “one-timeonly” programming is included in the project pricing.

Deliver portable radios to authorized customer personnel and inventoryupon receipt.

Acknowledge receipt of portable radios and accessories and verify properoperation of a sampling of delivered portable radios.

Distribute portable radios to end users.

Deliverable: Portable radios accepted and distributed.

R56 Site Audit


July 16, 2018 Page 53


Dodge County

Perform R56 site-installation quality-audits, verifying proper physicalinstallation and operational configurations.

Create site evaluation report to verify site meets or exceeds requirements,as defined in Motorola’s R56 Standards and Guidelines for CommunicationSites.

Deliverable: R56 Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites audits completed successfully.

Solution Optimization

Verify that all equipment is operating properly and that all electrical andsignal levels are set accurately.

Verify that all audio and data levels are at factory settings.

Verify communication interfaces between devices for proper operation.

Ensure that functionality meets manufacturers' specifications and complieswith the final configuration established during design review or systemstaging.

Deliverable: Completion of System Optimization.

Functional Acceptance Testing

Verify the operational functionality and features of the solution supplied byMotorola Solutions, as contracted.

Witness the functional testing.

Document all issues that arise during the acceptance tests.

If any major task for the system as contractually described fails during theCustomer acceptance testing or beneficial use, repeat that particular taskafter Motorola determines that corrective action has been taken.

Resolve any minor task failures before Final System Acceptance.

Document the results of the acceptance tests and present for review.

Review and approve final acceptance test results.

Deliverable: Completion of functional testing and approval by Customer.

Coverage Testing

Provide the required number of test vehicles, drivers, and resources toparticipate and witness the coverage testing.

Perform coverage testing according to the Coverage Acceptance Test Plan(CATP), Submit test reports within the agreed period.

For any area that fails, take corrective action.

Retest any areas for which corrective action has been taken.

Document all issues that arise during the coverage testing.

Submit final test reports, according to the agreed period.

Review and approve test results.

Deliverable: Completion of coverage testing and approval by Customer.

Training


July 16, 2018 Page 54


Dodge County

Finalize schedule for training coursework.

Provide training facility.

Conduct the training classes outlined in the Training Plan.

Attend proposed training classes.

Deliverable: Training coursework completed.

Cutover

Finalize Cutover Plan.

Provide Motorola Solutions with user radio information for input into thesystem database and activation, as required.

Provide and program user radio and related services (i.e. template building,re-tuning, testing and installations), as needed, during cutover period.

Conduct cutover meeting with relevant personnel to address both how tomitigate technical and communication problem impacts to the users duringcutover and during the general operation of the system.

Notify the personnel affected by the cutover of the date and time planned forcutover.

Provide ongoing communication with users regarding the project andschedule.

Cut over users and ensure that user radios are operating on system.

Resolve punchlist items, documented during the Acceptance Testing phase,in order to meet all the criteria for final system acceptance.

Assist Motorola with resolution of identified punchlist items by providingsupport, such as access to the sites, equipment and system, and approval ofthe resolved punchlist items.

Deliverable: Migration to new system completed, and punchlist items resolved.

Transition to Warranty

Review the items necessary for transitioning the project to warranty supportand service.

Motorola to provide services during year 1 warranty which align with theproposed services.

Provide a Customer Support Plan detailing the warranty support associatedwith the contract equipment.

Deliverable: Service information delivered and approved by Customer.

Finalize Documentation and System Acceptance

Provide manufacturer’s installation material, part list and other relatedmaterial to Customer upon project completion.

Provide an electronic as-built system manual on CD or other Customerpreferred electronic media. The documentation will include the following: •Site Block Diagrams. • Site Equipment Rack Configurations. • AntennaNetwork Drawings for RF Sites (where applicable) • ATP Test Checklists •Construction Drawings • Functional Acceptance Test Plan Test Sheets andResults. • Equipment Inventory List. • Console Programming Template (where


July 16, 2018 Page 55


Dodge County

applicable). • Maintenance Manuals (where applicable). • Technical ServiceManuals (where applicable). Drawings will be delivered in Adobe PDFformat.

Receive and approve documentation.

Execute Final Project Acceptance.

Deliverable: All required documents are provided and approved. Final Project Acceptance.

3.12 APPENDIX A: SITE DEVELOPMENTSee the following pages for site development work required to prepare sites for proposed equipment.


July 16, 2018 Page 56

3.12.1 Site Development at Four (4) Greenfield Sites (Dodge Snyder, Nickerson, NorthBend and Uehling)Motorola Solutions will provide and install Radio System RF Antenna, Coaxial Lines, Connectors, Ground Kits, andTower Top Amplifiers.

Site Scope Summary

• Engineering services for site drawings and regulatory approvals – Included.• Site acquisition services – Customer Responsibility.• Zoning Services – Customer Responsibility.• New fenced compound/expansion size – 75-foot x 75-foot. - Included.• Clearing type – Light. – Included.• Road length requiring improvement – 100 feet – Included.• New power run – 100 feet, Electrical service type – Underground, 200-amp - 120/240-volt, single-phase –

Included.• New shelter size – 12-foot x 26-foot – Included.• New fuel tank size – 1000 gallons - Type – LP above-ground – Included.• New generator size – 35 kW, Type – Indoor – Included• New tower to be used for antennas – 330-foot self-supported tower – Included.• New tower foundation size – 130 cubic yard, Type – Pier and pad – Included.

3.12.1.1 Motorola Solutions Responsibilities:Site Engineering

• Prepare site construction drawings showing the layout of various new and existing site components.• Conduct site walks to collect pertinent information from the sites (e.g., location of Telco, power, existing

facilities, etc.).• Perform a boundary and topographic survey for the property on which the communication site is located or

will be located.• Perform construction staking around the site to establish reference points for proposed construction.• Prepare a lease exhibit and sketch of the site to communicate to the property owner the proposed lease

space and planned development at the particular site location.• Prepare record drawings of the site showing the as-built information.• Conduct utility investigation and coordinate with local utility company for power hook up.• Perform construction staking around the site to establish reference points for proposed construction.• Prepare photo renderings of how a specific site or sites would look after completion.• Conduct a balloon test to prepare site line graphs showing potential visibility of the proposed

communication site.• Provide an expert witness for up to 2 day(s) to attend or testify at public meetings and/or hearings to provide

expert testimony to assist in obtaining zoning approvals.• Perform NEPA Threshold Screening, including limited literature and records search and brief reporting, as

necessary to identify sensitive natural and cultural features referenced in 47 CFR Chapter 1, subsection1.1307 that may potentially be impacted by the proposed construction activity. This does not include theadditional field investigations to document site conditions if it is determined that the proposedcommunication facility “may have a significant environmental impact” and thus require additionaldocumentation, submittals, or work. Regional Environmental Review (RER) report submittals if required byFEMA have not been included. Perform Cultural Resource study as needed to identify sensitive historicaland archaeological monuments that might be impacted by proposed construction


July 16, 2018 Page 57

• Perform a ASTM E 1527-05 certified Phase I Environmental Site Assessment (ESA), to identify obvious andreasonably likely on-site and/or off-site potential sources of contamination that might pose a potential riskof leasing and building on a piece of property, and whether further environmental investigations arewarranted. This study does not include Phase II assessments, risk/cost evaluations, and permittingassistance that may be required if risk factors are indicated.

• Conduct up to 80-foot deep soil boring test at each tower leg, backfill holes with spoils and preparegeotechnical report of soil conditions at locations of the tower foundation. Grouting of boring holes oraccess by Automatic Traction Vehicle (ATV) - mounted rig is not included.

• Conduct construction inspection of foundation steel prior to pour, materials testing of concrete and fielddensity tests of backfill to ensure quality construction.

• Check tower erection for plumbness, linearity and alignment after installation.• Perform inspection of the site and the work performed by the Contractor to document that the site is built in

accordance with the “Site Plans” and document any deviations or violations.• Prepare, submit and track application for local permit fees (zoning, electrical, building etc.), prepare FAA

filings and procure information necessary for filing.

Site Preparation

• Obtain the permits such as electrical, building, and construction permits, and coordinate any inspectionswith local authorities that may be needed to complete site development work.

• Provide one-time mobilization costs for the construction crews. Any remobilization due to interruptions/delays that are out of Motorola's control will result in additional costs.

• Perform light clearing of brush, grubbing and disposal of vegetation and shrub growth in the site compoundarea and a 20-foot path around it ( 7225 square feet).

• Perform clear light brush, grub roots and dispose vegetation and shrub growth in a 15-foot wide accessroad to the site (not to exceed 100 feet in length).

• Grade the site compound and 10-foot path around it to provide a level, solid, undisturbed surface forinstallation of site components (not to exceed 7225 square feet).

• Supply and install gravel surfacing to a depth of 6 inches, including herbicide treatment and geotextilefabric installation within the fenced in site compound area, and a 3-foot path around it (not to exceed 7225square feet).

• Provide a 15-foot wide access road (not to exceed 100 feet in length), including surface grading andgraveling

• Supply and install 1 farm gate.• Supply and install 6 guard posts.• Supply and install 1 two-foot diameter culvert.• Construct swales around the compound to control soil erosion (not to exceed 400 linear feet).• Provide silt fence around the compound to control soil erosion (not to exceed 400 linear feet).• Install straw bale sediment barriers to control soil erosion (not to exceed 400 linear feet).• Supply and install 8-foot high chain-link fencing with a ten-foot wide gate around the shelter compound (not

to exceed 300 linear feet).• Perform site touch up (fertilize, seed and straw) disturbed areas not covered with gravel after completion of

construction work. Landscaping, decorative fencing or any other aesthetic improvement that may berequired by local jurisdictions has not been included and will be handled through a negotiated contractchange notice.

Site Components Installation

• Construct 1 reinforced concrete foundation necessary for a 12-foot x 26-foot shelter.


July 16, 2018 Page 58

• Construct 1 concrete slab for 1000 gallon above-ground Liquid Propane (LP) fuel tank at 3000 psi withreinforcing steel necessary for foundations.

• Supply and install 1 prefabricated concrete shelter 12-foot x 26-foot (including 10-foot generator room).• Supply and install 1 1000-gallon Liquid Propane (LP) fuel tank(s), fill it with fuel and connect it to the

generator.• Supply and install fuel tank monitors on the tanks to monitor low fuel in tanks and run alarm wiring to the

building located within 50 feet of the tank.• Supply and install 1 120/240-volt, 200-amp, single-phase meter pedestal and hookup for electrical service by

the local utility.• Supply and install three gang meter base• Provide all trenching, conduit, and cabling necessary for underground hookup of power to the shelter from

nearby utility termination located within 100 cable feet of the shelter.• Provide all trenching and conduit necessary for underground hookup of telco lines to the shelter from

nearby within 100 cable feet of the shelter.• Supply and install a perimeter grounding system around the compound and shelter. The ground system is to

tie to the fence and all new metal structures within the compound to meet current Motorola’s R56standards.

• Conduct 1 three-point ground resistance test of the site. Should any improvements to grounding system benecessary after ground testing, the cost of such improvements shall be the responsibility of Dodge Co, NE.

• Supply and install 1 freestanding 24-inch-wide cable/ice bridge from the tower to the shelter (up to 30 linearfeet.

Tower Work

• Construct pier and pad type tower foundations including excavation, rebar and concrete (not to exceed 130cubic yards).

• Erect new 330-foot self-supported tower with strobe lighting.• Supply and install grounding for the tower base for self-supported towers.

Antenna and Transmission Line Installation

• Supply and install antennas for the RF system (see Equipment List for qty).• Supply and install 6-foot side arm(s) for mounting RF antennas• Supply and install tower top amplifier.• Supply and install microwave dishes with ice shields (where applicable)• Supply and install 1/2-inch transmission line (see Equipment List for length).• Supply and install 1-1/4-inch transmission line (see Equipment List for length).• Supply and install EW63 waveguide for microwave dishes (see Equipment List for length).• Perform sweep tests on transmission lines.• Perform alignment of each microwave path to ensure that the microwave dishes are optimally positioned.• Provide and install six hole hanger blocks and attachment hardware for supporting transmission lines on the

antenna support structure every three feet.• Supply and install 1 ground buss bar at the bottom of the antenna support structure for grounding RF cables

before they make horizontal transition.

3.12.1.2 Customer Responsibilities:• As applicable, coordinate, prepare, submit, and pay for all required permits and inspections for the work

that is the Customer’s responsibility.• Pay for all utility connection, pole or line extensions, and any easement or usage fees.


July 16, 2018 Page 59

• Pay for the usage costs of power, leased lines and generator fueling both during the construction/installation effort and on an on-going basis.

• Pay for application fees, taxes and recurring payments for lease/ownership of the property.• Provide personnel to observe construction progress and testing of site equipment according to the

schedule provided by Motorola.• As applicable (based on local jurisdictional authority), the Customer will be responsible for any installation

or up-grades of the electrical system in order to comply with NFPA 70, Article 708• Provide property deed or lease agreement, and boundary survey, along with existing as-built drawings of

the site and site components to Motorola for conducting site engineering.• Provide a right of entry letter from the site owner for Motorola to conduct field investigations.• Conduct all the testing and documentation (balloon tests, photo simulations, zoning application, expert

testimony, zoning drawings etc.) required for the zoning the proposed new tower sites.• Secure power connection to the site, associated permitting and installation of a meter and disconnect

within 50 feet of the proposed shelter location.• Provide additional temporary space for staging of the construction equipment during the construction of

new site facilities (tower, shelter, generator, fuel tank etc..

3.12.2 Site Development at Elkhorn Water Tank SiteMotorola Solutions will perform structural analysis on the water tank, design, build, and install multi-antenna rooftopplatform, permitting, grounding enhancements, and supply and install Microwave Dish(es).

Site Scope Summary

• Engineering services for site drawings and regulatory approvals – Included.• Site acquisition services – Not included.• Zoning Services – Not included.• Existing tower to be used for antennas – 160 ' Water Tank.


• Conduct site walks to collect pertinent information from the sites (e.g., location of Telco, power, existingfacilities, etc.).

• Prepare a lease exhibit and sketch of the site to communicate to the property owner the proposed leasespace and planned development at the particular site location.

• Prepare record drawings of the site showing the as-built information.• Perform National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) Threshold Screening, including limited literature and

records search and brief reporting, as necessary to identify sensitive natural and cultural featuresreferenced in 47 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Chapter 1, subsection 1.1307 that may be potentiallyimpacted by the proposed construction activity. This does not include the additional field investigations todocument site conditions if it is determined that the proposed communication facility “may have asignificant environmental impact” and thus require additional documentation, submittals, or work. Perform acultural resource study, as needed to identify sensitive historical and archaeological monuments that mightbe impacted by propose construction.

• Provide a structural engineering analysis for antenna support structure, if necessary, to support theproposed the proposed equipment loads. NOTE: This task does not include tower mapping, structuralmeasurement survey, materials testing, geotechnical investigation, and/or other field investigation toacquire the data.

• Design multi antenna support platform to support proposed antennas and dishes.


July 16, 2018 Page 60

• Preparation, submission and tracking of application for local permit fees (zoning, electrical, building etc.)and procurement of information necessary for filing.

Site Preparation

• Provide one-time mobilization costs for the construction crews.

Miscellaneous Work

• Structural upgrades for antenna mounting - Interior cable path upgrades for waveguide with necessarygrounding enhancements. Additional A&E and design work.

3.12.2.2 Customer Responsibilities:• If required, prepare and submit Electromagnetic Energy (EME) plans for the site (as a licensee) to

demonstrate compliance with FCC RF Exposure guidelines. • As applicable, coordinate, prepare, submit, and pay for all required permits and inspections for the work

that is the Customer’s responsibility.• Provide personnel to observe construction progress and testing of site equipment according to the



the site and site components to Motorola for conducting site engineering.• Provide a right of entry letter from the site owner for Motorola to conduct field investigations.• Provide as-built structural and foundation drawings of the structure and site location(s) along with

geotechnical report(s) for Motorola to conduct a structural analysis.• Pay for any upgrade of the antenna support structure necessary to accommodate the new antennas.• Confirm that there is adequate utility service to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment.• Confirm that the existing generator is sufficient to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment

loads.• If required, remove or relocate any existing facilities, equipment, and utilities to create space for new site

facilities and equipment.• If required, provide any physical improvements (walls, roofing, flooring, painting, etc.) necessary to house

the equipment in the existing room.• Provide backup power (UPS / Generator) for the new equipment, and UPS sub-distribution panel(s) with

breakers wired to dedicated outlets above the proposed equipment locations.• Provide support and entry facilities for the cables (cable ladder/chaseway, entry ports, etc.) between the

proposed equipment locations.

3.12.2.3 Assumptions:• Pricing has been based on National codes such IBC or BOCA. Local codes or jurisdictional requirements

have not been considered in this proposal.• No improvements are required for concrete trucks, drill rigs, shelter delivery, and crane access.• Existing facility has a grounding system with a ground resistance of 10 ohms or less.• Existing antenna support structures are structurally capable of supporting the new antenna, cables and

ancillary equipment proposed and will not need to be removed or rebuilt at the existing site. The tower orsupporting structure meets all applicable EIA/TIA-222 structural, foundation, ice, wind and twist and swayrequirements. Motorola has not included any cost for structural or foundation upgrades to the antennasupport structure.


July 16, 2018 Page 61

• Existing cable support facilities from the antenna to the cable entry port can be used for supporting the newantenna cables

• Extensive documentation (balloon tests, photo simulations, expert testimony etc.) to support zoning effort forexisting structures is not required.

• A clear obstruction-free access exists from the antenna location to the equipment room.• The existing utility service and backup power facilities (UPS, generators) have sufficient extra capacity to

support the proposed new equipment load.• Alarming at existing sites will be limited to new component installations and will have to be discussed and

agreed to on a site-by-site basis.• The site will have adequate room for installation of proposed equipment, based on applicable codes and

Motorola’s R56 standards.• The Customer does not desire upgrade of the existing site to meet Motorola’s R56 standards.

Completion Criteria

• Site development completed per issued for construction (IFC) construction drawings, project requirements,contractual obligations (including any customer/Motorola approved changes) and approved by Dodge Co.Nebraska.

• This shall be confirmed by contractor and reviewed with Motorola construction manager and projectmanager before inspections occur.

• All jurisdictional and contractual required testing and inspections to be performed by the contractor.(Contractual testing and inspections defined and agreed to with project team and customer prior to projectkick off; vendor solely responsible for conducting, coordinating and paying for all jurisdictional testing andinspections).

• Motorola site development checklist shall be completed and signed off by contractor prior to customerinspection. (Review with project team and customer and amend checklist as required at project kick off orbefore work begins).

• Site turn-over package completed and turned over to Motorola (As defined and agreed to with project teamand customer).

• All punch list and deficiencies shall be completed prior to customer and Motorola inspections.

3.12.3 Site Development at Fremont Power Station SiteMotorola Solutions will perform structural analysis on the Fremont Power Station tower for installing MicrowaveDish(es).

Site Scope Summary

• Engineering services for site drawings and regulatory approvals – Included.• Site acquisition services – Not included.• Zoning Services – Not included.• Existing tower to be used for antennas – 180 ' Rooftop.




July 16, 2018 Page 62




• Provide a structural engineering analysis for antenna support structure, if necessary, to support theproposed the proposed equipment loads. NOTE: This task does not include tower mapping, structuralmeasurement survey, materials testing, geotechnical investigation, and/or other field investigation toacquire the data.


Site Preparation



• Supply and install antenna for the RF system (see Equipment List for qty).• Supply and install 6-foot side arm for mounting RF antennas.• Supply and install tower top amplifier.• Supply and install microwave dishes.

• Supply and install 1-1/4-inch transmission line (see Equipment List for length).• Supply and install EW63 waveguide for microwave dishes (see Equipment List for length).• Perform sweep tests on transmission lines.• Perform alignment of each microwave path to ensure that the microwave dishes are optimally positioned.

• Supply and install 1 ground buss bar at the bottom of the antenna support structure for grounding RF cables

before they make horizontal transition.

Miscellaneous Work

• Supply and install 1 cable entry port.





or up-grades of the electrical system in order to comply with NFPA 70, Article 708


July 16, 2018 Page 63

• Provide property deed or lease agreement, and boundary survey, along with existing as-built drawings ofthe site and site components to Motorola for conducting site engineering.

• Provide a right of entry letter from the site owner for Motorola to conduct field investigations.• Provide as-built structural and foundation drawings of the structure and site location(s) along with

geotechnical report(s) for Motorola to conduct a structural analysis.• Pay for any upgrade of the antenna support structure necessary to accommodate the new loading.• Confirm that there is adequate utility service to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment.• Confirm that the existing generator is sufficient to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment







have not been considered in this proposal.

• Existing facility has a grounding system with a ground resistance of 10 ohms or less.• Existing antenna support structures are structurally capable of supporting the new antenna, cables and





support the proposed new equipment load• Alarming at existing sites will be limited to new component installations and will have to be discussed and



Completion Criteria




July 16, 2018 Page 64





3.12.4 Site Development at OPPD Cedar Bluffs Tower SiteMotorola Solutions will perform structural analysis on the OPPD Cedar Bluffs tower for installing MicrowaveDish(es).

Site Scope Summary

• Engineering services for site drawings and regulatory approvals – Included.• Site acquisition services – Not included.• Zoning Services – Not included.• Existing tower to be used for antennas – 450' Self-Support Tower.


• Prepare site construction drawings, showing the layout of various new and existing site components.• Conduct site walks to collect pertinent information from the sites (e.g., location of Telco, power, existing

facilities, etc.).• Prepare a lease exhibit and sketch of the site to communicate to the property owner the proposed lease

space and planned development at the particular site location.• Prepare record drawings of the site showing the as-built information.• Perform National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) Threshold Screening, including limited literature and


• Perform four point soil resistivity testing at the time of site visit.• Provide a structural engineering analysis for antenna support structure, if necessary, to support the

proposed the proposed equipment loads. NOTE: This task does not include tower mapping, structuralmeasurement survey, materials testing, geotechnical investigation, and/or other field investigation toacquire the data.



July 16, 2018 Page 65

Site Preparation


Antenna and line installation

• Supply and install microwave dishes with ice shields (where applicable)• Supply and install EW63 waveguide for microwave dishes (see Equipment List for length).• Perform sweep tests on transmission lines.• Perform alignment of each microwave path to ensure that the microwave dishes are optimally positioned.

• Supply and install 1 ground buss bar at the bottom of the antenna support structure for grounding RF cables

before they make horizontal transition







geotechnical report(s) for Motorola to conduct a structural analysis.• Pay for any upgrade of the antenna support structure necessary to accommodate the new loading.• Confirm that there is adequate utility service to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment.• Confirm that the existing generator is sufficient to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment









ancillary equipment proposed and will not need to be removed or rebuilt at the existing site. The tower orsupporting structure meets all applicable EIA/TIA-222 structural, foundation, ice, wind and twist and sway


July 16, 2018 Page 66

requirements. Motorola has not included any cost for structural or foundation upgrades to the antennasupport structure.







Completion Criteria







3.12.5 Site Development at Dodge County BuildingMotorola Solutions will perform structural analysis on the Dodge County Building for installing Microwave Dish(es).

Site Scope Summary

• Engineering services for site drawings and regulatory approvals – Included.• Site acquisition services – Not included.• Zoning Services – Not included.• Existing tower to be used for antennas – 85' Self-Support Tower.





July 16, 2018 Page 67


records search and brief reporting, as necessary to identify sensitive natural and cultural featuresreferenced in 47 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Chapter 1, subsection 1.1307 that may be potentiallyimpacted by the proposed construction activity. This does not include the additional field investigations todocument site conditions if it is determined that the proposed communication facility “may have asignificant environmental impact” and thus require additional documentation, submittal's, or work. Performa cultural resource study, as needed to identify sensitive historical and archaeological monuments thatmight be impacted by propose construction.

• Perform four point soil resisitivity testing at the time of site visit.• Provide a structural engineering analysis for antenna support structure, if necessary, to support the

proposed the proposed equipment loads. NOTE: This task does not include tower mapping, structuralmeasurement survey, materials testing, geo-technical investigation, and/or other field investigation toacquire the data.


Site Preparation



• Supply and install microwave dishes with ice shields (where applicable)

• Supply and install EW63 waveguide for microwave dishes (see Equipment List for length).• Perform sweep tests on transmission lines.• Perform alignment of microwave path to ensure that the microwave dishes are optimally positioned.

Existing Facility Improvements Work

• Ground all metallic objects in the interior of the existing room, to meet current Motorola’s Standards andGuidelines for Communications Sites (R56) requirements and terminate near equipment locations.

• Supply and install 2 20-amp breakers in the distribution panel and wire to outlets located on an averagewithin 35 cable feet.







geotechnical report(s) for Motorola to conduct a structural analysis.• Pay for any upgrade of the antenna support structure necessary to accommodate the new loading.


July 16, 2018 Page 68

• Confirm that there is adequate utility service to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment.• Confirm that the existing generator is sufficient to support the new equipment and ancillary equipment
















Completion Criteria






July 16, 2018 Page 69



3.13 PROJECT SCHEDULEMotorola has developed a detailed implementation schedule outlining several key project tasks and milestones.During the implementation period, the Motorola Project Manager shall update the implementation schedule by the15th day of each month. The Motorola Project Manager shall also provide a monthly report laying out progressachieved, a description of any delays and the cause of those delays, and a discussion of the effort that will be madeto bring the Project back to the original schedule.

The following assumptions were considered when developing the project implementation schedule included on thefollowing pages:

• Contract award date of July 27th 2018• Based on the system as proposed with this offering.• Detailed design review is completed and accepted within thirty (30) calendar days of contract award.• Site acquisitions, lease agreements/MOU’s, FCC licenses, FAA and other regulatory approvals from outside

agencies are completed by stated due dates.• Customer responsibilities are completed by stated due dates.• All work is performed during normal working hours M-F between 8 AM and 5 PM


July 16, 2018 Page 70

ID Task Name Duration Start Finish Predecessors Resource Names

1 Implementation 444 days Fri 7/27/18 Wed 4/8/20

2 Contract 23 days Fri 7/27/18 Tue 8/28/18

3 Contract Signing and Award 0 days Fri 7/27/18 Fri 7/27/18 Customer

4 Contract Administration 3 days Fri 7/27/18 Tue 7/31/18 3 Motorola,Customer

5 Project Kickoff Meeting 15 days Wed 8/8/18 Tue 8/28/18 4FS+5 days Motorola,Customer

6 Contract Design Review 21 days Fri 8/31/18 Fri 9/28/18

7 Site visits with A&E firm 2 days Fri 8/31/18 Mon 9/3/18 5FS+2 days Motorola,Customer

8 Preliminary Construction Drawings (where applicable) 10 days Tue 9/4/18 Mon 9/17/18 7 Motorola

9 Design Review 2 days Tue 9/18/18 Wed 9/19/18 8 Motorola,Customer

10 Finalize Design Documents 5 days Thu 9/20/18 Wed 9/26/18 9 Motorola

11 Final Design Complete 0 days Fri 9/28/18 Fri 9/28/18 10FS+2 days Milestone

12 Site Acquisition/Notice to Proceed 40 days Fri 10/5/18 Fri 11/30/18

13 Fremont Power Water Tower NTP from County 0 days Fri 10/12/18 Fri 10/12/18 11FS+10 days Milestone

14 Green Site 1 NTP from County 0 days Fri 11/9/18 Fri 11/9/18 11FS+30 days Milestone




18 Dodge County Building NTP from County 0 days Fri 11/9/18 Fri 11/9/18 11FS+30 days Milestone

19 Elkhorn Water Tower NTP from County 0 days Fri 11/9/18 Fri 11/9/18 11FS+30 days Milestone

20 OPPD Cedar Bluffs Tower NTP from County 0 days Fri 11/9/18 Fri 11/9/18 11FS+30 days Milestone

21 PSAP NTP from County 0 days Fri 10/5/18 Fri 10/5/18 11FS+5 days Milestone

22 FCC Licensing 90 days Wed 3/13/19 Tue 7/16/19

23 FCC Licensing 90 days Wed 3/13/19 Tue 7/16/19 75,134,146,157 Customer

24 FCC License Received 0 days Tue 7/16/19 Tue 7/16/19 23 Milestone

25 Microwave Path Study 37 days Mon 12/10/18 Tue 1/29/19

26 Conduct Physical Path Surveys 10 days Mon 12/10/18 Fri 12/21/18 13,14,15,16,17FS+5 days,21 Motorola

27 Generate & Distribute Path Survey Reports 15 days Mon 12/24/18 Fri 1/11/19 26 Motorola

28 Review any recommended Design changes (i.e. height) with Customer 5 days Mon 1/14/19 Fri 1/18/19 27 Motorola,Customer

29 New Microwave design changes approved 0 days Tue 1/22/19 Tue 1/22/19 28FS+2 days Milestone

30 Update Design Documents 5 days Wed 1/23/19 Tue 1/29/19 29 Motorola

31 Order Processing & Manufacturing 271 days Mon 10/1/18 Mon 10/14/19

32 Process Equipment Orders 3 days Mon 10/1/18 Wed 10/3/18 11 Motorola

33 Order Bridged 0 days Wed 10/3/18 Wed 10/3/18 32 Milestone

34 Equipment Manufacturing 268 days Thu 10/4/18 Mon 10/14/19

35 Manufacture Microwave Equipment 35 days Wed 1/30/19 Tue 3/19/19 33,30 Motorola

36 Manufacture Motorola FNE 20 days Thu 10/4/18 Wed 10/31/18 33 Motorola

37 Manufacture Non-Motorola Equipment 30 days Thu 10/4/18 Wed 11/14/18 33 Motorola

38 Manufacture Motorola Subscribers 20 days Thu 10/4/18 Wed 10/31/18 33 Motorola

39 Green Site 1 Shelter 40 days Tue 7/30/19 Mon 9/23/19 33,82 Motorola

40 Green Site 1 Generator 40 days Tue 7/30/19 Mon 9/23/19 33,82 Motorola

7/27

9/28

10/12

11/9

11/16

11/23

11/30

11/9

11/9

11/9

10/5

7/16

1/22

10/3

M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E BApril July October January April July October January April

Project 25 System Implementation Schedule


July 16, 2018 Page 71


41 Green Site 1 Tower 40 days Tue 7/30/19 Mon 9/23/19 33,82 Motorola










51 System Fleetmapping and Subscriber Templates 55 days Mon 10/22/18 Fri 1/4/19

52 Fleetmapping 15 days Mon 10/22/18 Fri 11/9/18 11FS+15 days Customer,State

53 Programming Template Inputs 30 days Mon 11/12/18 Fri 12/21/18 52 Customer

54 Template Development 5 days Mon 12/24/18 Fri 12/28/18 53 Motorola

55 Test templates 5 days Mon 12/31/18 Fri 1/4/19 54 Customer

56 Approved Programming Templates Complete 0 days Fri 1/4/19 Fri 1/4/19 55 Milestone

57 System Staging 255 days Wed 10/17/18 Tue 10/8/19

58 Equipment delivered to Staging facility 0 days Wed 11/14/18 Wed 11/14/18 36,37 Milestone

59 Stage System 20 days Thu 11/15/18 Wed 12/12/18 58 Motorola

60 Perform Staging ATP 1 day Thu 12/13/18 Thu 12/13/18 59 Motorola,Customer

61 System Staging Acceptance 0 days Thu 12/13/18 Thu 12/13/18 60 Milestone

62 Pack and Ship Equipment to Field 6 days Fri 12/14/18 Fri 12/21/18 61 Motorola

63 SITE ENGINEERING & PERMITTING 255 days Wed 10/17/18 Tue 10/8/19

64 Fremont Power Water Tower 73 days Wed 10/17/18 Fri 1/25/19

65 Site visit with A&E 1 day Wed 10/17/18 Wed 10/17/18 13FS+2 days Customer,Motorola

66 Structural Analysis & Report 10 days Thu 10/18/18 Wed 10/31/18 65 Motorola

67 Design Multi Antenna Support Platform 3 days Thu 11/1/18 Mon 11/5/18 66 Motorola

68 Construction Drawings 10 days Tue 11/6/18 Mon 11/19/18 67 Motorola

69 Review and approve construction drawings 2 days Tue 11/20/18 Wed 11/21/18 68 Customer,Motorola

70 Preparation, submission and tracking of application for local permitting

10 days Thu 11/22/18 Wed 12/5/18 69 Customer,Motorola

71 Limited NEPA study and approvals 15 days Thu 12/6/18 Wed 12/26/18 70 Motorola

72 Complete Final Detailed drawings for Customer review 5 days Thu 12/27/18 Wed 1/2/19 71 Motorola

73 Review and Approval of Final Drawings 2 days Thu 1/3/19 Fri 1/4/19 72 Customer,Motorola

74 Building and construction permit application and approval 15 days Mon 1/7/19 Fri 1/25/19 73 Customer,Motorola

75 Engineering & Permitting Complete 0 days Fri 1/25/19 Fri 1/25/19 74 Milestone

76 Green Site 1 (new tower, shelter, and generator) 220 days Wed 11/14/18 Tue 9/17/19


78 Zoning application and approval 60 days Thu 11/15/18 Wed 2/6/19 77 Customer

79 NEPA/SHPO aprovals 90 days Thu 11/15/18 Wed 3/20/19 77 Customer,Motorola

80 Geo-tech study & reporting 20 days Tue 2/12/19 Mon 3/11/19 78FS+3 days Motorola

1/4

11/14

12/13

1/25




July 16, 2018 Page 72


81 FAA filing and approvals 90 days Tue 3/12/19 Mon 7/15/19 80 Customer,Motorola

82 Construction Drawings 10 days Tue 7/16/19 Mon 7/29/19 77,78,81 Motorola


84 Preparation, submission and tracking of application for local permitting 25 days Thu 8/1/19 Wed 9/4/19 83 Motorola


86 Review and Approval of Final Drawings 4 days Thu 9/12/19 Tue 9/17/19 85 Customer,Motorola

87 Engineering & Permitting Complete 0 days Tue 9/17/19 Tue 9/17/19 84,86 Milestone









96 Preparation, submission and tracking of application for local permitting 25 days Thu 8/8/19 Wed 9/11/19 95 Customer,Motorola

























9/17

9/24

10/1




July 16, 2018 Page 73





124 County Courthouse 85 days Wed 11/14/18 Tue 3/12/19



127 Construction Drawings 10 days Thu 11/29/18 Wed 12/12/18 126 Customer

128 Review and approve construction drawings 2 days Thu 12/13/18 Fri 12/14/18 127 Customer,Motorola


10 days Mon 12/17/18 Fri 12/28/18 128 Customer,Motorola

130 Limited NEPA study and approvals 15 days Mon 12/31/18 Fri 1/18/19 129 Motorola

131 Complete Final Detailed drawings for Customer review 5 days Mon 1/21/19 Fri 1/25/19 130 Customer

132 Review and Approval of Final Drawings 2 days Mon 1/28/19 Tue 1/29/19 131 Customer,Motorola

133 Building and construction permit application and approval 30 days Wed 1/30/19 Tue 3/12/19 132 Customer

134 Engineering & Permitting Complete 0 days Tue 3/12/19 Tue 3/12/19 133 Milestone

135 Elkhorn Water Tower 73 days Wed 11/14/18 Fri 2/22/19



138 Design Multi Antenna Support Platform 3 days Thu 11/29/18 Mon 12/3/18 137 Motorola

139 Construction Drawings 10 days Tue 12/4/18 Mon 12/17/18 138 Motorola



10 days Thu 12/20/18 Wed 1/2/19 140 Customer,Motorola

142 Limited NEPA study and approvals 15 days Thu 1/3/19 Wed 1/23/19 141 Motorola


144 Review and Approval of Final Drawings 2 days Thu 1/31/19 Fri 2/1/19 143 Customer,Motorola

145 Building and construction permit application and approval 15 days Mon 2/4/19 Fri 2/22/19 144 Customer,Motorola

146 Engineering & Permitting Complete 0 days Fri 2/22/19 Fri 2/22/19 145 Milestone

147 OPPD Cedar Bluffs Site 72 days Wed 11/14/18 Thu 2/21/19



150 Construction Drawings 10 days Thu 11/29/18 Wed 12/12/18 149 Motorola

151 Review and approve construction drawings 2 days Thu 12/13/18 Fri 12/14/18 150 Customer,Motorola


10 days Mon 12/17/18 Fri 12/28/18 151 Customer,Motorola

153 Limited NEPA study and approvals 15 days Mon 12/31/18 Fri 1/18/19 152 Motorola

154 Complete Final Detailed drawings for Customer review 5 days Mon 1/21/19 Fri 1/25/19 153 Motorola

155 Review and Approval of Final Drawings 4 days Mon 1/28/19 Thu 1/31/19 154 Customer

156 Building and construction permit application and approval 15 days Fri 2/1/19 Thu 2/21/19 155 Customer,Motorola

157 Engineering & Permitting Complete 0 days Thu 2/21/19 Thu 2/21/19 156 Milestone

158 SITE DEVELOPMENT 212 days Mon 3/18/19 Tue 1/7/20

159 Elkhorn Water Tower 19.5 days Mon 3/18/19 Fri 4/12/19

10/8

3/12

2/22

2/21




July 16, 2018 Page 74


160 SITE PREPARATION 1 day Mon 3/18/19 Mon 3/18/19

161 Mobilization 1 day Mon 3/18/19 Mon 3/18/19 75FS+3 days,134FS+3 days,146FS+3 days,157FS+3 daysMotorola

162 Antenna Platform Installation 10 days Tue 3/19/19 Mon 4/1/19

163 Antenna Platform Delivery 2 days Tue 3/19/19 Wed 3/20/19 161,67FS+10 days,138FS+10 daysMotorola

164 Antenna Platform Installation 5 days Fri 3/22/19 Thu 3/28/19 163FS+1 day Motorola

165 Antenna Platform Installation Inspection 1 day Mon 4/1/19 Mon 4/1/19 164FS+1 day Customer,Motorola

166 Antenna Platform Install Complete and Approved 0 days Mon 4/1/19 Mon 4/1/19 165 Milestone

167 FINAL TESTING 8.5 days Tue 4/2/19 Fri 4/12/19

168 Punch List with Customer 0.5 days Tue 4/2/19 Tue 4/2/19 166 Customer,Motorola

169 Punch List completion 3 days Tue 4/2/19 Fri 4/5/19 168 Motorola

170 As-Built drawings from A&E 5 days Fri 4/5/19 Fri 4/12/19 169 Motorola

171 Site Development Milestone Completion Certificate 0 days Fri 4/12/19 Fri 4/12/19 169,170 Milestone

172 Green Site 1 62 days Mon 9/23/19 Tue 12/17/19

173 SITE PREPARATION 31.5 days Mon 9/23/19 Tue 11/5/19

174 Mobilization 1 day Mon 9/23/19 Mon 9/23/19 87FS+3 days Motorola

175 Pre-Shelter and generator set preparation (trenching, foundations, ground ring, etc.)10 days Tue 9/24/19 Mon 10/7/19 174 Motorola

176 Foundation curing 15 days Tue 10/8/19 Mon 10/28/19 175 Motorola

177 Grounding Inspection 0.5 days Tue 10/8/19 Tue 10/8/19 175 Customer,Motorola

178 Ship shelter and generator to site 2 days Tue 10/29/19 Wed 10/30/19 176,177,39,40 Motorola

179 Offload and Install equipment shelter and Generator 1 day Thu 10/31/19 Thu 10/31/19 176,178 Motorola

180 Building/Electrical inspection 0.5 days Tue 11/5/19 Tue 11/5/19 179FS+2 days Motorola,Customer

181 Install ice bridge from shelter to the tower 1 day Fri 11/1/19 Fri 11/1/19 179 Motorola

182 TOWER 37 days Tue 10/8/19 Wed 11/27/19

183 Tower Foundation 6 days Tue 10/8/19 Tue 10/15/19 175 Motorola

184 Tower Foundation curing 20 days Wed 10/16/19 Tue 11/12/19 183 Motorola

185 Ship tower to site 2 days Wed 11/13/19 Thu 11/14/19 184,41 Motorola

186 Erect Tower 8 days Fri 11/15/19 Tue 11/26/19 185 Motorola

187 Tower inspection 1 day Wed 11/27/19 Wed 11/27/19 186 Customer,Motorola

188 SITE RESTORATION 4 days Thu 11/28/19 Tue 12/3/19

189 Finish Grade and gravel compound 1 day Thu 11/28/19 Thu 11/28/19 181,187 Motorola

190 Fencing of tower compound 2 days Fri 11/29/19 Mon 12/2/19 189 Motorola

191 Complete grounding connections 1 day Tue 12/3/19 Tue 12/3/19 190 Motorola

192 FINAL TESTING 10 days Wed 12/4/19 Tue 12/17/19

193 Grounding test of the site 0.5 days Wed 12/4/19 Wed 12/4/19 191 Motorola,Customer

194 Startup/Test shelter power System 1 day Wed 12/4/19 Thu 12/5/19 180,193 Motorola

195 Punch List 0.5 days Thu 12/5/19 Thu 12/5/19 181,191,194 Customer,Motorola

196 Punch List completion 3 days Fri 12/6/19 Tue 12/10/19 195 Motorola

197 As-Built drawings from A&E 5 days Wed 12/11/19 Tue 12/17/19 196 Motorola

198 Site Development Milestone Completion Certificate 0 days Tue 12/17/19 Tue 12/17/19 196,197 Milestone


4/1

4/12

12/17




July 16, 2018 Page 75







205 Ship shelter and generator to site 2 days Tue 11/5/19 Wed 11/6/19 203,204 Motorola







212 Ship tower to site 2 days Wed 11/20/19 Thu 11/21/19 211 Motorola




























12/24




July 16, 2018 Page 76


































272 Complete grounding connections 1 day Tue 12/24/19 Tue 12/24/19 271 Customer,Motorola








12/31

1/7




July 16, 2018 Page 77


280 Radio/MW System Equipment Installations 282 days Mon 12/24/18 Tue 1/21/20

281 Receive and Inventory Equipment 2 days Mon 12/24/18 Tue 12/25/18 62 Motorola

282 Green Site 1 5 days Wed 12/18/19 Tue 12/24/19 281,198 Motorola




286 Fremont Power Water Tower 5 days Fri 4/12/19 Fri 4/19/19 281,171 Motorola

287 SRS P25 Core 1 day Wed 12/26/18 Wed 12/26/18 281 Motorola

288 Dodge County Building 3 days Wed 3/13/19 Fri 3/15/19 281,134 Motorola

289 Elkhorn Water Tower 3 days Mon 2/25/19 Wed 2/27/19 281,146 Motorola

290 OPPD Cedar Bluffs Site 3 days Fri 2/22/19 Tue 2/26/19 281,157 Motorola

291 PSAP 2 days Wed 12/26/18 Thu 12/27/18 281 Motorola

292 Equipment Installation Inspections Complete 1 day Wed 1/15/20 Wed 1/15/20 282,283,284,285,286,291 Customer,Motorola

293 Equipment Installation Acceptance Complete 0 days Wed 1/15/20 Wed 1/15/20 292 Milestone

294 Antenna, MW dish installations (and MW Alignments) 235 days Wed 2/27/19 Tue 1/21/20

295 Green Site 1 5 days Wed 12/25/19 Tue 12/31/19 282 Motorola




299 Fremont Power Water Tower 6 days Fri 4/19/19 Mon 4/29/19 286 Motorola

300 Dodge County Building 8 days Mon 3/18/19 Wed 3/27/19 288 Motorola

301 Elkhorn Water Tower 6 days Thu 2/28/19 Thu 3/7/19 289 Motorola

302 OPPD Cedar Bluffs Site 4 days Wed 2/27/19 Mon 3/4/19 290 Motorola

303 Antenna, MW,Line installs, Alignments Complete 0 days Tue 1/21/20 Tue 1/21/20 295,296,297,298,302,299,301Milestone

304 End User Training 5 days Mon 1/20/20 Fri 1/24/20

305 Subscriber Train the Trainor training 2 days Thu 1/23/20 Fri 1/24/20 310FF Motorola,Customer

306 System Admin Training 5 days Mon 1/20/20 Fri 1/24/20 310FF Motorola,Customer

307 Acceptance Testing 18 days Tue 1/21/20 Fri 2/14/20

308 Notification to Customer System is ready for ATP 0 days Tue 1/21/20 Tue 1/21/20 293,24,303 Milestone

309 System Acceptance Testing with Customer 3 days Wed 1/22/20 Fri 1/24/20 308 Motorola,Customer

310 System Acceptance Testing Complete 0 days Fri 1/24/20 Fri 1/24/20 309 Milestone

311 Coverage Acceptance Testing (CATP) 12 days Thu 1/30/20 Fri 2/14/20

312 CATP Training and Set-up 2 days Thu 1/30/20 Fri 1/31/20 310FS+3 days Customer,Motorola

313 Coverage Acceptance Testing and Reporting 7 days Mon 2/3/20 Tue 2/11/20 312 Motorola,Customer

314 Coverage Testing Data Compilation and Reporting 2 days Wed 2/12/20 Thu 2/13/20 313 Motorola

315 Customer Review and Acceptance of Acceptance Testing Results 1 day Fri 2/14/20 Fri 2/14/20 314 Customer

316 Coverage Acceptance Testing Complete 0 days Fri 2/14/20 Fri 2/14/20 315 Milestone

317 Subscriber Programming and Installations 275 days Mon 1/7/19 Fri 1/24/20

318 Program Mobiles and Portables 20 days Mon 1/7/19 Fri 2/1/19 38,56 Motorola

319 Distribute Portables 2 days Mon 2/4/19 Tue 2/5/19 318 Customer,Motorola

1/15

1/21

1/21

1/24

2/14




July 16, 2018 Page 78


320 Install Mobiles and Control Stations 30 days Mon 2/4/19 Fri 3/15/19 318 Motorola

321 Subscribers Ready! 0 days Fri 1/24/20 Fri 1/24/20 310FF,319,320 Milestone

322 Cutover 10 days Fri 2/14/20 Fri 2/28/20

323 System, Customer Ready! 0 days Fri 2/14/20 Fri 2/14/20 321,316,310 Milestone

324 Implement Cutover Plan 10 days Mon 2/17/20 Fri 2/28/20 323 Motorola,Customer

325 Dodge County Cutover Complete 0 days Fri 2/28/20 Fri 2/28/20 324 Milestone

326 System Acceptance (Warranty begins) 0 days Fri 2/28/20 Fri 2/28/20 325 Milestone

327 Finalize 28 days Mon 3/2/20 Wed 4/8/20

328 Final Inspection w/Customer 3 days Mon 3/2/20 Wed 3/4/20 326 Motorola

329 Punchlist Resolution 10 days Thu 3/5/20 Wed 3/18/20 328 Motorola

330 System documentation development and delivery 15 days Thu 3/19/20 Wed 4/8/20 326,328,329 Motorola

331 Transition Service/PTC 2 days Mon 3/2/20 Tue 3/3/20 326 Motorola,Customer

332 Final Acceptance 0 days Wed 4/8/20 Wed 4/8/20 331,330 Milestone

1/24

2/14

2/28

2/28

4/8




July 16, 2018 Page 79

3.14 ACCEPTANCE TEST PLANSystem Acceptance of the proposed solution will occur upon successful completion of a Functional Acceptance TestPlan (FATP), which will test the features, functions, and failure modes for the installed equipment in order to verifythat the solution operates according to its design. This plan will validate that Customer's solution will operateaccording to its design, and increase the efficiency and accuracy of the final installation activities. The detailed FATPprovided on the following pages will be reviewed and approved during the Design Review.


July 16, 2018 Page 80

ACIM LINKS ON MCC 7100/7500 CONSOLE SITE

Inbound and Outbound Calls Using ACIM

1. DESCRIPTION This test will demonstrate the capability to make and receive calls on a radio using an ACIM Conventional Channel SETUP RADIO-1 - configured with radio personalities for CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz - ACIM CHANNEL CONSOLE-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz On CONSOLE-1, program the FREQ1-FREQ6 to match the frequency range of the various personalities on RADIO-1 VERSION #1.030

2. TEST Step 1. From CONSOLE-1 place an outbound

analog mode call using CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz and FREQ1

Step 2. Verify voice is audible at RADIO-1 and

CONSOLE-1’s ID/alias is displayed. Step 3. Using RADIO-1, Place an inbound analog

mode call. Step 4. Verify that voice is audible at CONSOLE-1

and RADIO-1’s ID/alias is displayed. Step 5. Repeat the Steps 1-4 by changing the

frequency selection on the CONSOLE-1 for the outbound calls and the personality and channel change on the RADIO-1 for the inbound calls for testing.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 81

ACIM Links on MCC 7100/7500 Console Site

Call Alert Inbound/Outbound Using ACIM

1. DESCRIPTION A radio user and console operator using an ACIM conventional channel is able to receive and transmit Call Alerts. Call Alert is a system page that allows a user to selectively alert another unit. The initiating radio will receive notification from the system as to whether or not the page is received by the target unit. Units receiving a Call Alert will sound an alert tone. SETUP RADIO-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz CONSOLE-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Initiate a Call Alert from CONSOLE-1 to

RADIO-1 using CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz.

Step 2. Verify that the Call Alert is received by

RADIO-1. Step 3. Initiate an inbound Call Alert from RADIO-1

on the affiliated CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz.

Step 4. Verify that the Call Alert is received on

CONSOLE-1.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 82


Emergency Alarm and Call Using ACIM

1. DESCRIPTION This test will demonstrate that a radio user using an ACIM conventional channel is able to transmit Emergency Alarms and Calls and that the console displays the ID of the radio. This test will also demonstrate that the radio can connect with the acknowledging console and that audio is transmitted. SETUP RADIO-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz RADIO-2 – CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz CONSOLE-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Initiate an Emergency Alarm by pressing the

emergency button from the RADIO-1 using CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz.

Step 2. Verify that the Emergency Alarm is received

at CONSOLE-1 with the correct ID and that the Emergency tone is generated at CONSOLE-1

Step 3. Verify that RADIO-1 receives the

Emergency Acknowledgement tones. Step 4. Acknowledge the Emergency Alarm from

CONSOLE-1. Step 5. From RADIO-1 press the PTT and verify that

audio is received at CONSOLE-1. Step 6. Verify that the console display shows the

correct ID and that the call is made in the Emergency mode.

Step 7. Terminate the Emergency Call at RADIO-1

and initiate a PTT from RADIO-2. Step 8. Verify that CONSOLE-1 displays the correct

ID and that system goes back to normal conventional mode.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 83


Call Alert Page - Conventional Using ACIM

1. DESCRIPTION This test will demonstrate that an MCC7100/7500 console using a Conventional Channel is able to transmit Call Alert pages. Call Alert Page allows a dispatcher to selectively alert another radio unit. The initiating console will receive notification as to whether or not the call alert was received. Units receiving a Call Alert will sound an alert tone and show a visual alert indication. The display will also show the individual ID of the initiating console. This test can be run using Mixed Mode, MDC1200 or ACIM Conventional Channels. SETUP RADIO-1 - SITE 1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz RADIO-2 - SITE 1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz RADIO-3 - SITE 1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz CONSOLE-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. From CONSOLE-1 create a paging queue

containing Call Alerts to RADIO-1, RADIO-2 and RADIO-3.

Step 2. From CONSOLE-1 start the pages on

CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz Step 3. Verify that RADIO-1, RADIO-2 and RADIO-3

receive the Call Alerts.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 84

WIDE AREA TRUNKING - TDMA ONLY SITES

Talkgroup Call

1. DESCRIPTION The Talkgroup is the primary level of organization for communications on a trunked radio system. Radios with Talkgroup call capability will be able to communicate with other members of the same Talkgroup. This provides the effect of a private channel down to the Talkgroup level. This test will demonstrate that a Talkgroup transmission initiated by a radio user will only be heard by system users, which have, the same Talkgroup selected. As with other types of calls, Talkgroup calls can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - SITE 1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - SITE 2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - SITE 1 - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-4 - SITE 2 - TALKGROUP 2 VERSION #1.040

2. TEST Step 1. Initiate a Wide Area Call with RADIO-1 in

TALKGROUP 1. Step 2. Observe that only RADIO-2 will be able to

monitor and respond to the call. Step 3. Initiate a Wide Area Call with RADIO-3 in


monitor and respond the call.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 85

Wide Area Trunking - TDMA Only Sites

Continuous Assignment Updating

1. DESCRIPTION When a talkgroup is assigned a voice channel, the site controller continues to transmit the channel assignment on the control channel for the duration of the talkgroup call. Radios coming into use on the system are automatically sent to voice channels with conversations in progress involving their selected talkgroups. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 1 VERSION #1.010

2. TEST Step 1. Turn OFF RADIO-1. Step 2. Initiate a Talkgroup Call using RADIO-2 and

verify RADIO-3 hears the audio. Step 3. While the Talkgroup Call is in progress, turn

ON RADIO-1. Step 4. Observe RADIO-1, which was just brought

back into service, joins the Talkgroup Call already in progress.

Step 5. End the talkgroup call. Step 6. Switch RADIO-1 to another talkgroup. Step 7. Initiate a Talkgroup Call from RADIO-2 to

RADIO-3. Step 8. While the Talkgroup Call is in progress, set

RADIO-1 back to TALKGROUP 1. Step 9. Observe that RADIO-1 joins the Talkgroup

Call already in progress.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 86


Call Alert

1. DESCRIPTION Call Alert is a tone page that allows a user to selectively alert another radio unit. The initiating radio will receive notification from the trunked system as to whether or not the page was received by the target radio. Units receiving a Call Alert will sound an alert tone. As with other types of calls, Call Alerts can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 3 VERSION #1.010

2. TEST Step 1. Using RADIO-1, press the page button. Step 2. Enter the unit ID of RADIO-2 with the

keypad, or scroll to the location where this ID is stored

Step 3. Press the PTT to initiate the call alert. Verify

that the RADIO-1 user receives audible indication that the Call Alert was sent.

Step 4. Verify that RADIO-2 user receives an

audible indication of an incoming Call Alert was sent but RADIO-3 does not.

Step 5. Verify RADIO-1 gets an audible indication

that the Call Alert was successfully received at the target radio.

Step 6. Turn off RADIO-2. Send a Call Alert from

RADIO-1 to RADIO-2. Step 7. Verify that the RADIO-1 user receives

audible indication that the Call Alert was sent.

Step 8. Verify RADIO-1 receives a "No

Acknowledgement" indication that the Call Alert was not received at the target radio.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 87


Private Call

1. DESCRIPTION Private Call is a selective calling feature that allows a radio user to carry on one-to-one conversation that is only heard by the 2 parties involved. Subscriber units receiving a private call will sound an alert tone. As with other types of calls, Private Calls can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 1 VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Using RADIO-1, press the Private Call (Call)

button. Step 2. Enter the unit ID of RADIO-2 with the

keypad, or scroll to the location where this ID is stored.

Step 3. Press the PTT to initiate the Private Call. Step 4. Verify that RADIO-2 hears tones and the

display indicates that a Private Call has been received, but RADIO-3 receives no indications.

Step 5. Answer the call at RADIO-2 by pressing the

Private Call (Call)/Respond button. If RADIO-2 has a display, verify it shows the ID number or Alias of the calling unit.

Step 6. Press the PTT switch on RADIO-2 and

respond to the Private Call. Note that if you do not press the Private Call button before pressing PTT, your audio will be heard by all members of the talkgroup, and not just by the radio initiating the Private Call.

Step 7. Verify that RADIO-2 can communicate with

RADIO-1. Step 8. Verify that RADIO-3 does not monitor the

Private Call. Step 9. End the Private Call by pressing the "home"

key and return to normal talkgroup operation.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 88


Multigroup Call in Wait Mode

1. DESCRIPTION This trunking feature allows an equipped radio user to transmit an announcement to several different talkgroups simultaneously. The multigroup (ATG) call can be flagged for Wait Mode in the Provisioning Manager (PM) database forcing all attached talkgroups to finish calls in progress before the trunked system will process the multigroup call. The system does not permit inactive, attached talkgroups to initiate Talkgroup Calls during the "wait" timeframe. As with other types of calls, multigroup calls can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-3 - RANDOM (Not part of MG) RADIO-4 - ATG 1 * TALKGROUP 1 and TALKGROUP 2 are members of ATG 1. * RANDOM is any talkgroup not a member of ATG 1. * Multigroups are set up through both the Provisioning Manager (PM) and the Subscriber Programming software. VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Verify ATG 1 is set for the Wait mode. Step 2. Using RADIO-1, initiate a call on

TALKGROUP 1. Step 3. While RADIO-1 is keyed, attempt to initiate a

multigroup call using RADIO-4 on ATG 1. Verify RADIO-4 receives a busy tone because one of the talkgroups attached to ATG 1 is involved in a Talkgroup Call.

Step 4. Key RADIO-2 and verify that a busy tone is

received because the ATG 1 call is in queue.

Step 5. Dekey RADIO-1 and verify RADIO-4

receives a callback. Step 6. Key RADIO-4 and verify both RADIO-1 and

RADIO-2 hear the multigroup call while RADIO-3 does not unmute.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 89


Audio Interrupt / Interrupt Never Mode

1. DESCRIPTION A radio PTT request may be received for a group already active and currently being sourced by another radio unit. The talkgroup can be flagged to either allow or disallow the new PTT. If allowed, the latest PTT request will be granted and become the source of the call. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 1 VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Verify TALKGROUP 1's template is set up

as Audio Interrupt Never. Step 2. Using RADIO-1, initiate a call on

TALKGROUP 1. Step 3. Verify both RADIO-2 and RADIO-3 monitor

the audio. Step 4. Using RADIO-3, initiate a call on

TALKGROUP 1. Step 5. Verify that RADIO-3 receives a reject and

that RADIO-2 continues to listen to RADIO-1.

Step 6. Dekey both Radios.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 90


Emergency Alarm and Call with Top of Queue (TDMA)

1. DESCRIPTION Users in life threatening situations can use the Emergency button on the radio to immediately send a signal to the dispatcher and be assigned the next available voice channel. An Emergency Call can be set to either Top of Queue or Ruthless Preemption operation. To accomplish this test, an Emergency Alarm and Call will be initiated from a subscriber which will be received by a subscriber affiliated at any site of any zone in the system. NOTE: If the subscriber does not have the Display option, the Emergency ID will not be displayed. NOTE: All radios and talkgroups should start with default priorities. Default is 10. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-1 - SITE - SITE 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - SITE - Any Site RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-3 - SITE - SITE 1 RADIO-4 - TALKGROUP 3 RADIO-4 - SITE - SITE 1 RADIO-5 - TALKGROUP 4 RADIO-5 - SITE - Any Site VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Verify the emergency type for TALKGROUP

1's template to be set up as Top of Queue. Step 2. Simulate a busy system by disabling all

channels at SITE 1 with the exception of the control channel and one physical voice channel. Press the PTT on RADIO-5 and hold until the completion of the test.

Step 3. Press the PTT to initiate a call with RADIO-3

and hold the PTT switch until instructed to release.

Step 4. Key RADIO-4 and verify the radio receives a

busy tone. Release the PTT switch on RADIO-4.

Step 5. Using RADIO-1, send an Emergency Call by

depressing the emergency switch and then the PTT switch.

Step 6. Observe that RADIO-1 cannot transmit due

to the voice channel being busy. Step 7. Release the PTT switch on RADIO-3.

Observe that RADIO-1 receives the call back before RADIO-4 and is able to proceed with the call.

Step 8. Observe that the display on RADIO-2

denotes an emergency and the unit ID or alias of RADIO-1.

Step 9. Dekey RADIO-1 and end the Emergency

Call by holding down the Emergency button on RADIO-1 until an alert tone sounds. Verify RADIO-1 returns to normal operation.

Step 10. Verify RADIO-4 receives a callback.

Release the PTT on RADIO-5. Return the system to normal operation.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 91

MCC 7500 ECHO CANCELLATION ON CONVENTIONAL

Echo Cancellation of Outbound Audio

1. DESCRIPTION Inbound audio will continue to be muted when a new outbound call occurs during an active Echo Cancellation period. Echo Cancellation applies to outbound audio transmissions originating from a Dispatch Console that utilizes an ASTRO conventional simplex voting channel. SETUP RADIO-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz RADIO-1 - CONVSITE-1 CONSOLE-1 - CONVCH-1 CONSOLE-1 - CONSITE-1 CONSOLE-2 - CONVCH-1. CONSOLE-2 - CONSITE-1 ADTECH Simulator: Inserted in the V.24 link between Yogi and ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator. VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Enable Console Echo Cancel using RSS on

the ASTRO-TAC 3000 comparator. Step 2. Set Console Echo Cancel Delay to 2

seconds on the ASTRO-TAC 3000 comparator.

Step 3. Set the delay on the ADTECH Simulator to 1

second. Step 4. Key CONSOLE-1 on CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL 1 800 MHz and send an outbound audio stream with duration of at least 4 seconds.

Step 5. Verify RADIO-1 hears the audio stream and

return echo is not heard at CONSOLE-1. Step 6. Dekey CONSOLE-1. Step 7. Key CONSOLE-2 within 2 seconds after

dekeying CONSOLE-1, and send an outbound audio stream with duration of at least 4 seconds.


return echo is not heard at CONSOLE-1 or CONSOLE-2.

Step 9. Dekey console position 2 CONSOLE-2. Step 10. Verify for up to 2 seconds after dekey event

occurs return echo is not heard at CONSOLE-1 or CONSOLE-2.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 92

MCC 7500 Echo Cancellation on Conventional

Echo Cancellation of Return Inbound Audio

1. DESCRIPTION Echo Cancellation provides muting of return inbound audio echo for up to 2 seconds (in 10 millisecond increments) from outbound audio transmission originating from a Dispatch Console. The echo cancellation only applies to an ASTRO conventional system which uses a simplex voting channel. SETUP RADIO-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz RADIO-1 - CONVSITE 1 CONSOLE-1 - CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL 1 800 MHz CONSOLE-1 - CONSITE_1 ADTECH Simulator: Inserted in the V.24 link between Yogi and ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator. VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Enable Console Echo Cancel using RSS on

the ASTRO-TAC 3000 comparator. Step 2. Set Console Echo Cancel Delay to 1.910s

on the ASTRO-TAC 3000 comparator. Step 3. Set the delay on the ADTECH Simulator to 1

second. Step 4. Key CONSOLE-1 and send an outbound

audio stream with duration of at least 4 seconds.


return echo is not heard at CONSOLE-1. Step 6. Dekey console position CONSOLE-1. Step 7. Verify for up to 1.910s after dekey event

occurs, return echo is not heard at CONSOLE-1.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 93

WIDE AREA TRUNKING FDMA/TDMA MIXED SITES

Talkgroup Call

1. DESCRIPTION The Talkgroup is the primary level of organization for communications on a trunked radio system. Radios with Talkgroup call capability will be able to communicate with other members of the same Talkgroup. This provides the effect of a private channel down to the Talkgroup level. This test will demonstrate that a Talkgroup transmission initiated by a radio user will only be heard by system users, which have, the same Talkgroup selected. As with other types of calls, Talkgroup calls can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - SITE 1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - SITE 2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - SITE 1 - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-4 - SITE 2 - TALKGROUP 2 VERSION #1.040

2. TEST Step 1. Initiate a Wide Area Call with RADIO-1 in


monitor and respond to the call. Step 3. Initiate a Wide Area Call with RADIO-3 in


monitor and respond the call.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 94

Wide Area Trunking FDMA/TDMA Mixed Sites

Continuous Assignment Updating

1. DESCRIPTION When a talkgroup is assigned a voice channel, the site controller continues to transmit the channel assignment on the control channel for the duration of the talkgroup call. Radios coming into use on the system are automatically sent to voice channels with conversations in progress involving their selected talkgroups. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 1 VERSION #1.010

2. TEST Step 1. Turn OFF RADIO-1. Step 2. Initiate a Talkgroup Call using RADIO-2 and

verify RADIO-3 hears the audio. Step 3. While the Talkgroup Call is in progress, turn

ON RADIO-1. Step 4. Observe RADIO-1, which was just brought

back into service, joins the Talkgroup Call already in progress.

Step 5. End the talkgroup call. Step 6. Switch RADIO-1 to another talkgroup. Step 7. Initiate a Talkgroup Call from RADIO-2 to

RADIO-3. Step 8. While the Talkgroup Call is in progress, set

RADIO-1 back to TALKGROUP 1. Step 9. Observe that RADIO-1 joins the Talkgroup

Call already in progress.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 95


Call Alert

1. DESCRIPTION Call Alert is a tone page that allows a user to selectively alert another radio unit. The initiating radio will receive notification from the trunked system as to whether or not the page was received by the target radio. Units receiving a Call Alert will sound an alert tone. As with other types of calls, Call Alerts can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 3 VERSION #1.010

2. TEST Step 1. Using RADIO-1, press the page button. Step 2. Enter the unit ID of RADIO-2 with the

keypad, or scroll to the location where this ID is stored

Step 3. Press the PTT to initiate the call alert. Verify

that the RADIO-1 user receives audible indication that the Call Alert was sent.

Step 4. Verify that RADIO-2 user receives an

audible indication of an incoming Call Alert was sent but RADIO-3 does not.

Step 5. Verify RADIO-1 gets an audible indication

that the Call Alert was successfully received at the target radio.

Step 6. Turn off RADIO-2. Send a Call Alert from

RADIO-1 to RADIO-2. Step 7. Verify that the RADIO-1 user receives

audible indication that the Call Alert was sent.

Step 8. Verify RADIO-1 receives a "No

Acknowledgement" indication that the Call Alert was not received at the target radio.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 96


Private Call

1. DESCRIPTION Private Call is a selective calling feature that allows a radio user to carry on one-to-one conversation that is only heard by the 2 parties involved. Subscriber units receiving a private call will sound an alert tone. As with other types of calls, Private Calls can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 1 VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Using RADIO-1, press the Private Call (Call)

button. Step 2. Enter the unit ID of RADIO-2 with the

keypad, or scroll to the location where this ID is stored.

Step 3. Press the PTT to initiate the Private Call. Step 4. Verify that RADIO-2 hears tones and the

display indicates that a Private Call has been received, but RADIO-3 receives no indications.

Step 5. Answer the call at RADIO-2 by pressing the

Private Call (Call)/Respond button. If RADIO-2 has a display, verify it shows the ID number or Alias of the calling unit.

Step 6. Press the PTT switch on RADIO-2 and

respond to the Private Call. Note that if you do not press the Private Call button before pressing PTT, your audio will be heard by all members of the talkgroup, and not just by the radio initiating the Private Call.

Step 7. Verify that RADIO-2 can communicate with

RADIO-1. Step 8. Verify that RADIO-3 does not monitor the

Private Call. Step 9. End the Private Call by pressing the "home"

key and return to normal talkgroup operation.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 97


Multigroup Call in Wait Mode

1. DESCRIPTION This trunking feature allows an equipped radio user to transmit an announcement to several different talkgroups simultaneously. The multigroup (ATG) call can be flagged for Wait Mode in the Provisioning Manager (PM) database forcing all attached talkgroups to finish calls in progress before the trunked system will process the multigroup call. The system does not permit inactive, attached talkgroups to initiate Talkgroup Calls during the "wait" timeframe. As with other types of calls, multigroup calls can take place from anywhere in the system. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-3 - RANDOM (Not part of MG) RADIO-4 - ATG 1 * TALKGROUP 1 and TALKGROUP 2 are members of ATG 1. * RANDOM is any talkgroup not a member of ATG 1. * Multigroups are set up through both the Provisioning Manager (PM) and the Subscriber Programming software. VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Verify ATG 1 is set for the Wait mode. Step 2. Using RADIO-1, initiate a call on

TALKGROUP 1. Step 3. While RADIO-1 is keyed, attempt to initiate a

multigroup call using RADIO-4 on ATG 1. Verify RADIO-4 receives a busy tone because one of the talkgroups attached to ATG 1 is involved in a Talkgroup Call.

Step 4. Key RADIO-2 and verify that a busy tone is

received because the ATG 1 call is in queue.

Step 5. Dekey RADIO-1 and verify RADIO-4

receives a callback. Step 6. Key RADIO-4 and verify both RADIO-1 and

RADIO-2 hear the multigroup call while RADIO-3 does not unmute.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 98


Audio Interrupt / Interrupt Never Mode

1. DESCRIPTION A radio PTT request may be received for a group already active and currently being sourced by another radio unit. The talkgroup can be flagged to either allow or disallow the new PTT. If allowed, the latest PTT request will be granted and become the source of the call. SETUP RADIO-1 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-2 - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-3 - TALKGROUP 1 VERSION #1.020

2. TEST Step 1. Verify TALKGROUP 1's template is set up

as Audio Interrupt Never. Step 2. Using RADIO-1, initiate a call on

TALKGROUP 1. Step 3. Verify both RADIO-2 and RADIO-3 monitor

the audio. Step 4. Using RADIO-3, initiate a call on

TALKGROUP 1. Step 5. Verify that RADIO-3 receives a reject and

that RADIO-2 continues to listen to RADIO-1.

Step 6. Dekey both Radios.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 99


Dynamic FDMA/TDMA Emergency Alarm and Call with Top of Queue - FDMA call in queue

1. DESCRIPTION Users in life threatening situations can use the Emergency button on the radio to immediately send a signal to the dispatcher and be assigned the next available voice channel if the FDMA/TDMA mode of the call can be supported by the available resource. Otherwise, the first call in the queue that can use the available resource gets assigned. An Emergency Call can be set to either Top of Queue or Ruthless Preemption operation. To accomplish this, an Emergency Alarm and Call will be initiated from a subscriber which will be received by a subscriber affiliated at any site of any zone in the system. In this case, the first available resource CANNOT support the emergency call mode. NOTE: If the subscriber does not have the Display option, the Emergency ID will not be displayed. All radios and talkgroups should start with default priorities. Default is 10. SITE 1 must be TDMA capable. SETUP RADIO-1 (TDMA) - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-1 - SITE - SITE 1 RADIO-2 (TDMA) - TALKGROUP 2 RADIO-2 - SITE - SITE 1 RADIO-3 (TDMA) - TALKGROUP 3 RADIO-3 - SITE - SITE 1 RADIO-4 (TDMA) - TALKGROUP 4 RADIO-4 SITE - SITE 1 RADIO-8 (FDMA-only) - TALKGROUP 1 RADIO-8 - SITE - SITE 1 Note: TALKGROUP 1, TALKGROUP 2, TALKGROUP 3 and TALKGROUP 4 are programmed for "Dynamic". VERSION #1.010

2. TEST Step 1. Verify the emergency type for TALKGROUP

1's template must be set up as Top of Queue.

Step 2. Simulate a busy system by disabling all

channels at SITE 1 with the exception of the control channel and one voice channel.

Step 3. Initiate a call with both RADIO-2 and

RADIO-4 and hold the PTT switches until instructed to release.

Step 4. Key RADIO-3 and verify the radio receives a

busy tone. Release the PTT switch on RADIO-3.

Step 5. Using RADIO-1 send an Emergency Call by

pressing the emergency switch and then the PTT switch. Observe that RADIO-1 cannot transmit due to the voice channel being busy.

Step 6. Release the PTT switch on RADIO-2.

Observe that RADIO-3 receives the call back before RADIO-1 and is able to proceed with the call because the available channel resource is already busy with one TDMA call and can only support another TDMA call.

Step 7. Dekey RADIO-4 and RADIO-3. Step 8. Observe that RADIO-1 receives the callback

and is able to proceed with the call. Step 9. Observe that the display on RADIO-8

denotes an emergency and the unit ID of RADIO-1.

Step 10. Dekey RADIO-1 and exit the Emergency

mode by holding down the Emergency button on RADIO-1 until an alert tone sounds. Verify RADIO-1 returns to normal operation.

Pass____ Fail____


July 16, 2018 Page 100

SIGNOFF CERTIFICATE By their signatures below, the following witnesses certify they have observed the system Acceptance Test Procedures.

Signatures

WITNESS: Please Print Name: ________________________________________ Initials: Please Print Title: ________________________________________



___________________________________Date: _______

___________________________________Date: _______

___________________________________Date: _______

________

________

________


July 16, 2018 Page 101

SECTION 4

1ST YEAR WARRANTY SUPPORT PLANMotorola has over 85 years of experience supporting Mission–Critical communications for public safety and publicservice agencies. Motorola’s technical and service professionals use a structured approach to life cycle servicedelivery and provide comprehensive maintenance and support throughout the life of the system. The value of supportis measured by system availability, which is optimized through the use of proactive processes, such as preventivemaintenance, fault monitoring and active response management. System availability is a function of having in place asupport plan delivered by highly skilled support professionals, backed by proven processes, tools, and continuoustraining.

In addition to Motorola’s standard commercial warranty, the following services will be provided to Customer duringthe 1st year warranty period.

Technical Support

Technical support provides centralized remote telephone support for technical issues through the experiencedsystem technologists at Motorola's Solutions Support Center (SSC). Once Customer's personnel call for support, asupport case will be opened and logged. The SSC technologists will use their experience, a consolidated solutionsdatabase, in-house test labs, and development engineers to ensure the rapid resolution of the issue. Incidentmanagement and escalation procedures are in place to ensure that contracted response and restore times are met.Since each incident is monitored and recorded, the resulting metrics can be analyzed to ensure ongoing systemperformance.

Infrastructure Repair with Advanced Replacement

Infrastructure Repair with Advanced Replacement provides for expedited replacement of the equipment in theproposed solution, whether it is manufactured by Motorola or by another vendor. When a component fails, DodgeCounty will be able to request a replacement and have it shipped immediately for use in the system, prior to sendingthe faulty component to Motorola for repair. When requesting a replacement component, Dodge County can chooseto either keep the replacement component or send it back to Motorola once the original failed component is repairedand returned. Motorola will pay two-way shipping on all components shipped through this service.

Onsite Infrastructure Response

Onsite Infrastructure Response provides local qualified technicians who arrive at your location to diagnose andrestore the system. Following proven response and restore processes, Motorola's Call Center contacts the localauthorized service center in Customer's area and dispatches a qualified technician. Our case management andescalation process ensures that arrival of the technician on-site and system restoration comply with contractedresponse times. If the technician is unable to resolve the issue on site, the case is escalated to the Solutions SupportCenter (SSC) or product engineering teams for support as needed.

Preventive Maintenance

During Preventive Maintenance, Motorola-certified field technicians will inspect Customer's equipment on a routinebasis to ensure that the equipment continues to meet original manufacturer's specifications. If a situation warrants it,technicians will be dispatch to perform hands-on examinations and diagnostics. This service will help to detectpotential problems before they develop, maximizing equipment performance, reducing the possibility of failures, andprolonging equipment life.

Dispatch and Incident Management


July 16, 2018 Page 102

Dispatch ensures that local, trained and qualified technicians will arrive at the customer's location to diagnose andrestore their communications network. When a notification occurs from an automatic alarm or through a scheduledmaintenance notification, Motorola's Call Center assigns a number to the incident and triages the issue with theappropriate support team. The Call Center oversees all aspects of the event and incident management processduring repair and restoration, tracking open issues to ensure that they are managed to resolution within the requiredtime frame. This continuous oversight provides a record of events associated with each case that can be presentedin the form of incident activity reports. This incident management system can also be accessed remotely viaMotorola Online portal.

Network Monitoring

The Solutions Support Center (SSC) will remotely monitor equipment on a real-time basis for performance, stability,and security, so that personnel don't have to. If remote monitoring detects an event, SSC's technologists willacknowledge the alarm, run remote diagnostic routines, and forwards the incident to the Dispatch Call Center. Thesystem will be continuously monitored in `high priority' status throughout the troubleshooting and repair process.Many system issues can be resolved remotely through advanced diagnostic services, eliminating the need todispatch a local technician. If field resources are required to troubleshoot an issue, they will be alerted to specificelements of the problem and informed of the spares/FRUs necessary for replacement. This level of remote diagnosticcapability will enable Motorola to restore the system to normal operating condition quickly and efficiently.

4. SECURITY UPDATE SERVICES (SUS) AND SUAII Security Update Service (SUS)

Security updates appropriate for the commercial environment are often designed without mission-critical systems in-mind. Motorola will ensure that commercial anti-virus definitions and operating system software patches arecompatible with the proposed dispatch consoles. Our expert network security technologists analyze, test, andvalidate the latest security software updates in a dedicated test lab and will provide Dodge County with regularelectronic updates of compatible updates.

System Upgrade Agreement II (SUAII)

Modern LMR systems are specialized Information Technology (IT) networks that are a hybrid composition ofcommercial off-the-shelf IT components, specialized Radio Frequency (RF) components and software designed tocomply with standards-based specifications. To ensure the highest level of operation, allow for system expansion,provide maximum lifespan and protect the initial investment, regular update and replacement of individual softwareand hardware components is required.

The Motorola System Upgrade Agreement II is comprehensive approach to technology refreshment of the ASTRO 25system aligned with the Motorola lifecycle roadmap. As major system releases become available, the SUA II willprovide up to one system upgrade per each two year contract term. The SUA II is a complete package of hardware,software and implementation services required to update the ASTRO 25 system to an eligible system release with anequivalent level of functionality.

Updates to OEM components ensure availability of repair services support and may also provide increased capacityand processing speed. Regular updates enable system expansion (i.e. expansion of RF sites, dispatch positions, datasub-systems, network management positions, etc.). Professional implementation services guarantee live systemupgrades are performed with minimal interruption to system operation with minimal reliance on owner resources.SUA II ensures the ASTRO 25 system functions at the highest level of operation, allows for expansion and featureenhancement and maximizes the lifespan of the investment. For owners that are committed to upgrading their systemon a regular basis, SUA II provides a consistent budgeting solution that provides complete coverage.


July 16, 2018 Page 103

Included Features

SUAII

Anti-virus Definition Update

Minor Release (patch release) included

Information Assurance Remediation included

Major Release (system release) included

Hardware Refresh included

Implementation Services included

Regional Partner Invoicing available

Major upgrades in 2 year period Up to 1

SUA II

• Minor releases may include commercial OS and application security updates, patches and service packupdates for Microsoft Windows and Server OS, red Hat Linux, Sun Solaris and any Motorola softwareservice packs that may be available.

• Major releases may include commercial OS and application software updates as well as Motorola systemrelease software to improve the system functionality and operation from previous releases as well assignificant new feature enhancements that are available for purchase.

• Hardware refresh may include version updates and/or replacements for Motorola FRU and third partynetworking and computing hardware.

• Implementation services include all in-house and on-site resources to implement and test major releaseupdate.

• Regional partner invoicing provides ability to separate invoicing across multiple agencies.

As major releases become available, the SUA II configuration covers up to one major release upgrade per every two-year contract term.

4.1 ADVANCED SERVICES OVERVIEWIn order to ensure the continuity of Customer's network and reduce system downtime Motorola Solutions proposesour Advanced Services offering to the Dodge County, Nebraska. Appropriate for customers who wish to leverageMotorola Solutions’ experienced personnel to maintain mission-critical communications for their first responders,Advanced Services focuses on monitoring the network on an ongoing basis, proactively mitigating potentialfunctionality and security issues, and providing both remote and onsite support. The proposed offering consists ofthe following specific services:

• Service Desk.• Technical Support.• Network Event Monitoring.• Onsite Support.• Annual Preventative Maintenance.• Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement.• Remote Security Patch Installation.


July 16, 2018 Page 104

• false.

These services will be delivered to Dodge County through the combination of local service personnel eitherdedicated to the network or engaged as needed; a centralized team within our Solutions Support Center (SSC), whichoperates on a 24 x 7 x 365 basis; and our Repair Depot, which will ensure that equipment is repaired to the highestquality standards. The collaboration between these service resources, all of who are experienced in themaintenance of mission-critical networks, will enable a swift analysis of any network issues, an accurate diagnosisof root causes, and a timely resolution and return to normal network operation.

4.2 SERVICES DESCRIPTION4.2.1 Centralized Service DeliveryCentralized support will be provided by Motorola Solutions support staff, located at our Service Desk and SolutionsSupport Center (SSC). These experienced personnel will provide direct service and technical support through acombination of Service Desk telephone support, technical consultation and troubleshooting through the SSC, andongoing network monitoring of Customer's system.

Motorola Solutions will provide Service Desk response as a single point of contact for all support issues, includingcommunications between Dodge County, third-party subcontractors and manufacturers, and Motorola Solutions.When Customer's personnel call for support, the Service Desk will record, track, and update all Service Requests,Change Requests, Dispatch Requests, and Service Incidents using our Customer Relationship Management (CRM)system. The Service Desk is responsible for documenting Customer's inquiries, requests, concerns, and relatedtickets; tracking and resolving issues; and ensuring timely communications with all stakeholders based on the natureof the incident.

As tickets are opened by the Service Desk, issues that require specific technical expertise and support will be routedto our Solutions Support Center (SSC) system technologists for Technical Support, who will provide telephoneconsultation and troubleshooting capabilities to diagnose and resolve infrastructure performance and operationalissues. Motorola Solutions’ recording, escalating, and reporting process applies ISO 90001 and TL 9000-certifiedstandards to the Technical Support calls from our contracted customers, reflecting our focus on maintaining mission-critical communications for the users of our systems.

The same SSC staff that provide direct telephone support to Dodge County will also provide Network EventMonitoring to Customer's network in real-time, ensuring continuous management of the system’s operationalfunctionality. The SSC’s technicians will utilize sophisticated tools to remotely monitor Customer's system, oftenidentifying and resolving anomalous events before they might affect user communications.

4.2.2 Field Service DeliveryOn-site repairs and network preventative maintenance will be provided by authorized local field services deliverypersonnel, who will be dispatched from and managed by the Solutions Support Center.

On-Site Support provides local, trained and qualified technicians who will arrive at Customer's location upon adispatch service call to diagnose and restore the communications network. This involves running diagnostics on thehardware or Field Replacement Unit (FRU) in order to identify defective elements, and replacing those elements withfunctioning ones. The system technician will respond to the Customer's location in order to remedy equipment issuesbased on the impact of the issue to overall system function.

Annual Preventive Maintenance Service provides proactive, regularly scheduled operational testing and alignmentof infrastructure and network components to ensure that they continually meet original manufacturer specifications.Certified field technicians perform hands-on examination and diagnostics of network equipment on a routine andprescribed basis.


July 16, 2018 Page 105

4.2.3 Network Hardware RepairMotorola Solutions' authorized Repair Depot will repair the equipment provided by Motorola Solutions, as well asselect third-party infrastructure equipment supplied as part of the proposed solution. The Repair Depot will managethe logistics of equipment repair (including shipment and return of repaired equipment), repair Motorola Solutionsequipment, and coordinate the repair of third-party solution components.

Motorola Solutions also proposes Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement to the Dodge County,Nebraska. With this additional service, Motorola Solutions will exchange malfunctioning components and equipmentwith advanced replacement units or Field Replacement Units (FRUs) as they are available in the Repair Depot’sinventory. Malfunctioning equipment will be evaluated and repaired by the infrastructure repair depot and returnedto the Repair Depot’s FRU inventory upon repair completion. If Dodge County prefers to maintain their existing FRUinventory. Dodge County will be able to request a “loaner” FRU while their unit is being repaired.

4.2.4 Security Management OperationsThe proposed Remote Security Patch Installation Service will provide Dodge County with pre-tested securityupdates, pre-tested and remotely installed by Motorola Solutions on Customer's system. When appropriate, MotorolaSolutions will make these updates available to outside vendors in order to enable them to test each patch, and willincorporate the results of those third-party tests into the updates before installation on Customer's network.

Once an update is fully tested and ready for deployment in Customer's system, Motorola Solutions will remotelyinstall it onto Customer's system, and notify Dodge County that the patch has been successfully installed. If there areany recommended configuration changes, warnings, or workarounds, Motorola Solutions will provide detaileddocumentation along with the updates on the website.

4.3 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS SERVICE CAPABILITIESOur focus on the needs of our public safety partners has led us to recognize that an integrated implementation andservice delivery team that takes a new system from system installation, to acceptance, to warranty, and all the waythrough extended maintenance, is the best way to ensure that public safety communications systems meet the needsof first responders. Motorola Solutions’ team of experts, have developed refined processes and sophisticated toolsthrough our experience in delivering mission-critical communications.

4.3.1 On-Call Support through the Solutions Support Center (SSC)The cornerstone of our customer care process, our Solution Support Center (SSC) is staffed 24x7x365 by experiencedsystem technologists. This TL 9000/ISO 9001-certified center responds to over 5000 public safety, utility, andenterprise customers. With over 100,000 phone and email interactions with Motorola Solutions customers per month,the SSC provides our customers with a centralized contact point for service requests.

4.3.2 On-Site Service through a Field Service TeamOn-site maintenance and repair of Customer's system will be provided by Motorola Solutions’ local team of servicepersonnel. Motorola Solutions will provide Dodge County with a Customer Support Plan (CSP) that outlines thedetails of each service, provides escalation paths for special issues, and any other information specific toCustomer's service agreement. Some of these details will include items such as access to sites, response timerequirements, severity level definitions, and parts department access information.

Local technicians will be dispatched for on-site service by the SSC, who will inform the technician of the reason fordispatch. This will enable the technician to determine if a certain component or Field Replacement Unit (FRU) will beneeded from inventory to restore the system. Once on site, the field technician will notify the SSC and begin to workon the issue. The technician will review the case notes to determine the status of the issue, and begin thetroubleshooting and restoration process. Once the system is restored to normal operation, the field technician will


July 16, 2018 Page 106

notify the SSC that the system is restored. The SSC, in turn, will notify Dodge County that the system is restored tonormal operation and request approval to close the case.

4.3.3 Centralized Repair Management through Motorola Solutions' Repair DepotOur repair management depot coordinates component repair through a central location, eliminating the need to sendsystem equipment to multiple vendor locations for repair. Once equipment is at the depot, technicians will replicateCustomer's network configuration in our comprehensive test labs in order to reproduce and analyze the issue.Technicians will then restore the equipment to working order. After repairs are completed, equipment will be testedto its original performance specifications and, if appropriate, configured for return to use in Customer's system. Allcomponents being repaired are tracked throughout the process, from shipment by Dodge County to return through acase management system where users can view the repair status of the equipment via a web portal.

4.3.4 Direct Access to System Information through MyView PortalSupplementing Motorola Solutions’ proposed services plan for Dodge County, is access to MyView Portal, theMotorola Solutions' online system information tool (see the figure titled "MyView Portal"). (see the figure titled"MyView Portal"). MyView Portal provides our customers with real-time visibility to critical system and servicesinformation, all through an easy-to-use, graphical interface.

With just a few clicks, Customer's administrators will gain instant access to system and support compliance, casereporting, ability to update and create cases, have visibility to when the system will be updated, and receive pro-active notifications regarding system updates. Available 24x7x365 from any web-enabled device, the informationprovided by MyView will be based on your needs and user access permissions, ensuring that the informationdisplayed is secure and pertinent to your operations.

Figure 2: MyView Portal – Offers real-time, role-based access to critical system and services information.


July 16, 2018 Page 107

4.4 ELTEK DC POWER AND NOKIA MICROWAVE MAINTENANCESUPPORT SERVICESEltek DC Power Annual Preventative Maintenance

Eltek Technicians will perform an Annual Preventative Maintenance Service visit to 1. Verify operation and accuracyof panel indicators. 2. Data acquisition: record site info – DC power system – Manufacturer, Model Number, SerialNumber, Date Codes and previous maintenance reports. Record results. 3. Installation evaluation: Check site forcorrect installation, feed and load breaker sizing, wire sizing, battery sizing and mechanical connections. Record anydiscrepancies. 4. Rectifier/Charger check: Check and adjust float/equalize settings, current limit settings, and alarmset points. Record results. 5. DC power system components: Check and adjust LVD, status panels, CB and fusepanels, battery disconnects on DC Power System and any applicable items. Record results. 6. Thermal Imaging of DCPower & Batteries. 7. Online battery storage of conductance reports. 8. Annual IEEE 4 Hour rated load testing.

Noki Microwave Backhaul Maintenance

Nokia maintenance support for the microwave backhaul network includes 242x7x365 technical support, on-sitesupport, repair and advanced exchange of defective components, and software subscription plan (SSP). The SSPprovides all feature releases of software for network/node elements, management systems for specific networkelements of families of network elements, and other network related applications.


July 16, 2018 Page 108

SECTION 5

PRICING SUMMARYThe following table provides a pricing breakdown for the proposed equipment and services.


July 16, 2018 Page 109

Description Leased Package, 2 Year No-Interest

RF SITE EQUIPMENTEquipment, 1st year Warranty per SOW $2,325,537.60

System Installation and integration $702,279.16 MICROWAVE and INTERCONNECT

Equipment, 1st year Warranty per SOW $857,175.60 System Installation and integration $877,074.53

LOGGER Equipment (includes API License Fee), 1st year Warranty per SOW $84,743.57

System Installation and integration $43,073.00 UHF SIMULCAST PAGING

Equipment, 1st year Warranty per SOW $179,477.98 System Installation and integration $17,061.05

RADIO MANAGEMENT LICENCESRadio Management Licenses (Quantity 300) $27,000.00

NEW TOWER BUILD GUYED TOWERSDodge Snyder (330 ft tower, shelter, indoor generator, HVAC, site prep) $760,965.00

Nickerson Hooper (330 ft tower, shelter, indoor generator, HVAC, site prep) $760,965.00 North Bend (330 ft tower, shelter, indoor generator, HVAC, site prep) $760,965.00

Uehling (330 ft tower, shelter, indoor generator, HVAC, site prep) $760,965.00 NEW TOWER SUB TOTAL $3,043,860.00

Infrastructure Subtotal Total $8,157,282.49 Subscriber

Winslow FD:APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Basestation / APX 4000

Portables / Accessories $84,209.00 Installation and programming $12,539.96

Snyder FD:APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Basestation / APX 4000


Fremont Rural:APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Basestation / APX 4000


Hooper FD:APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Basestation / APX 4000


Dodge City FD:

APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Mobiles / APX 4500 Basestation / APX 4000 Portables / Accessories $89,837.90

Installation and programming $14,072.08 Uehling FD:


Installation and programming $13,456.02 North Bend FD:


Installation and programming $20,468.44 Nickerson FD:


Installation and programming $13,156.02 Scribner FD:


July 16, 2018 Page 110


Installation and programming $16,950.96 Dodge County Sheriff:


Installation and programming $32,081.06 Hooper PD:

APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 6500 Basestation / APX 6000 Portables / Accessories $48,858.20 Installation and programming $4,992.07

Scribner PD:APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 6500 Basestation / APX 6000 Portables / Accessories $43,494.70

Installation and programming $3,066.94 Dodge City PD:

APX 6500 Mobiles / APX 6500 Basestation / APX 6000 Portables / Accessories $27,334.00 Installation and programming $2,303.38

SparesAPX 6500 Mobile / APX 4500 Mobile / APX 6000 Portable / APX 4000 Portable $17,888.28

Radio Subtotal Total $1,520,084.07

2018 Q3 Project Incentives

System Discount 7% DODGE COUNTY ($358,165.00)

WINSLOW FD ($6,772.43)SNYDER FD ($6,655.34)

FREMONT RURAL ($8,009.15)HOOPER FD ($8,009.15)

DODGE FD ($7,273.70)UEHLING FD ($7,081.61)

NORTH BEND FD ($9,480.05)NICKERSON FD ($6,964.52)

SCRIBNER FD ($8,306.50)DODGE COUNTY SHERIFF ($27,497.82)

HOOPER PD ($3,769.52)SCRIBNER PD ($3,259.31)

DODGE PD ($2,074.62)SPARES ($1,252.18)

System Discount Civil AdderRequires above with Civil included in contract ($334,000.00)

($798,570.90)

RFSites, Microwave, Logger, UHF Simulecast paging, New Towers, Radio's as proposed (Civil Included in Column 2) $6,633,506.56

See Proposal Section 4 for Description of SUAII, SUS, and Advanced ServicePROJECT INCENTIVES ($464,570.90)

EQUIPMENT SUBTOTAL $6,168,935.66

CIVIL (NEW TOWER BUILD) $3,043,860.00CIVIL INCENTIVE ($334,000.00)CIVIL SUBTOTAL $2,709,860.00

Total Amount Lease Value $8,878,795.66Total Amount with out-years Lease Value

SUAII and SUS as required when joining ORION System $704,193.63Advanced Services and Maintenance Package 1,490,842.53$

Total $11,073,831.82

Any Changes to Total Contract Value will affect System Incentive

See proposal page #41 for complete subscriber breakout per Agency

Total Incentives

Project Totals

Requires a July 27, 2018 contract, staging with shipment; 10 Years SUA and Maintenance


July 16, 2018 Page 111

SUAII

Onsite Infrastructure Response (7x24) (Requires Dispatch Service) Professional dispatch agents take your call, open a case to track, triage it to the appropriate response team, and monitor technician site arrival, response, and restore time to ensure compliance to committed response times.• Trained and qualified technicians, backed by centralized Motorola resources, will arrive onsite within committed response times to ensure maximum system uptime • Onsite Infrastructure Response means you don’t have to dedicate technical resources or invest in the tools, training and inventory required to respond to system issues • Flexibility to choose from four-hour response times on an 8x5 or 24x7 coverage basis, depending on your organizational needs

Years 2-10, Paid annually per included scheduleDISPATCH

Years 2-10, Paid annually per included schedule

Technical Support (7x24)The Motorola Systems Support Center’s (SSC) Technical Support Operation is staffed with experienced technologists who specialize in the diagnosis and resolution of system performance issues. The Technical Support service provides centralized remote telephone support for technical issues that require a high level of communications systems expertise and troubleshooting. Technical experts are available 24 x 7 to characterize issues to ensure top priority problems receive immediate attention and resolution.• Case management and escalation procedures are in place to help ensure that contracted response and restore times are met, each and every time, along with tracking of what has been done so everyone has a consistent view to the issue at hand• A fully equipped system lab is used to duplicate more complex issues.• Technologists have access to Motorola Development Engineering resources for complicated technical issues.

Years 2-10, Paid annually per included scheduleON SITE

ADVANCED SERVICES and MAINTENANCE PACKAGETECH SUPPORT

REQUIRED SUA and Maintenance


The Motorola System Upgrade Agreement II (SUAII) is comprehensive approach to technology refreshment of the ASTRO 25 system, aligned with the Motorola lifecycle roadmap. As major system releases become available, the SUAII will provide up to one system upgrade every two years (Motorola combines features of two releases in a single upgrade jump). Customers that take advantage of the ASTRO 25 System Upgrade Agreement II will be provided with the hardware and software updates necessary to maintain their system at the highest level of support and availability. Labor and technical resources to implement eligible system upgrades, such as Upgrade Operations (UO), Field Engineering, Program Management, Systems Technologist and local service shop, are included within the coverage of this agreement. Keeping current via the SUAII also provides access to the latest standard and optional features available in each system release. (Note: This may require an additional fee for optional feature licensing and hardware.)


July 16, 2018 Page 112

NETWORK MONITORINGYears 2-10, Paid annually per included schedule

The Dodge County P25 radio system will be remotely monitored 24x7x365 by the Motorola Network Operations Team. This team of certified Technologists will acknoeledge alarms, run remote diagnostic routies, and initial an approporiate response for immediate resolution. This could be resolving the problem remotely or having a local Technician dispatched to the location of the reported alarm and continue working on the issue until resolved. Specifically, this Team provides: • Improved network availability.• Remote and timely resolutioin to minimize downtime.• Optimize time at site due to assessment and knowledge transfer before dispatching local Technician.• Minimize unnecessary trips to site(s).

NOKIA MICROWAVE BACKHAUL SUPPORTYears 2-10, Paid annually per included schedule

Years 2-10, Paid annually per included schedulePriority service reduces downtime on your system while waiting for a repaired part to return. Infrastructure Repair with Advanced Replacement allows you to request a replacement and have it shipped immediately for use in your system before sending the faulty component to Motorola for repair. Motorola will pay two-way shipping on Advanced Exchange service, eliminating expensive shipping costs.• Motorola will send a field-replaceable unit within 24 hours, if available, to replace the unit being repaired, minimizing interruptions and keeping your network running at peak performance• When requesting a replacement unit a customer can specify whether they would like to:o Keep the replacement unit and return the faulty unit to Motorola, oro Temporarily use the replacement unit until Motorola repairs and returns the original unit, upon which the customer would send back the replacement unit.

PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCEYears 2-10, Paid annually per included schedule

Motorola-certified field technicians inspect the network on a routine basis to help ensure that equipment continues to meet original manufacturer’s specifications. If necessary, technicians are dispatched to the customers’ site to perform hands-on examination and diagnostics.• Optimize network performance; Identify potential faults to enable quick response before they can cause communication disruptions• Prolong the life and maximize the performance of the communications system• When your network is more reliable, trouble calls decrease and total cost of ownership is considerably reduced• Proactively detects potential issues, which keeps equipment optimized and helps you to manage your maintenance budget

Dispatch ensures that local, trained and qualified technicians (provided by the customer or by Motorola) will arrive at the customer’s location to diagnose and restore the communications network. • Provides a single toll-free telephone number that answers 24 hours a day, seven days a week, 365 days a year, for service requests and warranty claims.• A single call to dispatch will ensure that trained, qualified technicians arrive onsite within committed response times to ensure maximum system uptime. Once the Motorola System Support Center (SSC) receives a request for service, a case will be opened and used to track the entire event from start to restoral or the closing of the case.• A proven escalation procedure ensures that, if your local authorized technician cannot respond, the issue will progress through a pre-defined progressive accountability process to meet your contracted response times• Motorola’s centralized resources will ensure maximum system uptime without the customer needing to invest in a dedicated 24x7x365 support team.• Tracking the event through the Case Management system provides a record of events associated with the case, which can then be presented to the customer in the form of case activity reports. The case management system can also be accessed remotely via the Internet on the Motorola Online web portal• Dispatch service can also be used to dispatch the customer’s technical staff • Dispatch service required if On Site is purchased

Infrastructure Repair with Advanced Replacement


July 16, 2018 Page 113

Includes Annual Preventative Maintenance Service visit to 1. Verify operation and accuracy of panel indicators. 2. Data acquisition: record site info – DC power system – Manufacturer, Model Number, Serial Number, Date Codes and previous maintenance reports. Record results. 3. Installation evaluation: Check site for correct installation, feed and load breaker sizing, wire sizing, battery sizing and mechanical connections. Record any discrepancies. 4. Rectifier/Charger check: Check and adjust float/equalize settings, current limit settings, and alarm set points. Record results. 5. DC power system components: Check and adjust LVD, status panels, CB and fuse panels, battery disconnects on DC Power System and any applicable items. Record results. 6. Thermal Imaging of DC Power & Batteries. 7. Online battery storage of conductance reports. 8. Annual IEEE 4 Hour rated load testing

ANNUAL PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE FOR ELTEK DC POWER SYSTEMS

Nokia maintenance support for the microwave backhaul network includes 24x7x365 technical support, on-site support, repair and advanced exchange of defective components, and software subscription plan (SSP). The SSP provides all feature releases of software for network/node elements, management systems for specific network elements of families of network elements, and other network related applications.



July 16, 2018 Page 114

SUAII & SUS Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6 Year 7 Year 8 Year 9 Year 10 TotalDodge County P25 System 61,427.17$ 63,269.99$ 65,168.08$ 67,123.13$ 69,136.82$ 71,210.93$ 73,347.25$ 75,547.67$ 77,814.10$ 80,148.49$ 704,193.63$

Advanced Services Package Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6 Year 7 Year 8 Year 9 Year 10 TotalDodge County P25 System 93,043.40$ 95,834.70$ 98,709.74$ 101,671.04$ 104,721.17$ 107,862.80$ 111,098.69$ 114,431.65$ 117,864.60$ 121,400.53$ 1,066,638.31$

Maintenance Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6 Year 7 Year 8 Year 9 Year 10 TotalEltek DC Power System PM 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 5,316.36$ 53,163.64$ Nokia MW Maintenance 23,863.26$ 37,867.46$ 37,867.46$ 37,867.46$ 37,867.46$ 38,275.44$ 38,695.68$ 39,128.51$ 39,574.32$ 40,033.53$ 371,040.59$

Dodge County SUAII and Services Annual Pricing Summary 4/18/2018


July 16, 2018 Page 115


July 16, 2018 Page 116

SECTION 6

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND SERVICES AGREEMENT(LEASE)

Provided on the following pages


July 16, 2018 Page 117

Lease Communication System and Services Agreement v. 5-18-2017 1

Communications System And Services Agreement (Lease)

Motorola Solutions, Inc. (“Motorola”) and _______________________________________ (“Customer”) enter into this “Agreement,” pursuant to which Customer will purchase and Motorola will sell the System and Services, as described below. Motorola and Customer may be referred to individually as a “Party” and collectively as the “Parties.” For good and valuable consideration, the Parties agree as follows:

Section 1 ATTACHMENTS

1.1. EXHIBITS. The Exhibits listed below are exhibits related to the System sale and implementation. These Exhibits are incorporated into and made a part of this Agreement. Exhibit A “Motorola Software License Agreement” Exhibit B “Payment”Exhibit C Technical and Implementation Documents

C-1 “System Description” dated _______________ C-2 “Pricing Summary & Equipment List” dated _______________ C-3 “Implementation Statement of Work” dated _______________ C-4 “Acceptance Test Plan” or “ATP” dated _______________ C-5 “Performance Schedule” dated _______________

Exhibit D “System Acceptance Certificate” Exhibit E “Equipment Lease Purchase Agreement Delivery and Acceptance Certificate”

1.2. ADDENDUM (ADDENDA). Customer may elect to purchase professional or subscription services in addition to the System and related services. Any such services will be governed by the terms in the main body of the Agreement and an applicable Addendum containing terms specific to such service. Such Addendums will be labeled with the name of the service being purchased.

1.3 In interpreting this Agreement and resolving any ambiguities: 1) the main body of this Agreement takes precedence over the exhibits and any inconsistency between Exhibits A through E will be resolved in their listed order, and 2) The applicable service Addendum will take precedence over the main body of the Agreement and the Exhibits.

Section 2 DEFINITIONS

Capitalized terms used in this Agreement have the following meanings:

“Acceptance Tests” means those tests described in the Acceptance Test Plan.

“Addendum (Addenda)” is the title of the document(s) containing a specific set of terms and conditions applicable to a particular service or other offering beyond the communication System and System implementation services. The terms in the Addendum are applicable only to the specific service or offering described therein.

“Administrative User Credentials” means an account that has total access over the operating system, files, end user accounts and passwords at either the System level or box level. Customer’s personnel with access to the Administrative User Credentials may be referred to as the Administrative User.

“Beneficial Use” means when Customer first uses the System or a Subsystem for operational purposes (excluding training or testing).

“Confidential Information” means all information consistent with the fulfillment of this Agreement that is (i) disclosed under this Agreement in oral, written, graphic, machine recognizable, and/or sample form,being clearly designated, labeled or marked as confidential or its equivalent or (ii) obtained by

Lease Communication System and Services Agreement v. 5-18-2017

2

examination, testing or analysis of any hardware, software or any component part thereof provided by discloser to recipient. The nature and existence of this Agreement are considered Confidential Information. Confidential Information that is disclosed orally must be identified as confidential at the time of disclosure and confirmed by the discloser by submitting a written document to the recipient within thirty (30) days after such disclosure. The written document must contain a summary of the Confidential Information disclosed with enough specificity for identification purpose and must be labeled or marked as confidential or its equivalent. “Contract Price” means the price for the System and implementation Services, excluding applicable sales or similar taxes and freight charges. Further, unless otherwise stated in Exhibit B, “Payment Schedule” or the pricing pages of the proposal, recurring fees for maintenance, SUA, or subscription services are not included in the Contract Price. “Deliverables” means all written information (such as reports, specifications, designs, plans, drawings, analytics, Solution Data, or other technical or business information) that Motorola prepares for Customer in the performance of the Services and is obligated to provide to Customer under this Agreement. The Deliverables, if any, are more fully described in the Statement of Work. “Derivative Proprietary Materials” means derivatives of the Proprietary Materials that Motorola may from time to time, including during the course of providing the Services, develop and/or use and/or to which Motorola provides Customer access. “Effective Date” means that date upon which the last Party executes this Agreement. “Equipment” means the hardware components of the Solution that Customer purchases from Motorola under this Agreement. Equipment that is part of the System is described in the Equipment List. “Equipment Lease-Purchase Agreement” means the agreement by which Customer finances all or a portion of the Contract Price. “Feedback” means comments or information, in oral or written form, given to Motorola by Customer in connection with or relating to Equipment or Services, during the term of this Agreement. “Force Majeure” means an event, circumstance, or act that is beyond a Party’s reasonable control, such as an act of God, an act of the public enemy, an act of a government entity, strikes, other labor disturbances, supplier performance, hurricanes, earthquakes, fires, floods, epidemics, embargoes, war, riots, or any other similar cause. “Motorola Software” means software that Motorola or its affiliated companies owns. “Non-Motorola Software” means software that a party other than Motorola or its affiliated companies owns. “Open Source Software” (also called “freeware” or “shareware”) means software with either freely obtainable source code, license for modification, or permission for free distribution. “Proprietary Materials” means certain software tools and/or other technical materials, including, but not limited to, data, modules, components, designs, utilities, subsets, objects, program listings, models, methodologies, programs, systems, analysis frameworks, leading practices and specifications which Motorola has developed prior to, or independently from, the provision of the Services and/or which Motorola licenses from third parties. “Proprietary Rights” means the patents, patent applications, inventions, copyrights, trade secrets, trademarks, trade names, mask works, know-how, and other intellectual property rights in and to the Equipment and Software, including those created or produced by Motorola under this Agreement and any


3

corrections, bug fixes, enhancements, updates or modifications to or derivative works from the Software whether made by Motorola or another party. “Services” means system implementation, maintenance, support, subscription, or other professional services provided under this Agreement, which may be further described in the applicable Addendum and/or SOW. “Software” (i) means proprietary software in object code format, and adaptations, translations, de-compilations, disassemblies, emulations, or derivative works of such software; (ii) means any modifications, enhancements, new versions and new releases of the software provided by Motorola; and (iii) may contain one or more items of software owned by a third party supplier. The term "Software" does not include any third party software provided under separate license or third party software not licensable under the terms of this Agreement. “Software Support Policy” (“SwSP”) means the policy set forth at http://www.motorolasolutions.com/softwarepolicy describing the specific technical support that will be provided to Customers under the Warranty Period and during any paid maintenance support period for Motorola Software. This policy may be modified from time to time at Motorola’s discretion. “Solution” means the combination of the System(s) and Services provided by Motorola under this Agreement. “Solution Data” means Customer data that is transformed, altered, processed, aggregated, correlated or operated on by Motorola, its vendors or other data sources and data that has been manipulated or retrieved using Motorola know-how to produce value-added content to data consumers, including customers or citizens which is made available to Customer with the Solution and Services. “Specifications” means the functionality and performance requirements that are described in the Technical and Implementation Documents. “SUA” means Motorola’s Software Upgrade Agreement program. “Subsystem” means a major part of the System that performs specific functions or operations. Subsystems are described in the Technical and Implementation Documents. “System” means the Equipment, including incidental hardware and materials, Software, and design, installation and implementation services that are combined together into an integrated system; the System(s) is (are) described in the Technical and Implementation Documents. “System Acceptance” means the Acceptance Tests have been successfully completed. “System Data” means data created by, in connection with or in relation to Equipment or the performance of Services under this Agreement. “Warranty Period” for System Hardware, Software, or services related to system implementation means one (1) year from the date of System Acceptance or Beneficial Use, whichever occurs first. Unless otherwise stated in the applicable Addendum, Warranty Period for other Services means ninety (90) days from performance of the Service. Section 3 SCOPE OF AGREEMENT AND TERM 3.1. SCOPE OF WORK. Motorola will provide, install and test the System(s), and perform its other contractual responsibilities to provide the Solution, all in accordance with this Agreement. Customer will perform its contractual responsibilities in accordance with this Agreement.


4

3.2. CHANGE ORDERS. Either Party may request changes within the general scope of this Agreement. If a requested change causes an increase or decrease in the cost or time required to perform this Agreement, the Parties will agree to an equitable adjustment of the Contract Price or applicable subscription fees, Performance Schedule, or both, and will reflect the adjustment in a change order or Addendum. Neither Party is obligated to perform requested changes unless both Parties execute a written change order. 3.3. TERM. Unless terminated in accordance with other provisions of this Agreement or extended by mutual agreement of the Parties, the term of this Agreement begins on the Effective Date and continues until the date of Final Project Acceptance or expiration of the Warranty Period, whichever occurs last. The term and the effective date of recurring Services will be set forth in the applicable Addendum. 3.4. ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE. For three (3) years after the expiration date of the Agreement, Customer may order additional Equipment or Software, if it is then available. Each purchase order must refer to this Agreement, the expiration date of the Agreement, and must specify the pricing and delivery terms. The Parties agree that, notwithstanding expiration of the Agreement, the applicable provisions of this Agreement (except for pricing, delivery, passage of title and risk of loss to Equipment, warranty commencement, and payment terms) will govern the purchase and sale of the additional Equipment or Software. Additional or contrary terms in the purchase order will be inapplicable, unless signed by both parties. Title and risk of loss to additional Equipment will pass at shipment, warranty will commence upon delivery, and payment is due within thirty (30) days after the invoice date. Motorola will send Customer an invoice as the additional Equipment is shipped or Software is licensed. Alternatively, Customer may register with and place orders through Motorola Online (“MOL”), and this Agreement will be the “Underlying Agreement” for those MOL transactions rather than the MOL On-Line Terms and Conditions of Sale. MOL registration and other information may be found at https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com and the MOL telephone number is (800) 814-0601. 3.5. Motorola SOFTWARE. Any Motorola Software, including subsequent releases, is licensed to Customer solely in accordance with the Motorola Software License Agreement in Exhibit A (“Software License Agreement”). Customer hereby accepts and agrees to abide by all of the terms and restrictions of the Software License Agreement. 3.6. NON-Motorola SOFTWARE. Any Non-Motorola Software is licensed to Customer in accordance with the standard license, terms, and restrictions of the copyright owner on the Effective Date unless the copyright owner has granted to Motorola the right to sublicense the Non-Motorola Software pursuant to the Software License Agreement, in which case it applies and the copyright owner will have all of Licensor’s rights and protections under the Software License Agreement. Motorola makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding Non-Motorola Software. Non-Motorola Software may include Open Source Software. 3.7. SUBSTITUTIONS. At no additional cost to Customer, Motorola may substitute any Equipment, Software, or services to be provided by Motorola, if the substitute meets or exceeds the Specifications and is of equivalent or better quality to the Customer. Any substitution will be reflected in a change order. 3.8. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE. This paragraph applies only if a “Priced Options” exhibit is shown in Section 1, or if the parties amend this Agreement to add a Priced Options exhibit. During the term of the option as stated in the Priced Options exhibit (or if no term is stated, then for one (1) year after the Effective Date), Customer has the right and option to purchase the equipment, software, and related services that are described in the Priced Options exhibit. Customer may exercise this option by giving written notice to Seller which must designate what equipment, software, and related services Customer is selecting (including quantities, if applicable). To the extent they apply, the terms and conditions of this Agreement will govern the transaction; however, the parties acknowledge that certain provisions must be agreed upon, and they agree to negotiate those in good faith promptly after Customer delivers the option exercise notice. Examples of provisions that may need to be negotiated are: specific lists of deliverables, statements of work, acceptance test plans, delivery and implementation schedules,

https://businessonline.motorola.com/




5

payment terms, maintenance and support provisions, additions to or modifications of the Software License Agreement, hosting terms, and modifications to the acceptance and warranty provisions. Section 4 SERVICES 4.1. If Customer desires and Motorola agrees to continue Services beyond the Term, Customer’s issuance and Motorola’s acceptance of a purchase order for Services will serve as an automatic extension of the Agreement for purposes of the continuing Services. Only the terms and conditions applicable to the performance of Services will apply to the extended Agreement. 4.2. MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, AND SUA SERVICES. During the Warranty Period, in addition to warranty services, Motorola will provide maintenance Services for the Equipment and support for the Motorola Software pursuant to the Statement of Work set forth in the Maintenance and Support Addendum. Support for the Motorola Software will be in accordance with Motorola's established Software Support Policy. Copies of the SwSP can be found at http://www.motorolasolutions.com/softwarepolicy and will be sent by mail, email or fax to Customer upon written request. Maintenance Services and support during the Warranty Period are included in the Contract Price. If Customer wishes to purchase 1) additional maintenance or software support services during the Warranty Period; or 2) continue or expand maintenance, software support, installation, and/or SUA services after the Warranty Period, Motorola will provide the description of and pricing for such services in a separate proposal document. Unless otherwise agreed by the parties in writing, the terms and conditions in this Agreement applicable to those maintenance, support, installation, and/or SUA Services, will be included in the Maintenance and Support Addendum, SUA Addendum, the applicable Statements of Work, and the proposal. These collective terms will govern the provision of such Services. To obtain any such additional Services, Customer will issue a purchase order referring to this Agreement and the separate proposal document. Omission of reference to this Agreement in Customer’s purchase order will not affect the applicability of this Agreement. Motorola’s proposal may include a cover page entitled “Service Agreement” or “Installation Agreement”, as applicable, and other attachments. These cover pages and other attachments are incorporated into this Agreement by this reference. 4.3. PROFESSIONAL AND SUBSCRIPTION SERVICES. If Customer purchases professional or subscription Services as part of the Solution, additional or different terms specific to such Service will be included in the applicable Addendum and will apply to those Services. Customer may purchase additional professional or subscription services by issuing a purchase order referencing this Agreement and Motorola’s proposal for such additional services. 4.4. Any information in the form of specifications, drawings, reprints, technical information or otherwise furnished to Customer in providing Services under this Agreement or data viewed, accessed, will remain Motorola’s property, will be deemed proprietary, Confidential Information. This Confidential Information will be promptly returned at Motorola's request. 4.5. TOOLS. All tools, equipment, dies, gauges, models, drawings or other materials paid for or furnished by Motorola for the purpose of providing Services under this Agreement will be and remain the sole property of Motorola. Customer will safeguard all such property while it is in Customer’s custody or control, be liable for any loss or damage to this property, and return it to Motorola upon request. This property will be held by Customer for Motorola’s use without charge and may be removed from Customer’s premises by Motorola at any time without restriction. Upon termination of the contract for any reason, Customer shall return to Motorola all equipment delivered to Customer.

4.6. COVENANT NOT TO EMPLOY. During the term of this Agreement and continuing for a period of two (2) years thereafter, Customer will not hire, engage on contract, solicit the employment of, or recommend employment to any third party of any employee of Motorola or its subcontractors without the prior written authorization of Motorola. This provision applies only to those employees of Motorola or its subcontractors who are responsible for rendering Services under this Agreement. If this provision is

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/softwarepolicy


6

found to be overly broad under applicable law, it will be modified as necessary to conform to applicable law. 4.7. CUSTOMER OBLIGATIONS. If the applicable Statement of Work or Addendum contains assumptions that affect the Services or Deliverables, Customer will verify that they are accurate and complete. Any information that Customer provides to Motorola concerning the Services or Deliverables will be accurate and complete in all material respects. Customer will make timely decisions and obtain any required management approvals that are reasonably necessary for Motorola to perform the Services and its other duties under this Agreement. Unless the Statement of Work states the contrary, Motorola may rely upon and is not required to evaluate, confirm, reject, modify, or provide advice concerning any assumptions and Customer-provided information, decisions and approvals described in this paragraph. 4.8. ASSUMPTIONS. If any assumptions or conditions contained in this Agreement, applicable Addenda or Statements of Work prove to be incorrect or if Customer’s obligations are not performed, Motorola’s ability to perform under this Agreement may be impacted and changes to the Contract Price, subscription fees, project schedule, Deliverables, or other changes may be necessary. 4.9. NON-PRECLUSION. If, as a result of the Services performed under this Agreement, Motorola recommends that Customer purchase products or other services, nothing in this Agreement precludes Motorola from participating in a future competitive bidding process or otherwise offering or selling the recommended products or other services to Customer. Customer represents that this paragraph does not violate its procurement or other laws, regulations, or policies. 4.10. PROPRIETARY MATERIALS. Customer acknowledges that Motorola may use and/or provide Customer with access to Proprietary Materials and Derivative Proprietary Materials. The Proprietary Materials and the Derivative Proprietary Materials are the sole and exclusive property of Motorola and Motorola retains all right, title and interest in and to the Proprietary Materials and Derivative Proprietary Materials. 4.11. ADDITIONAL SERVICES. Any services performed by Motorola outside the scope of this Agreement at the direction of Customer will be considered to be additional Services which are subject to additional charges. Any agreement to perform additional Services will be reflected in a written and executed change order, Addendum or amendment to this Agreement. Section 5 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE The Parties will perform their respective responsibilities in accordance with the Performance Schedule. By executing this Agreement, Customer authorizes Motorola to proceed with contract performance. Section 6 CONTRACT PRICE, PAYMENT AND INVOICING 6.1. Customer affirms that a purchase order or notice to proceed is not required for contract performance or for subsequent years of service, if any, and that Customer will appropriate funds according to the Payment Schedule. The Customer will pay all invoices as received from Motorola and any changes in scope will be subject to the change order process as described in this Agreement. At the time of execution of this Agreement, the Customer will provide all necessary reference information to include on invoices for payment in accordance with this Agreement. 6.2. CONTRACT PRICE. The Contract Price in U.S. dollars is $________________________. The Contract Price will be paid via the disbursement of the financing proceeds pursuant to the Equipment Lease-Purchase Agreement executed between the parties. If applicable, a pricing summary is included with the Payment schedule. Motorola has priced the Services, Software, and Equipment as an integrated System. A reduction in Software or Equipment quantities, or Services, may affect the overall Contract Price, including discounts if applicable. Fees for professional, SUA, and/or subscription services which


7

are not included in the Contract Price may be listed and invoiced according to the pricing pages of the proposal, Exhibit B, or the applicable Addendum. For Customer’s reference, the Federal Tax Identification Number for Motorola Solutions, Inc. is 36-1115800. 6.3. FREIGHT, TITLE, AND RISK OF LOSS. Motorola will pre-pay and add all freight charges to the invoices. Unless otherwise stated in the Equipment Lease-Purchase Agreement, title and risk of loss to the Equipment will pass to Customer upon shipment. Title to Software will not pass to Customer at any time. Motorola will pack and ship all Equipment in accordance with good commercial practices. 6.5. INVOICING AND SHIPPING ADDRESSES. Invoices will be sent to the Customer at the following address: Name:______________________________________________________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________________________________________ Phone:______________________________________________________________________________ Email:_______________________________________________________________________________ The address which is the ultimate destination where the Equipment will be delivered to Customer is: Name:______________________________________________________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________________________________________ The Equipment will be shipped to the Customer at the following address (insert if this information is known): Name:______________________________________________________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________________________________________ Phone:______________________________________________________________________________ Customer may change this information by giving written notice to Motorola. Section 7 SITES AND SITE CONDITIONS 7.1. ACCESS TO SITES. In addition to its responsibilities described elsewhere in this Agreement, Customer will provide a designated project manager; all necessary construction and building permits, zoning variances, licenses, and any other approvals that are necessary to develop or use the sites and mounting locations; and access to the worksites or vehicles identified in the Technical and Implementation Documents as reasonably requested by Motorola so that it may perform its duties in accordance with the Performance Schedule and Statement of Work. If the Statement of Work so indicates, Motorola may assist Customer in the local building permit process. 7.2. SITE CONDITIONS. Customer will ensure that all work sites it provides will be safe, secure, and in compliance with all applicable industry and OSHA standards. To the extent applicable and unless the Statement of Work states to the contrary, Customer will ensure that these work sites have adequate: physical space; air conditioning and other environmental conditions; adequate and appropriate electrical power outlets, distribution, equipment and connections; and adequate telephone or other communication lines (including modem access and adequate interfacing networking capabilities), all for the installation, use and maintenance of the System. Before installing the Equipment or Software at a work site, Motorola may inspect the work site and advise Customer of any apparent deficiencies or non-conformities with the requirements of this Section. This Agreement is predicated upon normal soil conditions as defined by the version of E.I.A. standard RS-222 in effect on the Effective Date. 7.3. SITE ISSUES. If a Party determines that the sites identified in the Technical and Implementation Documents are no longer available or desired, or if subsurface, structural, adverse environmental or latent conditions at any site differ from those indicated in the Technical and Implementation Documents, the Parties will promptly investigate the conditions and will select replacement sites or adjust the installation plans and specifications as necessary. If change in sites or adjustment to the installation plans and specifications causes a change in the cost or time to perform, the Parties will equitably amend


8

the Contract Price, Performance Schedule, or both, by a change order. Section 8 TRAINING Any training to be provided by Motorola to Customer will be described in the applicable Statement of Work. Customer will notify Motorola immediately if a date change for a scheduled training program is required. If Motorola incurs additional costs because Customer reschedules a training program less than thirty (30) days before its scheduled start date, Motorola may recover these additional costs. Section 9 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE 9.1. COMMENCEMENT OF ACCEPTANCE TESTING. Motorola will provide to Customer at least ten (10) days notice before the Acceptance Tests commence. System testing will occur only in accordance with the Acceptance Test Plan. 9.2. SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE. System Acceptance will occur upon successful completion of the Acceptance Tests. Upon System Acceptance, the Parties will memorialize this event by promptly executing a System Acceptance Certificate. If the Acceptance Test Plan includes separate tests for individual Subsystems or phases of the System, acceptance of the individual Subsystem or phase will occur upon the successful completion of the Acceptance Tests for the Subsystem or phase, and the Parties will promptly execute an acceptance certificate for the Subsystem or phase. If Customer believes the System has failed the completed Acceptance Tests, Customer will provide to Motorola a written notice that includes the specific details of the failure. If Customer does not provide to Motorola a failure notice within thirty (30) days after completion of the Acceptance Tests, System Acceptance will be deemed to have occurred as of the completion of the Acceptance Tests. Minor omissions or variances in the System that do not materially impair the operation of the System as a whole will not postpone System Acceptance or Subsystem acceptance, but will be corrected according to a mutually agreed schedule. 9.3. BENEFICIAL USE. Customer acknowledges that Motorola’s ability to perform its implementation and testing responsibilities may be impeded if Customer begins using the System before System Acceptance. Therefore, Customer will not commence Beneficial Use before System Acceptance without Motorola’s prior written authorization, which will not be unreasonably withheld. Motorola is not responsible for System performance deficiencies that occur during unauthorized Beneficial Use. Upon commencement of Beneficial Use, Customer assumes responsibility for the use and operation of the System. 9.4. FINAL PROJECT ACCEPTANCE. Final Project Acceptance will occur after System Acceptance when all deliverables and other work have been completed. When Final Project Acceptance occurs, the parties will promptly memorialize this final event by so indicating on the System Acceptance Certificate (Exhibit D) and the Equipment Lease Purchase Agreement Delivery and Acceptance Certificate (Exhibit E). Section 10 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES 10.1. SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY. Motorola represents that the System will perform in accordance with the Specifications in all material respects. Upon System Acceptance or Beneficial Use, whichever occurs first, this System functionality representation is fulfilled. Motorola is not responsible for System performance deficiencies that are caused by ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola which is attached to or used in connection with the System or for reasons or parties beyond Motorola’s control, such as natural causes; the construction of a building that adversely affects the microwave path reliability or radio frequency (RF) coverage; the addition of frequencies at System sites that cause RF interference or intermodulation; or Customer changes to load usage or configuration outside the Specifications. 10.2. EQUIPMENT WARRANTY. During the Warranty Period, Motorola warrants that the Equipment under normal use and service will be free from material defects in materials and workmanship. If System


9

Acceptance is delayed beyond six (6) months after shipment of the Equipment by events or causes beyond Motorola’s control, this warranty expires eighteen (18) months after the shipment of the Equipment. 10.3. SOFTWARE WARRANTY. Except as described in the SwSP and unless otherwise stated in the Software License Agreement, during the Warranty Period, Motorola warrants the Software in accordance with the warranty terms set forth in the Software License Agreement and the provisions of this Section that are applicable to the Software. If System Acceptance is delayed beyond six (6) months after shipment of the Motorola Software by events or causes beyond Motorola’s control, this warranty expires eighteen (18) months after the shipment of the Motorola Software. Nothing in this Warranty provision is intended to conflict or modify the Software Support Policy. In the event of an ambiguity or conflict between the Software Warranty and Software Support Policy, the Software Support Policy governs. TO THE EXTENT, IF ANY, THAT THERE IS A SEPARATE LICENSE AGREEMENT PACKAGED WITH, OR PROVIDED ELECTRONICALLY WITH, A PARTICULAR PRODUCT THAT BECOMES EFFECTIVE ON AN ACT OF ACCEPTANCE BY THE END USER, THEN THAT AGREEMENT SUPERSEDES THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AS TO THE END USER OF EACH SUCH PRODUCT. 10.4. EXCLUSIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND SOFTWARE WARRANTIES. These warranties do not apply to: (i) defects or damage resulting from: use of the Equipment or Software in other than its normal, customary, and authorized manner; accident, liquids, neglect, or acts of God; testing, maintenance, disassembly, repair, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment not provided or authorized in writing by Motorola; Customer’s failure to comply with all applicable industry and OSHA standards; (ii) breakage of or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship; (iii) Equipment that has had the serial number removed or made illegible; (iv) batteries (because they carry their own separate limited warranty) or consumables; (v) freight costs to ship Equipment to the repair depot; (vi) scratches or other cosmetic damage to Equipment surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Equipment; and (vii) normal or customary wear and tear. 10.5. SERVICE WARRANTY. During the Warranty Period, Motorola warrants that the Services will be provided in a good and workmanlike manner and will conform in all material respects to the applicable Statement of Work. Services will be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days from the date the performance of the Services are completed. Customer acknowledges that the Deliverables may contain recommendations, suggestions or advice from Motorola to Customer (collectively, “recommendations”). Motorola makes no warranties concerning those recommendations, and Customer alone accepts responsibility for choosing whether and how to implement the recommendations and the results to be realized from implementing them. 10.6. WARRANTY CLAIMS. To assert a warranty claim, Customer must notify Motorola in writing of the claim before the expiration of the Warranty Period. Upon receipt of this notice, Motorola will investigate the warranty claim. If this investigation confirms a valid Equipment or Software warranty claim, Motorola will (at its option and at no additional charge to Customer) repair the defective Equipment or Motorola Software, replace it with the same or equivalent product, or refund the price of the defective Equipment or Motorola Software. These actions will be the full extent of Motorola’s liability for the warranty claim. In the event of a valid Services warranty claim, Customer’s sole remedy is to require Motorola to re-perform the non-conforming Service or to refund, on a pro-rata basis, the fees paid for the non-conforming Service. If this investigation indicates the warranty claim is not valid, then Motorola may invoice Customer for responding to the claim on a time and materials basis using Motorola’s then current labor rates. Repaired or replaced product is warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced products or parts will become the property of Motorola. 10.7. ORIGINAL END USER IS COVERED. These express limited warranties are extended by Motorola to the original user purchasing the System or Services for commercial, industrial, or governmental use only, and are not assignable or transferable.


10

10.8. DISCLAIMER OF OTHER WARRANTIES. THESE WARRANTIES ARE THE COMPLETE WARRANTIES FOR THE EQUIPMENT AND MOTOROLA SOFTWARE PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AND ARE GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES. MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Section 11 DELAYS 11.1. FORCE MAJEURE. Neither Party will be liable for its non-performance or delayed performance if caused by a Force Majeure. A Party that becomes aware of a Force Majeure that will significantly delay performance will notify the other Party promptly (but in no event later than fifteen days) after it discovers the Force Majeure. If a Force Majeure occurs, the Parties will execute a change order to extend the Performance Schedule or applicable Addenda for a time period that is reasonable under the circumstances. 11.2. PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE DELAYS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER. If Customer (including its other contractors) delays the Performance Schedule, it will make the promised payments according to the Payment Schedule as if no delay occurred; and the Parties will execute a change order to extend the Performance Schedule and, if requested, compensate Motorola for all reasonable charges incurred because of the delay. Delay charges may include costs incurred by Motorola or its subcontractors for additional freight, warehousing and handling of Equipment; extension of the warranties; travel; suspending and re-mobilizing the work; additional engineering, project management, and standby time calculated at then current rates; and preparing and implementing an alternative implementation plan. Section 12 DISPUTES The Parties will use the following procedure to address any dispute arising under this Agreement (a “Dispute”). 12.1. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State in which the System is installed. 12.2. NEGOTIATION. Either Party may initiate the Dispute resolution procedures by sending a notice of Dispute (“Notice of Dispute”). The Parties will attempt to resolve the Dispute promptly through good faith negotiations including 1) timely escalation of the Dispute to executives who have authority to settle the Dispute and who are at a higher level of management than the persons with direct responsibility for the matter and 2) direct communication between the executives. If the Dispute has not been resolved within ten (10) days from the Notice of Dispute, the Parties will proceed to mediation. 12.3. MEDIATION. The Parties will choose an independent mediator within thirty (30) days of a notice to mediate from either Party (“Notice of Mediation”). Neither Party may unreasonably withhold consent to the selection of a mediator. If the Parties are unable to agree upon a mediator, either Party may request that American Arbitration Association nominate a mediator. Each Party will bear its own costs of mediation, but the Parties will share the cost of the mediator equally. Each Party will participate in the mediation in good faith and will be represented at the mediation by a business executive with authority to settle the Dispute. 12.4. LITIGATION, VENUE and JURISDICTION. If a Dispute remains unresolved for sixty (60) days after receipt of the Notice of Mediation, either Party may then submit the Dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the System is installed. Each Party irrevocably agrees to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts in such state over any claim or matter arising under or in connection with this Agreement. 12.5. CONFIDENTIALITY. All communications pursuant to subsections 12.2 and 12.3 will be treated


11

as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence and any additional confidentiality protections provided by applicable law. The use of these Dispute resolution procedures will not be construed under the doctrines of laches, waiver or estoppel to affect adversely the rights of either Party. Section 13 DEFAULT AND TERMINATION 13.1. DEFAULT BY A PARTY. If either Party fails to perform a material obligation under this Agreement, the other Party may consider the non-performing Party to be in default (unless a Force Majeure causes the failure) and may assert a default claim by giving the non-performing Party a written and detailed notice of default. Except for a default by Customer for failing to pay any amount when due under this Agreement which must be cured immediately, the defaulting Party will have thirty (30) days after receipt of the notice of default to either cure the default or, if the default is not curable within thirty (30) days, provide a written cure plan. The defaulting Party will begin implementing the cure plan immediately after receipt of notice by the other Party that it approves the plan. If Customer is the defaulting Party, Motorola may stop work on the project until it approves the Customer’s cure plan. 13.2. FAILURE TO CURE. If a defaulting Party fails to cure the default as provided above in Section 13.1, unless otherwise agreed in writing, the non-defaulting Party may terminate any unfulfilled portion of this Agreement. In the event of termination for default, the defaulting Party will promptly return to the non-defaulting Party any of its Confidential Information. If Customer is the non-defaulting Party, terminates this Agreement as permitted by this Section, and completes the System through a third Party, Customer may as its exclusive remedy recover from Motorola reasonable costs incurred to complete the System to a capability not exceeding that specified in this Agreement less the unpaid portion of the Contract Price. Customer will mitigate damages and provide Motorola with detailed invoices substantiating the charges. In the event Customer elects to terminate this Agreement for any reason other than default, Customer shall pay Motorola for the conforming Equipment and/or Software delivered and all services performed. Section 14 INDEMNIFICATION 14.1. GENERAL INDEMNITY BY Motorola. Motorola will indemnify and hold Customer harmless from any and all liability, expense, judgment, suit, cause of action, or demand for personal injury, death, or direct damage to tangible property which may accrue against Customer to the extent it is caused by the negligence of Motorola, its subcontractors, or their employees or agents, while performing their duties under this Agreement, if Customer gives Motorola prompt, written notice of any claim or suit. Customer will cooperate with Motorola in its defense or settlement of the claim or suit. This Section sets forth the full extent of Motorola’s general indemnification of Customer from liabilities that are in any way related to Motorola’s performance under this Agreement. Notwithstanding, this obligation does not apply if Motorola is entitled to immunity under the NG911 Act of 2012. 14.2. GENERAL INDEMNITY BY CUSTOMER. Customer will indemnify and hold Motorola harmless from any and all liability, expense, judgment, suit, cause of action, or demand for personal injury, death, or direct damage to tangible property which may accrue against Motorola to the extent it is caused by the negligence of Customer, its other contractors, or their employees or agents, while performing their duties under this Agreement, if Motorola gives Customer prompt, written notice of any the claim or suit. Motorola will cooperate with Customer in its defense or settlement of the claim or suit. This Section sets forth the full extent of Customer’s general indemnification of Motorola from liabilities that are in any way related to Customer’s performance under this Agreement. 14.3. PATENT AND COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT. 14.3.1. Motorola will defend at its expense any suit brought against Customer to the extent it is based on a third-party claim alleging that the Equipment manufactured by Motorola or the Motorola Software (“Motorola Product”) directly infringes a United States patent or copyright (“Infringement Claim”). Motorola’s duties to defend and indemnify are conditioned upon: Customer promptly notifying Motorola in


12

writing of the Infringement Claim; Motorola having sole control of the defense of the suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and Customer providing to Motorola cooperation and, if requested by Motorola, reasonable assistance in the defense of the Infringement Claim. In addition to Motorola’s obligation to defend, and subject to the same conditions, Motorola will pay all damages finally awarded against Customer by a court of competent jurisdiction for an Infringement Claim or agreed to, in writing, by Motorola in settlement of an Infringement Claim. 14.3.2 If an Infringement Claim occurs, or in Motorola's opinion is likely to occur, Motorola may at its option and expense: (a) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Motorola Product; (b) replace or modify the Motorola Product so that it becomes non-infringing while providing functionally equivalent performance; or (c) accept the return of the Motorola Product and grant Customer a credit for the Motorola Product, less a reasonable charge for depreciation. The depreciation amount will be calculated based upon generally accepted accounting standards. 14.3.3 Motorola will have no duty to defend or indemnify for any Infringement Claim that is based upon: (a) the combination of the Motorola Product with any software, apparatus or device not furnished by Motorola; (b) the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola and that is attached to or used in connection with the Motorola Product; (c) Motorola Product designed or manufactured in accordance with Customer’s designs, specifications, guidelines or instructions, if the alleged infringement would not have occurred without such designs, specifications, guidelines or instructions; (d) a modification of the Motorola Product by a party other than Motorola; (e) use of the Motorola Product in a manner for which the Motorola Product was not designed or that is inconsistent with the terms of this Agreement; or (f) the failure by Customer to install an enhancement release to the Motorola Software that is intended to correct the claimed infringement. In no event will Motorola’s liability resulting from its indemnity obligation to Customer extend in any way to royalties payable on a per use basis or the Customer’s revenues, or any royalty basis other than a reasonable royalty based upon revenue derived by Motorola from Customer from sales or license of the infringing Motorola Product. 14.3.4. This Section 14 provides Customer’s sole and exclusive remedies and Motorola’s entire liability in the event of an Infringement Claim. Customer has no right to recover and Motorola has no obligation to provide any other or further remedies, whether under another provision of this Agreement or any other legal theory or principle, in connection with an Infringement Claim. In addition, the rights and remedies provided in this Section 14 are subject to and limited by the restrictions set forth in Section 15. Section 15 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Except for personal injury or death, Motorola's total liability, whether for breach of contract, warranty, negligence, strict liability in tort, indemnification, or otherwise, will be limited to the direct damages recoverable under law, but not to exceed the price of the Equipment, Software, or implementation Services with respect to which losses or damages are claimed. With respect to all non-implementation Services and unless as otherwise provided under the applicable Addenda, Motorola’s total liability will be limited to the direct damages recoverable under law, but not to exceed the price of twelve (12) months of Services preceding the incident giving rise to the claim. ALTHOUGH THE PARTIES ACKNOWLEDGE THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSSES OR DAMAGES, THEY AGREE THAT MOTOROLA WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY COMMERCIAL LOSS, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, LOSS TIME, DATA, GOODWILL, REVENUES, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; OR OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO OR ARISING FROM THIS AGREEMENT, THE SALE OR USE OF THE EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE, OR THE PERFORMANCE OF SERVICES BY Motorola PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT. This limitation of liability provision survives the expiration or termination of the Agreement and applies notwithstanding any contrary provision. No action for contract breach or otherwise relating to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement may be brought more than one (1) year after the accrual of the cause of action, except for money due upon an open account. Section 16 CONFIDENTIALITY AND PROPRIETARY RIGHTS


13

16.1. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. 16.1.1. Each party is a disclosing party (“Discloser”) and a receiving party (“Recipient”) under this Agreement. All Deliverables will be deemed to be Motorola’s Confidential Information. During the term of this Agreement and for a period of three (3) years from the expiration or termination of this Agreement, Recipient will (i) not disclose Confidential Information to any third party; (ii) restrict disclosure of Confidential Information to only those employees (including, but not limited to, employees of any wholly owned subsidiary, a parent company, any other wholly owned subsidiaries of the same parent company), agents or consultants who must be directly involved with the Confidential Information for the purpose and who are bound by confidentiality terms substantially similar to those in this Agreement; (iii) not copy, reproduce, reverse engineer, de-compile or disassemble any Confidential Information; (iv) use the same degree of care as for its own information of like importance, but at least use reasonable care, in safeguarding against disclosure of Confidential Information; (v) promptly notify Discloser upon discovery of any unauthorized use or disclosure of the Confidential Information and take reasonable steps to regain possession of the Confidential Information and prevent further unauthorized actions or other breach of this Agreement; and (vi) only use the Confidential Information as needed to fulfill this Agreement. 16.1.2. Recipient is not obligated to maintain as confidential, Confidential Information that Recipient can demonstrate by documentation (i) is now available or becomes available to the public without breach of this agreement; (ii) is explicitly approved for release by written authorization of Discloser; (iii) is lawfully obtained from a third party or parties without a duty of confidentiality; (iv) is known to the Recipient prior to such disclosure; or (v) is independently developed by Recipient without the use of any of Discloser’s Confidential Information or any breach of this Agreement. 16.1.3. All Confidential Information remains the property of the Discloser and will not be copied or reproduced without the express written permission of the Discloser, except for copies that are absolutely necessary in order to fulfill this Agreement. Within ten (10) days of receipt of Discloser’s written request, Recipient will return all Confidential Information to Discloser along with all copies and portions thereof, or certify in writing that all such Confidential Information has been destroyed. However, Recipient may retain one (1) archival copy of the Confidential Information that it may use only in case of a dispute concerning this Agreement. No license, express or implied, in the Confidential Information is granted other than to use the Confidential Information in the manner and to the extent authorized by this Agreement. The Discloser warrants that it is authorized to disclose any Confidential Information it discloses pursuant to this Agreement. 16.2. PRESERVATION OF MOTOROLA’S PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. Motorola, the third party manufacturer of any Equipment, and the copyright owner of any Non-Motorola Software own and retain all of their respective Proprietary Rights in the Equipment and Software, and nothing in this Agreement is intended to restrict their Proprietary Rights. All intellectual property developed, originated, or prepared by Motorola in connection with providing to Customer the Equipment, Software, or related services remain vested exclusively in Motorola, and this Agreement does not grant to Customer any shared development rights of intellectual property. Except as explicitly provided in the Software License Agreement, Motorola does not grant to Customer, either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any right, title or interest in Motorola’s Proprietary Rights. Customer will not modify, disassemble, peel components, decompile, otherwise reverse engineer or attempt to reverse engineer, derive source code or create derivative works from, adapt, translate, merge with other software, reproduce, distribute, sublicense, sell or export the Software, or permit or encourage any third party to do so. The preceding sentence does not apply to Open Source Software which is governed by the standard license of the copyright owner. 16.3 VOLUNTARY DISCLOSURE. Except as required to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement, Motorola will have no obligation to provide Customer with access to its Confidential Information and/or proprietary information. Under no circumstances will Motorola be required to provide any data related to cost and pricing.


14

16.4 DATA AND FEEDBACK.

16.4.1 To the extent permitted by law, Customer owns all right, title and interest in System Data created solely by it or its agents (hereafter, “Customer Data””), and grants to Motorola the right to use, host, cache, store, reproduce, copy, modify, combine, analyze, create derivatives from, communicate, transmit, publish, display, and distribute such Customer Data. 16.4.2 Motorola owns all right, title and interest in data resulting from System Data that is or has been transformed, altered, processed, aggregated, correlated or operated on (hereafter, “Derivative Data”).

16.4.3 Any Feedback given by Customer is and will be entirely voluntary and, even if designated as confidential, will not create any confidentiality obligation for Motorola. Motorola will be free to use, reproduce, license or otherwise distribute and exploit the Feedback without any obligation to Customer. Customer acknowledges that Motorola’s receipt of the Feedback does not imply or create recognition by Motorola of either the novelty or originality of any idea. The parties further agree that all fixes, modifications and improvements made to Motorola products or services conceived of or made by Motorola that are based, either in whole or in part, on the Feedback are the exclusive property of Motorola and all right, title and interest in and to such fixes, modifications or improvements to the Motorola product or service will vest solely in Motorola. Section 17 GENERAL 17.1. TAXES. The Contract Price does not include any excise, sales, lease, use, property, or other taxes, assessments or duties, all of which will be paid by Customer except as exempt by law. If Motorola is required to pay any of these taxes, Motorola will send an invoice to Customer and Customer will pay to Motorola the amount of the taxes (including any interest and penalties) within thirty (30) days after the date of the invoice. Customer will be solely responsible for reporting the Equipment for personal property tax purposes, and Motorola will be solely responsible for reporting taxes on its income or net worth. 17.2. ASSIGNABILITY AND SUBCONTRACTING. Except as provided herein, neither Party may assign this Agreement or any of its rights or obligations hereunder without the prior written consent of the other Party, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld. Any attempted assignment, delegation, or transfer without the necessary consent will be void. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Motorola may assign this Agreement to any of its affiliates or its right to receive payment without the prior consent of Customer. In addition, in the event Motorola separates one or more of its businesses (each a “Separated Business”), whether by way of a sale, establishment of a joint venture, spin-off or otherwise (each a “Separation Event”), Motorola may, without the prior written consent of the other Party and at no additional cost to Motorola, assign this Agreement such that it will continue to benefit the Separated Business and its affiliates (and Motorola and its affiliates, to the extent applicable) following the Separation Event. Motorola may subcontract any of the work, but subcontracting will not relieve Motorola of its duties under this Agreement. 17.3. WAIVER. Failure or delay by either Party to exercise a right or power under this Agreement will not be a waiver of the right or power. For a waiver of a right or power to be effective, it must be in a writing signed by the waiving Party. An effective waiver of a right or power will not be construed as either a future or continuing waiver of that same right or power, or the waiver of any other right or power. 17.4. SEVERABILITY. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders any part of this Agreement invalid or unenforceable, that part will be severed and the remainder of this Agreement will continue in full force and effect. 17.5. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS. Each Party will perform its duties under this Agreement as an


15

independent contractor. The Parties and their personnel will not be considered to be employees or agents of the other Party. Nothing in this Agreement will be interpreted as granting either Party the right or authority to make commitments of any kind for the other. This Agreement will not constitute, create, or be interpreted as a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 17.6. HEADINGS AND SECTION REFERENCES. The section headings in this Agreement are inserted only for convenience and are not to be construed as part of this Agreement or as a limitation of the scope of the particular section to which the heading refers. This Agreement will be fairly interpreted in accordance with its terms and conditions and not for or against either Party. 17.7. NOTICES. Notices required under this Agreement to be given by one Party to the other must be in writing and either personally delivered or sent to the address provided by the other Party by certified mail, return receipt requested and postage prepaid (or by a recognized courier service, such as Federal Express, UPS, or DHL), or by facsimile with correct answerback received, and will be effective upon receipt 17.8. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS. Each Party will comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations and rules concerning the performance of this Agreement or use of the System. Customer will obtain and comply with all Federal Communications Commission (“FCC”) licenses and authorizations required for the installation, operation and use of the System before the scheduled installation of the Equipment. Although Motorola might assist Customer in the preparation of its FCC license applications, neither Motorola nor any of its employees is an agent or representative of Customer in FCC or other matters. 17.9. AUTHORITY TO EXECUTE AGREEMENT. Each Party represents that it has obtained all necessary approvals, consents and authorizations to enter into this Agreement and to perform its duties under this Agreement; the person executing this Agreement on its behalf has the authority to do so; upon execution and delivery of this Agreement by the Parties, it is a valid and binding contract, enforceable in accordance with its terms; and the execution, delivery, and performance of this Agreement does not violate any bylaw, charter, regulation, law or any other governing authority of the Party. 17.10. ADMINISTRATOR LEVEL ACCOUNT ACCESS. If applicable to the type of System purchased by Customer, Motorola will provide Customer with Administrative User Credentials. Customer agrees to only grant access to the Administrative User Credentials to those personnel with the training and experience to correctly use them. Customer is responsible for protecting Administrative User Credentials from disclosure and maintaining Credential validity by, among other things, updating passwords when required. Customer may be asked to provide valid Administrative User Credentials when in contact with Motorola System support personnel. Customer understands that changes made as the Administrative User can significantly impact the performance of the System. Customer agrees that it will be solely responsible for any negative impact on the System or its users by any such changes. System issues occurring as a result of changes made using the Administrative User Credentials may impact Motorola’s ability to perform Services or other obligations under the Agreement. In such cases, a revision to the appropriate provisions of the Agreement, including the Statement of Work, may be necessary. To the extent Motorola provides assistance to correct any issues caused by or arising out of the use of or failure to maintain Administrative User Credentials, Motorola will be entitled to bill Customer and Customer will pay Motorola on a time and materials basis for resolving the issue. 17.11. SURVIVAL OF TERMS. The following provisions will survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement for any reason: Section 3.5 (Motorola Software); Section 3.6 (Non-Motorola Software); if any payment obligations exist, Sections 6.1 and 6.2 (Contract Price and Invoicing and Payment); Subsection 10.8 (Disclaimer of Implied Warranties); Section 12 (Disputes); Section 15 (Limitation of Liability); and Section 16 (Confidentiality and Proprietary Rights); and all of the General provisions in Section 17. 17.12. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement, including all Exhibits, constitutes the entire agreement of the Parties regarding the subject matter of the Agreement and supersedes all previous agreements,


16

proposals, and understandings, whether written or oral, relating to this subject matter. This Agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts, and shall have the same legal force and effect as if the Parties had executed it as a single document. The Parties may sign in writing, or by electronic signature, including by email. An electronic signature, or a facsimile copy or computer image, such as a PDF or tiff image, of a signature, shall be treated as and shall have the same effect as an original signature. In addition, an electronic signature, a true and correct facsimile copy or computer image of this Agreement shall be treated as and shall have the same effect as an original signed copy of this document. This Agreement may be amended or modified only by a written instrument signed by authorized representatives of both Parties. The preprinted terms and conditions found on any Customer purchase or purchase order, acknowledgment or other form will not be considered an amendment or modification of this Agreement, even if a representative of each Party signs that document. The Parties hereby enter into this Agreement as of the Effective Date. Motorola Solutions, Inc. Customer By: ______________________________ By: ______________________________ Name: ___________________________ Name: ____________________________ Title: ____________________________ Title: _____________________________ Date: ____________________________ Date: ____________________________

Exhibit A

MOTOROLA SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This Exhibit A Motorola Software License Agreement ("Agreement") is between Motorola Solutions, Inc., (“Motorola"), and ______________________________________ (“Licensee”). For good and valuable consideration, the parties agree as follows: Section 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 “Designated Products” means products provided by Motorola to Licensee with which or for which the Software and Documentation is licensed for use. 1.2 “Documentation” means product and software documentation that specifies technical and performance features and capabilities, and the user, operation and training manuals for the Software (including all physical or electronic media upon which such information is provided). 1.3 “Open Source Software” means software with either freely obtainable source code, license for modification, or permission for free distribution. 1.4 “Open Source Software License” means the terms or conditions under which the Open Source Software is licensed. 1.5 “Primary Agreement” means the agreement to which this exhibit is attached. 1.6 “Security Vulnerability” means a flaw or weakness in system security procedures, design, implementation, or internal controls that could be exercised (accidentally triggered or intentionally exploited) and result in a security breach such that data is compromised, manipulated or stolen or the


17

system damaged. 1.7 “Software” (i) means proprietary software in object code format, and adaptations, translations, de-compilations, disassemblies, emulations, or derivative works of such software; (ii) means any modifications, enhancements, new versions and new releases of the software provided by Motorola; and (iii) may contain one or more items of software owned by a third party supplier. The term "Software" does not include any third party software provided under separate license or third party software not licensable under the terms of this Agreement. Section 2 SCOPE Motorola and Licensee enter into this Agreement in connection with Motorola's delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing embedded or pre-loaded proprietary software, or both. This Agreement contains the terms and conditions of the license Motorola is providing to Licensee, and Licensee’s use of the proprietary software and affiliated documentation. Section 3 GRANT OF LICENSE 3.1. Subject to the provisions of this Agreement and the payment of applicable license fees, Motorola grants to Licensee a personal, limited, non-transferable (except as permitted in Section 7) and non-exclusive license under Motorola’s copyrights and Confidential Information (as defined in the Primary Agreement) embodied in the Software to use the Software, in object code form, and the Documentation solely in connection with Licensee's use of the Designated Products. This Agreement does not grant any rights to source code. 3.2. If the Software licensed under this Agreement contains or is derived from Open Source Software, the terms and conditions governing the use of such Open Source Software are in the Open Source Software Licenses of the copyright owner and not this Agreement. If there is a conflict between the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the terms and conditions of the Open Source Software Licenses governing Licensee’s use of the Open Source Software, the terms and conditions of the license grant of the applicable Open Source Software Licenses will take precedence over the license grants in this Agreement. If requested by Licensee, Motorola will use commercially reasonable efforts to: (i) determine whether any Open Source Software is provided under this Agreement; and (ii) identify the Open Source Software (or specify where that license may be found). Section 4 LIMITATIONS ON USE 4.1. Licensee may use the Software only for Licensee's internal business purposes and only in accordance with the Documentation. Any other use of the Software is strictly prohibited. Without limiting the general nature of these restrictions, Licensee will not make the Software available for use by third parties on a "time sharing," "application service provider," or "service bureau" basis or for any other similar commercial rental or sharing arrangement. 4.2. Licensee will not, and will not allow or enable any third party to: (i) reverse engineer, disassemble, peel components, decompile, reprogram or otherwise reduce the Software or any portion to a human perceptible form or otherwise attempt to recreate the source code; (ii) modify, adapt, create derivative works of, or merge the Software; (iii) copy, reproduce, distribute, lend, or lease the Software or Documentation to any third party, grant any sublicense or other rights in the Software or Documentation to any third party, or take any action that would cause the Software or Documentation to be placed in the public domain; (iv) remove, or in any way alter or obscure, any copyright notice or other notice of Motorola's proprietary rights; (v) provide, copy, transmit, disclose, divulge or make the Software or Documentation available to, or permit the use of the Software by any third party or on any machine except as expressly authorized by this Agreement; or (vi) use, or permit the use of, the Software in a manner that would result in the production of a copy of the Software solely by activating a machine containing the Software. Licensee may make one copy of Software to be used solely for archival, back-


18

up, or disaster recovery purposes; provided that Licensee may not operate that copy of the Software at the same time as the original Software is being operated. Licensee may make as many copies of the Documentation as it may reasonably require for the internal use of the Software. 4.3. Unless otherwise authorized by Motorola in writing, Licensee will not, and will not enable or allow any third party to: (i) install a licensed copy of the Software on more than one unit of a Designated Product; or (ii) copy onto or transfer Software installed in one unit of a Designated Product onto one other device. Licensee may temporarily transfer Software installed on a Designated Product to another device if the Designated Product is inoperable or malfunctioning, if Licensee provides written notice to Motorola of the temporary transfer and identifies the device on which the Software is transferred. Temporary transfer of the Software to another device must be discontinued when the original Designated Product is returned to operation and the Software must be removed from the other device. Licensee must provide prompt written notice to Motorola at the time temporary transfer is discontinued. 4.4 Licensee will maintain, during the term of this Agreement and for a period of two years thereafter, accurate records relating to this license grant to verify compliance with this Agreement. Motorola or an independent third party (“Auditor”) may inspect Licensee’s premises, books and records, upon reasonable prior notice to Licensee, during Licensee’s normal business hours and subject to Licensee's facility and security regulations. Motorola is responsible for the payment of all expenses and costs of the Auditor. Any information obtained by Motorola and the Auditor will be kept in strict confidence by Motorola and the Auditor and used solely for the purpose of verifying Licensee's compliance with the terms of this Agreement. Section 5 OWNERSHIP AND TITLE Motorola, its licensors, and its suppliers retain all of their proprietary rights in any form in and to the Software and Documentation, including, but not limited to, all rights in patents, patent applications, inventions, copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets, trade names, and other proprietary rights in or relating to the Software and Documentation (including any corrections, bug fixes, enhancements, updates, modifications, adaptations, translations, de-compilations, disassemblies, emulations to or derivative works from the Software or Documentation, whether made by Motorola or another party, or any improvements that result from Motorola’s processes or, provision of information services). No rights are granted to Licensee under this Agreement by implication, estoppel or otherwise, except for those rights which are expressly granted to Licensee in this Agreement. All intellectual property developed, originated, or prepared by Motorola in connection with providing the Software, Designated Products, Documentation or related services, remains vested exclusively in Motorola, and Licensee will not have any shared development or other intellectual property rights. Section 6 LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY 6.1. Unless otherwise stated in the Primary Agreement, the commencement date and the term of the Software warranty will be a period of ninety (90) days from Motorola's shipment of the Software (the "Warranty Period"). If Licensee is not in breach of any of its obligations under this Agreement, Motorola warrants that the unmodified Software, when used properly and in accordance with the Documentation and this Agreement, will be free from a reproducible defect that eliminates the functionality or successful operation of a feature critical to the primary functionality or successful operation of the Software. Whether a defect occurs will be determined by Motorola solely with reference to the Documentation. Motorola does not warrant that Licensee’s use of the Software or the Designated Products will be uninterrupted, error-free, completely free of Security Vulnerabilities, or that the Software or the Designated Products will meet Licensee’s particular requirements. Motorola makes no representations or warranties with respect to any third party software included in the Software. Notwithstanding, any warranty provided by a copyright owner in its standard license terms will flow through to Licensee for third party software provided by Motorola. 6.2 Motorola’s sole obligation to Licensee and Licensee’s exclusive remedy under this warranty is to


19

use reasonable efforts to remedy any material Software defect covered by this warranty. These efforts will involve either replacing the media or attempting to correct significant, demonstrable program or documentation errors or Security Vulnerabilities. If Motorola cannot correct the defect within a reasonable time, then at Motorola’s option, Motorola will replace the defective Software with functionally-equivalent Software, license to Licensee substitute Software which will accomplish the same objective, or terminate the license and refund the Licensee’s paid license fee. 6.3. Warranty claims are described in the Primary Agreement. 6.4. The express warranties set forth in this Section 6 are in lieu of, and Motorola disclaims, any and all other warranties (express or implied, oral or written) with respect to the Software or Documentation, including, without limitation, any and all implied warranties of condition, title, non-infringement, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose or use by Licensee (whether or not Motorola knows, has reason to know, has been advised, or is otherwise aware of any such purpose or use), whether arising by law, by reason of custom or usage of trade, or by course of dealing. In addition, Motorola disclaims any warranty to any person other than Licensee with respect to the Software or Documentation. Section 7 TRANSFERS Licensee will not transfer the Software or Documentation to any third party without Motorola's prior written consent. Motorola’s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement. If the Designated Products are Motorola's radio products and Licensee transfers ownership of the Motorola radio products to a third party, Licensee may assign its right to use the Software (other than CPS and Motorola's FLASHport® software) which is embedded in or furnished for use with the radio products and the related Documentation; provided that Licensee transfers all copies of the Software and Documentation to the transferee, and Licensee and the transferee sign a transfer form to be provided by Motorola upon request, obligating the transferee to be bound by this Agreement. Section 8 TERM AND TERMINATION 8.1 Licensee’s right to use the Software and Documentation will begin when the Primary Agreement is signed by both parties and will continue for the life of the Designated Products with which or for which the Software and Documentation have been provided by Motorola, unless Licensee breaches this Agreement, in which case this Agreement and Licensee's right to use the Software and Documentation may be terminated immediately upon notice by Motorola. 8.2 Within thirty (30) days after termination of this Agreement, Licensee must certify in writing to Motorola that all copies of the Software have been removed or deleted from the Designated Products and that all copies of the Software and Documentation have been returned to Motorola or destroyed by Licensee and are no longer in use by Licensee. 8.3 Licensee acknowledges that Motorola made a considerable investment of resources in the development, marketing, and distribution of the Software and Documentation and that Licensee's breach of this Agreement will result in irreparable harm to Motorola for which monetary damages would be inadequate. If Licensee breaches this Agreement, Motorola may terminate this Agreement and be entitled to all available remedies at law or in equity (including immediate injunctive relief and repossession of all non-embedded Software and associated Documentation unless Licensee is a Federal agency of the United States Government).

Section 9 Commercial Computer Software

9.1 This Section 9 only applies to U.S. Government end users. The Software, Documentation and updates are commercial items as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. Part 2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “computer software documentation” as such terms are defined in 48 C.F.R. Part


20

252.227-7014(a)(1) and 48 C.F.R. Part 252.227-7014(a)(5), and used in 48 C.F.R. Part 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. Part 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. Part 12.212, 48 C.F.R. Part 252.227-7015, 48 C.F.R. Part 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, 48 C.F.R. Part 52.227-19, and other relevant sections of the Code of Federal Regulations, as applicable, the Software, Documentation and Updates are distributed and licensed to U.S. Government end users: (i) only as commercial items, and (ii) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions contained herein.

9.2 If Licensee is licensing Software for end use by the United States Government or a United States Government agency, Licensee may transfer such Software license, but only if: (i) Licensee transfers all copies of such Software and Documentation to such United States Government entity or interim transferee, and (ii) Licensee has first obtained from the transferee (if applicable) and ultimate end user an enforceable end user license agreement containing restrictions substantially identical to the ones contained in this Agreement. Except as stated in the foregoing, Licensee and any transferee(s) authorized by this subsection 9.2 may not otherwise use or transfer or make available any Motorola software to any third party nor permit any party to do so.

Section 10 CONFIDENTIALITY Licensee acknowledges that the Software and Documentation contain Motorola’s valuable proprietary and Confidential Information and are Motorola’s trade secrets, and that the provisions in the Primary Agreement concerning Confidential Information apply. Section 11 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The Limitation of Liability provision is described in the Primary Agreement. Section 12 NOTICES Notices are described in the Primary Agreement.

Section 13 GENERAL 13.1. COPYRIGHT NOTICES. The existence of a copyright notice on the Software will not be construed as an admission or presumption of publication of the Software or public disclosure of any trade secrets associated with the Software. 13.2. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. Licensee acknowledges that the Software is subject to the laws and regulations of the United States and Licensee will comply with all applicable laws and regulations, including export laws and regulations of the United States. Licensee will not, without the prior authorization of Motorola and the appropriate governmental authority of the United States, in any form export or re-export, sell or resell, ship or reship, or divert, through direct or indirect means, any item or technical data or direct or indirect products sold or otherwise furnished to any person within any territory for which the United States Government or any of its agencies at the time of the action, requires an export license or other governmental approval. Violation of this provision is a material breach of this Agreement. 13.3. ASSIGNMENTS AND SUBCONTRACTING. Motorola may assign its rights or subcontract its obligations under this Agreement, or encumber or sell its rights in any Software, without prior notice to or consent of Licensee. 13.4. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States to the extent that they apply and otherwise by the internal substantive laws of the State to which the Software is shipped if Licensee is a sovereign government entity, or the internal substantive laws of the State of Illinois if Licensee is not a sovereign government entity. The terms of the U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods do not apply. In the event that the Uniform Computer Information


21

Transaction Act, any version of this Act, or a substantially similar law (collectively "UCITA") becomes applicable to a party's performance under this Agreement, UCITA does not govern any aspect of this Agreement or any license granted under this Agreement, or any of the parties' rights or obligations under this Agreement. The governing law will be that in effect prior to the applicability of UCITA. 13.5. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES. This Agreement is entered into solely for the benefit of Motorola and Licensee. No third party has the right to make any claim or assert any right under this Agreement, and no third party is deemed a beneficiary of this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any licensor or supplier of third party software included in the Software will be a direct and intended third party beneficiary of this Agreement. 13.6. SURVIVAL. Sections 4, 5, 6.4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 13 survive the termination of this Agreement. 13.7. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE. In the event of inconsistencies between this Exhibit and the Primary Agreement, the parties agree that this Exhibit prevails, only with respect to the specific subject matter of this Exhibit, and not the Primary Agreement or any other exhibit as it applies to any other subject matter. 13.8 SECURITY. Motorola uses reasonable means in the design and writing of its own Software and the acquisition of third party Software to limit Security Vulnerabilities. While no software can be guaranteed to be free from Security Vulnerabilities, if a Security Vulnerability is discovered, Motorola will take the steps set forth in Section 6 of this Agreement.


22

Exhibit B For the System purchase financed through Motorola Solutions, please refer to the Payment

Schedule included in the Equipment Lease-Purchase Agreement

If Customer has purchased additional Professional or Subscription services, payment will be in accordance with the applicable addenda. For Lifecycle Support Plan and Subscription Based Services: Motorola will invoice Customer annually in advance of each year of the plan, or as otherwise stated in the applicable addenda.

The chart below outlines the hourly labor rates for Motorola System Integration resources to be used. The staffing requirements shall be multiplied by the appropriate rate per resource in the table below. The hourly labor rates are fully burdened. The hourly rates per resource type and level are listed in Table 1.

These rates apply to ordinary days and times (Monday to Friday during the hours 8am to 5pm). Additional surcharges may apply to work done outside these timeframes. The minimum charge for any resource will be 4 hours. Travel expenses are not included in these rates and may be charged separately. The qualifications of each type and level of resource are defined in the tables found at at https://www.motorolasolutions.com/content/dam/msi/secure/services/labor-rates-exhibit-160408.pdf. All Motorola System Integration personnel assigned to this project will be classified according these levels. Project Administrative roles are varied and their specific duties and qualifications will be determined by the complexity and requirements of each project.

EXHIBIT D

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/content/dam/msi/secure/services/labor-rates-exhibit-160408.pdf


23

System Acceptance Certificate

Customer Name: ______________________________________________________ Project Name: ________________________________________________________ This System Acceptance Certificate memorializes the occurrence of System Acceptance. Motorola and Customer acknowledge that:

1. The Acceptance Tests set forth in the Acceptance Test Plan have been successfully completed. 2. The System is accepted. Customer Representative: Motorola Representative:

Signature: ____________________________ Signature: ____________________________ Print Name: ___________________________ Print Name: ___________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ FINAL PROJECT ACCEPTANCE: Motorola has provided and Customer has received all deliverables, and Motorola has performed all other work required for Final Project Acceptance. Customer Representative: Motorola Representative: Signature: ____________________________ Signature: ____________________________ Print Name: ___________________________ Print Name: ___________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________

Exhibit E


24

EQUIPMENT LEASE PURCHASE AGREEMENT DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE The undersigned Lessee hereby acknowledges receipt of the Equipment described below (“Equipment”) and Lessee hereby accepts the Equipment after full inspection thereof as satisfactory for all purposes of lease Schedule A to the Equipment Lease Purchase Agreement executed by Lessee (Customer) and Lessor. Equipment Lease Purchase Agreement No.: ______________ Lease Schedule A No. : ______________

EQUIPMENT INFORMATION

QUANTITY MODEL NUMBER EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Equipment referenced in lease Schedule A# _______________. See Schedule A for a detailed Equipment List.

LESSEE/CUSTOMER: By: ______________________________________ Title:_____________________________________ Date: ____________________________________ Please complete this form and send a copy via US mail or email to: Motorola Solutions Credit Company LLC Attn: Bill Stancik, Finance Manager | 500 W. Monroe, 44th Floor | Chicago, IL 60661 Email: [email protected] | Telephone: (847) 538-4531

https://dialpad.com/launch?phone=847-538-3707

6.1 MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT AND SUA ADDENDUMProvided on the following pages


July 16, 2018 Page 118

Maintenance, Support and SUA Addendum to CSSAv.5-2-2017 1

MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT AND SUA ADDENDUM

This Addendum to the Communications System and Services Agreement or other previously executed Agreement currently in force, as applicable (“Primary Agreement”) provides additional or different terms and conditions to govern the sale of Maintenance, Support and SUA II services. The terms in this Addendum are integral to and incorporated into the Primary Agreement signed by the Parties. 1. DEFINITIONS All capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein shall have the same meaning as defined in the Primary Agreement. “SUA” or “SUA II” means Motorola’s Software Upgrade Agreement program. 2. SCOPE Motorola will provide Maintenance and Support Services and/or SUA Services as further described in the applicable Statement of Work, or attachment to Motorola’s proposal for additional services. 3. TERMS AND CONDITIONS The terms of the Primary Agreement combined with the terms of this Addendum will govern the products and services offered pursuant to this Addendum. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms and conditions of the Primary Agreement and the terms and conditions of this Addendum, this Addendum takes precedence. 3.1 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT SERVICES

3.1.1 PURCHASE ORDER ACCEPTANCE. Purchase orders for additional, continued, or expanded maintenance and software support, during the Warranty Period or after the Warranty Period, become binding only when accepted in writing by Motorola.

3.1.2 START DATE. The “Start Date” for Maintenance and Support Services will be

indicated in the proposal or a cover page entitled “Service Agreement”. 3.1.3 AUTO RENEWAL. Unless the cover page or SOW specifically states a

termination date or one Party notifies the other in writing of its intention to discontinue the Services, this Agreement will renew for an additional one (1) year term on every anniversary of the Start Date. At the anniversary date, Motorola may adjust the price of the Services to reflect the renewal rate.

3.1.4 TERMINATION. Written notice of intent to terminate must be provided thirty (30)

days or more prior to the anniversary date. If Motorola provides Services after the termination or expiration of this Addendum, the terms and conditions in effect at the time of the termination or expiration will apply to those Services and Customer agrees to pay for those services on a time and materials basis at Motorola’s then effective hourly rates.


3.1.5 EQUIPMENT DEFINITION. For maintenance and support services, Equipment will be defined to mean the hardware specified in the applicable SOW or attachments to the maintenance and support proposal.

3.1.6 ADDITIONAL HARDWARE. If Customer purchases additional hardware from

Motorola that becomes part of the System, the additional hardware may be added to this Addendum and will be billed at the applicable rates after the warranty period for that additional equipment expires. Such hardware will be included in the definition of Equipment.

3.1.7 MAINTENANCE. Equipment will be maintained at levels set forth in the

manufacturer’s product manuals and routine procedures that are prescribed by Motorola will be followed. Motorola parts or parts of equal quality will be used for Equipment maintenance.

3.1.8 EQUIPMENT CONDITION. All Equipment must be in good working order on the

Start Date or when additional equipment is added to the Addendum. Upon reasonable request by Motorola, Customer will provide a complete serial and model number list of the Equipment. Customer must promptly notify Motorola in writing when any Equipment is lost, damaged, stolen or taken out of service. Customer’s obligation to pay maintenance and support fees for this Equipment will terminate at the end of the month in which Motorola receives the written notice. If Equipment cannot, in Motorola’s reasonable opinion, be properly or economically maintained for any reason, Motorola may modify the scope of Services related to that Equipment; remove that Equipment from the Agreement; or increase the price to maintain that Equipment.

3.1.9 EQUIPMENT FAILURE. Customer must promptly notify Motorola of any

Equipment failure. Motorola will respond to Customer's notification in a manner consistent with the level of Service purchased as indicated in this Addendum and applicable SOW.

3.1.10 INTRINSICALLY SAFE. Customer must specifically identify any Equipment that

is labeled intrinsically safe for use in hazardous environments. 3.1.11 EXCLUDED SERVICES.

a) Service excludes the repair or replacement of Equipment that has become defective or damaged from use in other than the normal, customary, intended, and authorized manner; use not in compliance with applicable industry standards; excessive wear and tear; or accident, liquids, power surges, neglect, acts of God or other force majeure events.

b) Unless specifically included in this Addendum, Service excludes items that are consumed in the normal operation of the Equipment, such as batteries or magnetic tapes.; upgrading or reprogramming Equipment; accessories, belt clips, battery chargers, custom or special products, modified units, or software; and repair or maintenance of any transmission line, antenna, microwave equipment, tower or tower lighting, duplexer, combiner, or multicoupler. Motorola has no obligations for any transmission medium, such as telephone lines, computer networks, the internet or the worldwide web, or for Equipment malfunction caused by the transmission medium.

3.1.12 TIME AND PLACE. Service will be provided at the location specified in this Addendum and/or the SOW. When Motorola performs maintenance, support, or installation at Customer’s location, Customer will provide Motorola, at no charge, a non-hazardous work


environment with adequate shelter, heat, light, and power and with full and free access to the Equipment. Waivers of liability from Motorola or its subcontractors will not be imposed as a site access requirement. Customer will provide all information pertaining to the hardware and software elements of any system with which the Equipment is interfacing so that Motorola may perform its Services. Unless otherwise stated in this Addendum or applicable SOW, the hours of Service will be 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., local time, excluding weekends and holidays. Unless otherwise stated in this Addendum or applicable SOW, the price for the Services exclude any charges or expenses associated with helicopter or other unusual access requirements; if these charges or expenses are reasonably incurred by Motorola in rendering the Services, Customer agrees to reimburse Motorola for those charges and expenses.

3.1.13 CUSTOMER CONTACT. Customer will provide Motorola with designated points

of contact (list of names and phone numbers) that will be available twenty-four (24) hours per day, seven (7) days per week, and an escalation procedure to enable Customer’s personnel to maintain contact, as needed, with Motorola. 3.2 SUA SERVICES

3.2.1 The Software License Agreement included as Exhibit A to the Primary Agreement applies to any Motorola Software provided as part of the SUA transactions.

3.2.2 The term of this Addendum is __________ years, commencing on _________, 201_. The SUA Price for the ___ years of services is $______________, excluding applicable sales or use taxes but including discounts as more fully set forth in the pricing pages. Because the SUA is a subscription service as more fully described in the applicable SUA Statement of Work, payment from Customer is due in advance and will not be in accordance with any Payment Milestone Schedule.

3.2.3 The System upgrade will be scheduled during the subscription period and will be performed when Motorola’s system upgrade operation resources are available. Because there might be a significant time frame between when this Addendum is executed and when a System upgrade transaction is performed, Motorola may substitute any of the promised Equipment or Software so long as the substitute is equivalent or superior to the initially promised Equipment or Software.

3.2.4 Acceptance of a SUA transaction occurs when the Equipment (if any) and Software are delivered and the SUA services are fully performed; there is no Acceptance Testing with a SUA transaction.

3.2.5 The Warranty Period for any Equipment or Motorola Software provided under a SUA transaction will commence upon shipment and not on System Acceptance or Beneficial Use, and is for a period of ninety (90) days rather than one (1) year. The ninety (90) day warranty for SUA services is set forth in the SUA Statement of Work.

3.2.6 In addition to the description of the SUA services and exclusions provided in the SUA Statement of Work, the following apply:


a) Upon reasonable request by Motorola, Customer will provide a complete

serial and model number list of the Equipment.

b) SUA services exclude the repair or replacement of Equipment that has become defective or damaged from use in other than the normal, customary, intended, and authorized manner; use not in compliance with applicable industry standards; excessive wear and tear; or accident, liquids, power surges, neglect, acts of God or other force majeure events.

c) Unless specifically included in this Addendum or the SUA Statement of Work,

SUA services exclude items that are consumed in the normal operation of the Equipment; accessories; and repair or maintenance of any transmission line, antenna, microwave equipment, tower or tower lighting, duplexer, combiner, or multicoupler. Motorola has no obligations for any transmission medium, such as telephone lines, computer networks, the internet or the worldwide web, or for Equipment malfunction caused by the transmission medium.

d) Customer will provide Motorola with designated points of contact (list of

names and phone numbers) that will be available during the performance of the SUA services.

3.2.7 The SUA annualized price is based on the fulfillment of the two year cycle. If

Customer terminates this service during a two year cycle, except for Motorola’s default, then Customer will be required to pay for the balance of payments owed for the two year cycle if a major system release has been implemented before the point of termination.

3.2.8 If Customer terminates this service and contractual commitment before the end of the __ year term, for any reason other than Motorola’s default, then the Customer will pay to Motorola a termination fee equal to the discount applied to the last three years of service payments related to the __ year commitment.

3.2.9 SUA INFLATION ADJUSTMENT. After the end of the ____ year of the SUA

service period in this Addendum, if the change in the U.S. Department of Labor, Consumer Price Index, all Items, Unadjusted Urban Areas (CPI-U) annual index for each SUA year exceeds five percent (5%), the price for the coming year's services will increase by an incremental dollar amount per the following formula: Current year's maintenance price * (actual change in the CPI - 5 percentage points). The successive year's service will increase from this new baseline by the dollar amount as described in the Pricing Exhibit. This adjustment will be calculated 60 days prior to the 12th/24th/36th, etc. anniversary of the end of the last service period in this Addendum. It will be calculated based upon the CPI for the most recent twelve month increments beginning from the most current month available as posted by the U.S. Department of Labor. The price adjustment would fix the price for the following 12 months.


4. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Addendum, any related attachments, and the Primary Agreement, constitutes the entire agreement of the Parties regarding the subject matter of this Addendum and supersedes all previous agreements, proposals, and understandings, whether written or oral, relating to this subject matter. This Addendum may be amended or modified only by a written instrument signed by authorized representatives of both Parties. The preprinted terms and conditions found on any Customer purchase or purchase order, acknowledgment or other form will not be considered an amendment or modification of this Addendum, even if a representative of each Party signs that document.

END

6.1.1 Statements of WorkSystems Upgrade Agreement II Statement of Work

Advanced Services Statement of Work


July 16, 2018 Page 119

ASTRO 25 System Upgrade Agreement II SOW October 14, 2014

1 of 8

STATEMENT OF WORK

ASTRO 25 SYSTEM UPGRADE AGREEMENT II (SUA II)

1.0 Description of Service and Obligations

1.1 As system releases become available, Motorola agrees to provide the Customer with the software, hardware and implementation services required to execute up to one system infrastructure upgrade in a two-year period for their ASTRO 25 system. At the time of the system release upgrade, Motorola will provide applicable patches and service pack updates when and if available. Currently, Motorola’s service includes 3rd party SW such as Microsoft Windows and Server OS, Red Hat Linux, Sun Solaris and any Motorola software service packs that may be available. Motorola will only provide patch releases that have been analyzed, pre-tested, and certified in a dedicated ASTRO 25 test lab to ensure that they are compatible and do not interfere with the ASTRO 25 network functionality.

1.2 The Customer will have, at its option, the choice of upgrading in either Year 1 or Year 2 of the coverage period. To be eligible for the ASTRO 25 SUA II, the ASTRO 25 system must be at system release 7.7 or later.

1.3 ASTRO 25 system releases are intended to improve the system functionality and operation from previous releases and may include some minor feature enhancements. At Motorola’s option, system releases may also include significant new feature enhancements that Motorola may offer for purchase. System release software and hardware shall be pre-tested and certified in Motorola’s Systems Integration Test lab.

1.4 The price quoted for the SUAII requires the Customer to choose a system upgrade from the list of System Release Upgrade Paths available to the Customer as per the system release upgrade chart referenced and incorporated in Appendix A. Should the Customer elect an upgrade path other than one listed in Appendix A, the Customer agrees that additional costs may be incurred to complete the implementation of the system upgrade. In this case, Motorola agrees to provide a price quotation for any additional materials and services necessary.

1.5 ASTRO 25 SUA II entitles a Customer to past software versions for the purpose of downgrading product software to a compatible release version.

1.6 The following ASTRO 25 certified system release software for the following products are covered under this ASTRO 25 SUA II: base stations, site controllers, comparators, routers, LAN switches, servers, dispatch consoles, logging equipment, network management terminals, Network Fault Management (“NFM”) products, network security devices such as firewalls and intrusion detection sensors, and associated peripheral infrastructure software.

1.7 Product programming software such as Radio Service Software (“RSS”), Configuration Service Software (“CSS”), and Customer Programming Software (“CPS”) are also covered under this SUA II.


2 of 8

1.8 ASTRO 25 SUA II makes available the subscriber radio software releases that are shipping from the factory during the SUA II coverage period. New subscriber radio options and features not previously purchased by the Customer are excluded from ASTRO 25 SUA II coverage. Additionally, subscriber software installation and reprogramming are excluded from the ASTRO 25 SUA II coverage.

1.9 Motorola will provide certified hardware version updates and/or replacements necessary to upgrade the system with an equivalent level of functionality up to once in a two-year period. Hardware will be upgraded and/or replaced if required to maintain the existing feature and functionality. Any updates to hardware versions and/or replacement hardware required to support new features or those not specifically required to maintain existing functionality are not included. Unless otherwise stated, platform migrations such as, but not limited to, stations, consoles, backhaul, civil, network changes and additions, and managed services are not included.

1.10 The following hardware components, if originally provided by Motorola, are eligible for full product replacement when necessary per the system release upgrade :

1.10.1 Servers 1.10.2 PC Workstations 1.10.3 Routers 1.10.4 LAN Switches

1.11 The following hardware components, if originally provided by Motorola, are eligible for board-level replacement when necessary per the system release upgrade. A “board-level replacement” is defined as any Field Replaceable Unit (“FRU”) for the products listed below:

1.11.1 GTR 8000 Base Stations 1.11.2 GCP 8000 Site Controllers 1.11.3 GCM 8000 Comparators 1.11.4 MCC 7500 Console Operator Positions 1.11.5 STR 3000 Base Stations 1.11.6 Quantar Base Stations 1.11.7 Centracom Gold Elite Console Operator Interface Electronics 1.11.8 Centracom Gold Elite Central Electronics Banks 1.11.9 Ambassador Electronics Banks 1.11.10 Motorola Gold Elite Gateways 1.11.11 ASTROTAC Comparators 1.11.12 PSC 9600 Site Controllers 1.11.13 PBX Switches for Telephone Interconnect 1.11.14 NFM/NFM XC/MOSCAD RTU

1.12 The ASTRO 25 SUA II does not cover all products. Refer to section 3.0 for exclusions and

limitations.

1.13 Motorola will provide implementation services necessary to upgrade the system to a future system release with an equivalent level of functionality up to once in a two-year period. Any implementation services that are not directly required to support the system upgrade are not included. Unless otherwise stated, implementation services necessary for system expansions, platform migrations, and/or new features or functionality that are implemented concurrent with the system upgrade are not included.


3 of 8

1.14 As system releases become available, Motorola will provide up to once in a two-year period the following software design and technical resources necessary to complete system release upgrades:

1.14.1 Review infrastructure system audit data as needed. 1.14.2 Identify additional system equipment needed to implement a system release, if

applicable. 1.14.3 Complete a proposal defining the system release, equipment requirements, installation

plan, and impact to system users. 1.14.4 Advise Customer of probable impact to system users during the actual field upgrade

implementation. 1.14.5 Program management support required to perform the system upgrade. 1.14.6 Field installation labor required to perform the system upgrade. 1.14.7 Upgrade operations engineering labor required to perform the system upgrade.

1.15 ASTRO 25 SUA II pricing is based on the system configuration outlined in Appendix B. This configuration is to be reviewed annually from the contract effective date. Any change in system configuration may require an ASTRO 25 SUA II price adjustment.

1.16 The ASTRO 25 SUA II applies only to system release upgrades within the ASTRO 25 7.x platform.

1.17 Motorola will issue Software Maintenance Agreement (“SMA”) bulletins on an annual basis and post them in soft copy on a designated extranet site for Customer access. Standard and optional features for a given ASTRO 25 system release are listed in the SMA bulletin.

2.0 Upgrade Elements and Corresponding Party Responsibilities

2.1 Upgrade Planning and Preparation: All items listed in this section are to be completed at least 6 months prior to a scheduled upgrade.

2.1.1 Motorola responsibilities

2.1.1.1 Obtain and review infrastructure system audit data as needed. 2.1.1.2 Identify additional system equipment needed to implement a system release, if

applicable. 2.1.1.3 Complete a proposal defining the system release, equipment requirements,

installation plan, and impact to system users. 2.1.1.4 Advise Customer of probable impact to system users during the actual field

upgrade implementation. 2.1.1.5 Inform Customer of high speed internet connection requirements. 2.1.1.6 Assign program management support required to perform the system upgrade. 2.1.1.7 Assign field installation labor required to perform the system upgrade. 2.1.1.8 Assign upgrade operations engineering labor required to perform the system

upgrade. 2.1.1.9 Deliver release impact and change management training to the primary zone

core owners, outlining the changes to their system as a result of the upgrade path elected. This training needs to be completed at least 12 weeks prior to the scheduled upgrade. This training will not be provided separately for user agencies who reside on a zone core owned by another entity. Unless


4 of 8

specifically stated in this document, Motorola will provide this training only once per system.

2.1.2 Customer responsibilities 2.1.2.1 Contact Motorola to schedule and engage the appropriate Motorola resources

for a system release upgrade. 2.1.2.2 Provide high-speed internet connectivity at the zone core site(s) for use by

Motorola to perform remote upgrades and diagnostics. High-speed internet connectivity must be provided at least 12 weeks prior to the scheduled upgrade. In the event access to a high-speed connection is unavailable, Customer may be billed additional costs to execute the system release upgrade.

2.1.2.3 Assist in site walks of the system during the system audit when necessary. 2.1.2.4 Provide a list of any FRUs and/or spare hardware to be included in the system

release upgrade when applicable. 2.1.2.5 Purchase any additional software and hardware necessary to implement

optional system release features or system expansions. 2.1.2.6 Provide or purchase labor to implement optional system release features or

system expansions. 2.1.2.7 Participate in release impact training at least 12 weeks prior to the scheduled

upgrade. This applies only to primary zone core owners. It is the zone core owner’s responsibility to contact and include any user agencies that need to be trained or to act as a training agency for those users not included.

2.2 System Readiness Checkpoint: All items listed in this section must be completed at least 30 days prior to a scheduled upgrade.

2.2.1 Motorola responsibilities 2.2.1.1 Perform appropriate system backups. 2.2.1.2 Work with the Customer to validate that all system maintenance is current. 2.2.1.3 Work with the Customer to validate that all available patches and antivirus

updates have been updated on the customer’s system.

2.2.2 Customer responsibilities 2.2.2.1 Validate system maintenance is current. 2.2.2.2 Validate that all available patches and antivirus updates to their system have

been completed.

2.3 System Upgrade

2.3.1 Motorola responsibilities 2.3.1.1 Perform system infrastructure upgrade in accordance with the system elements

outlined in this SOW.

2.3.2 Customer responsibilities 2.3.2.1 Inform system users of software upgrade plans and scheduled system

downtime.


5 of 8

2.3.2.2 Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide software upgrade services.

2.4 Upgrade Completion

2.4.1 Motorola responsibilities 2.4.1.1 Validate all system upgrade deliverables are complete as contractually required. 2.4.1.2 Deliver post upgrade implementation training to the customer as needed, up to

once per system. 2.4.1.3 Obtain upgrade completion sign off from the customer.

2.4.2 Customer Responsibilities

2.4.2.1 Cooperate with Motorola in efforts to complete any post upgrade punch list items as needed.

2.4.2.2 Cooperate with Motorola to provide relevant post upgrade implementation training as needed. This applies only to primary zone core owners. It is the zone core owner’s responsibility to contact and include any user agencies that need to be trained or to act as a training agency for those users not included.

2.4.2.3 Provide Motorola with upgrade completion sign off.

3.0 Exclusions and Limitations

3.1 The parties agree that Systems that have non-standard configurations that have not been certified by Motorola Systems Integration Testing are specifically excluded from the ASTRO 25 SUA II unless otherwise agreed in writing by Motorola and included in this SOW.

3.2 The parties acknowledge and agree that the ASTRO 25 SUA II does not cover the following products:

MCC5500 Dispatch Consoles MIP5000 Dispatch Consoles Plant/E911 Systems MOTOBRIDGE Solutions ARC 4000 Systems Motorola Public Sector Applications Software (“PSA”) Custom SW, CAD, Records Management Software Data Radio Devices Mobile computing devices such as Laptops Non-Motorola two-way radio subscriber products Genesis Products Point-to-point products such as microwave terminals and association multiplex equipment

3.3 ASTRO 25 SUA II does not cover any hardware or software supplied to the Customer when purchased directly from a third party, unless specifically included in this SOW.

3.4 ASTRO 25 SUA II does not cover software support for virus attacks or other applications that are not part of the ASTRO 25 system, or unauthorized modifications or other misuse of the covered software. Motorola is not responsible for management of anti-virus or other security applications (such as Norton).


6 of 8

3.5 Upgrades for equipment add-ons or expansions during the term of this ASTRO 25 SUA II are not included in the coverage of this SOW unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Motorola.

4.0 Special provisions

4.1 Customer acknowledges that if its System has a Special Product Feature, additional engineering may be required to prevent an installed system release from overwriting the Special Product Feature. Upon request, Motorola will determine whether a Special Product Feature can be incorporated into a system release and whether additional engineering effort is required. If additional engineering is required Motorola will issue a change order for the change in scope and associated increase in the price for the ASTRO 25 SUA II.

4.2 Customer will only use the software (including any System Releases) in accordance with the applicable Software License Agreement.

4.3 ASTRO 25 SUA II services do not include repair or replacement of hardware or software that is necessary due to defects that are not corrected by the system release, nor does it include repair or replacement of defects resulting from any nonstandard, improper use or conditions; or from unauthorized installation of software.

4.4 ASTRO 25 SUA II coverage and the parties’ responsibilities described in this Statement of Work will automatically terminate if Motorola no longer supports the ASTRO 25 7.x software version in the Customer’s system or discontinues the ASTRO 25 SUA II program; in either case, Motorola will refund to Customer any prepaid fees for ASTRO 25 SUA II services applicable to the terminated period.

4.5 If Customer cancels a scheduled upgrade within less than 12 weeks of the scheduled on site date, Motorola reserves the right to charge the Customer a cancellation fee equivalent to the cost of the pre-planning efforts completed by the Motorola Solutions Upgrade Operations Team.

4.6 The SUA II annualized price is based on the fulfillment of the two year term. If Customer terminates, except if Motorola is the defaulting party, Customer will be required to pay for the balance of payments owed if a system release upgrade has been taken prior to the point of termination.


7 of 8

Appendix A – ASTRO 25 System Release Upgrade Paths

Release Platform Date Release Available Upgrade Paths Oct-05 R7.0

Direct Migration to Current Release **

Jun-06 R7.1 Dec-06 R7.2 Mar-07 R7.1.1 Dec-07 R7.4 Jun-08 R7.5 Dec-08 R7.6

Jun-09 R7.7 7.14 Migration**

Direct Migration to Current Release**

Jan-10 R7.8 N/A Dec-10 R7.9 7.13* Aug-11 R7.11 7.14 Mar-12 R7.12 N/A Nov-12 R7.13 7.14 7.15 Nov-13 R7.14 7.15 7.16 Nov-14 R7.15 7.16 7.17 (planned) Nov-15 R7.16 7.17 (planned) 7.18 (planned) Nov-16 R7.17 (planned) 7.18 (planned) 7.19 (planned)

* Must currently be on T5220 servers ** Point release migrations will incur additional costs above the standard SUA pricing

The information contained herein is provided for information purposes only and is intended only to outline Motorola’s presently anticipated general technology direction. The information in the roadmap is not a commitment or an obligation to deliver any product, product feature or software functionality and Motorola reserves the right to make changes to the content and timing of any product, product feature or software release. Prices for any future product or software included herein will be separately negotiated when and if such product or software becomes available.

The most current eligible system release upgrade paths can be found in the most recent SMA bulletin.


8 of 8

Appendix B - System Pricing Configuration This configuration is to be reviewed annually from the contract effective date. Any change in system configuration may require an ASTRO 25 SUA II price adjustment.

Core Master Site Configuration Qty Zones in Operation (Including DSR and Dark Master Sites) 0 Zone Features: IV&D, TDMA, Telephone Interconnect, CNI, HPD, CSMS, IA, POP25, Text Messaging, Outdoor Location, ISSI 8000, InfoVista, KMF/OTAR 0

RF System Voice RF Sites & RF Simulcast Sites (including Prime Sites) 5 Repeaters/Stations (FDMA) 0 Repeaters/Stations (TDMA) 30 HPD RF Sites 0 HPD Stations 0 Dispatch Console System Dispatch Sites 0 Gold Elite Operator Positions 0 MCC 7500 Operator Positions (GPIOM) 0 MCC 7500 Operator Positions (VPM) 0 Conventional Channel Gateways (CCGW) 0 Conventional Site Controllers (GCP 8000 Controller) 0 Logging System Number of AIS Servers 0 Number of Voice Logging Recorder 0 Number of Logging Replay Clients 0 Network Management and MOSCAD NFM Network Management Clients 0 MOSCAD NFM Systems 0 MOSCAD NFM RTUs 5 MOSCAD NFM Clients 0 Fire Station Alerting (FSA) FSA Systems 0 FSA RTUs 0 FSA Clients 0 Fire Station Alerting (FSA) Voice Subscribers non-APX 0 Voice Subscribers APX 0 HPD Subscribers 0 Computing and Networking Hardware (for SUA / SUA II, actual replacement qty may be less than shown) Workstations 0 Servers (i.e. CAM) 0 Firewall 0 LAN Switches 5 Routers 10

September 2016

Advanced Services

Statement of Work

Version 1.2

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 2

Table of Contents

Advanced Services 3

Customer Support Plan (CSP) 3

Centralized Service Delivery 3

Field Service Delivery 4

Network Hardware Repair 4

Security Management Operations 5

Appendix A: Network Event Monitoring Statement of Work 6

Appendix B: Technical Support Statement of Work 12

Appendix C: Network Hardware Repair Statement of Work 17

Appendix D: Remote Security Patch Installation Statement of Work 20

Appendix E: OnSite Support Statement of Work 25

Appendix F: Annual Preventive Maintenance Statement of Work 29

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 3

This Statement of Work (SOW), including all of its subsections and attachments is an integral part of the Services Agreement or other signed agreement between Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola) and Customer (“Agreement”) and is subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the Agreement.

Advanced Services are Network Event Monitoring, Technical Support, Network Hardware Repair, Remote Security Patch Installation, OnSite Support and Annual Preventive Maintenance. Each of these services are summarized below and expanded upon in the appendices A, B, C, D, E and F. In the event of a conflict between the Sections below and an individual SOW Subsection, the individual SOW Subsection prevails.

Advanced Services Motorola’s Advanced Services are designed for customers who would benefit from Motorola’s support experience. Advanced Services are delivered through a combination of centralized resources within Motorola’s Solutions Support Center (SSC) collaborating with authorized local field services delivery resources that are experienced in managing mission critical networks and associated technologies. The MSI SSC operates 24 x 7 x 365, leveraging field resources that are either dedicated to the network or engaged as needed.

Advanced Services applies to fixed end communications network equipment located at the network core, RF site and dispatch sites. Advanced Services do not include maintenance of mobile or portable devices, or network backhaul.

The services described in this SOW will be performed in accordance with the Customer Support Plan (CSP) agreed upon by the parties.

The CSP will define the system elements covered under Advanced Services. The division of responsibilities between Motorola and Customer shall be defined and documented in the Appendices of this SOW, the Advanced Services CSP and other portions of the Agreement.

Customer Support Plan (CSP) The Advanced Services Statement of Work summarizes Motorola’s delivery approach and standard goals. Since individual customer technologies, systems, operating environments, and operational capabilities differ, the outlined services approach in the Advanced Services SOW will be adapted to each Customer’s own environment and unique needs via the CSP.

The CSP is a critical component of this SOW and, once created, will automatically become integrated into this SOW by this reference. Motorola and Customer will collaborate to define the Customer-specific processes, procedures, network information, and other relevant support details required to perform the Services set forth in the Advanced Services SOW.

Centralized Service Delivery Network Event Monitoring provides for real time continuous event management for radio communications networks. The SSC Network Operations Center utilizes sophisticated tools for remote monitoring and event characterization of customer communications networks. When an event is detected, technologists acknowledge and assess the situation, and initiate a defined response. Appendix A contains the SOW for Network Event Monitoring.

Technical Support provides telephone consultation for technical issues that require a high level of ASTRO 25 network experience and troubleshooting capabilities. Technical Support is delivered through the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) by a staff of technical support specialists skilled in diagnosis and swift resolution of infrastructure performance and operational issues.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 4

Motorola applies leading industry standards in recording, monitoring, escalating and reporting for Technical Support calls from its contracted customers, reflecting the importance of maintaining mission critical systems. Appendix B contains the SOW for Technical Support.

The Service Desk provides a single point of contact for all Service related items, including communications between Customer, Third-Party Subcontractors, and Motorola. The Service Desk provides an ingress/egress point for Service Requests, Service Incidents, Changes, and Dispatch. All incoming transactions through the Service Desk are recorded, tracked and updated through the Motorola Customer Relationship Management (CRM) system. Key responsibilities are: Documentation of customer inquiries, requests, concerns and related tickets. Tracking and resolution of issues, and timely communication with all stakeholders is based on the nature of the incident and the requirements of the CSP. The Services Desk will manage service requests received from authorized parties and will coordinate the appropriate response with Customer and third parties, as necessary.

Field Service Delivery Advanced Services are provided by authorized local field Services delivery resources. Annual Preventive Maintenance and OnSite Support are both managed from the SSC, but delivered by authorized local field services resources.

OnSite Support provides local, trained and qualified technicians who arrive at the customer location upon a dispatch service call to diagnose and restore the communications network. This involves running diagnostics on the hardware or FRU (Field Replacement Unit) and replacing defective infrastructure or FRU. The system technician will respond to the customer location based on pre-defined severity levels. Appendix E contains the SOW for Onsite Support.

Annual Preventive Maintenance Service provides proactive, regularly scheduled operational test and alignment of infrastructure and network components to continually meet original manufacturer’s specifications. Certified field technicians perform hands-on examination and diagnostics of network equipment on a routine and prescribed basis. Appendix F contains the SOW for Annual Preventive Maintenance.

Network Hardware Repair Motorola provides a hardware repair service for all of the Motorola and select third-party infrastructure equipment supplied by Motorola. The Motorola authorized Repair Depot manages and performs the repair of Motorola supplied equipment as well as coordinating the equipment repair logistics process. Appendix C contains the SOW for Network Hardware Repair.

Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement is a purchasable option under which Motorola will provide Customer with an advanced replacement unit(s) or Field Replacement Units (FRU’s) as they are available in exchange for Customer’s malfunctioning equipment. Malfunctioning equipment will be evaluated and repaired by the infrastructure repair depot and returned to depot’s FRU inventory upon completion of repair. Customers who prefer to maintain their existing FRU inventory have an option to request a “Loaner” FRU while their unit is being repaired. If purchased, an appendix with the Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement SOW will be included at the end of this document.

Security Management Operations Remote Security Patch Installation

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 5

Motorola maintains a dedicated vetting lab for each supported ASTRO 25 release for the purpose of pre-testing security updates. In some cases, when appropriate, Motorola will make the updates available to outside vendors, allow them to test, and then incorporate those results into this offering. Once tested, Motorola posts the updates to a secured extranet website and sends an email notification to the customer. If there are any recommended configuration changes, warnings, or workarounds, Motorola will provide detailed documentation along with the updates on the website. In addition to testing the security updates, Remote Security Patch Installation includes remote installation of the updates. Appendix D contains the SOW for Remote Security Patch Installation.

Security Monitoring

ASTRO 25 Security Monitoring is a purchasable solution that provides 24x7x365 monitoring of the radio network security elements by specialized security technologists with years of experience working with ASTRO 25 mission-critical networks. For highly complex or unusual security events, our technologists have direct and immediate access to Motorola engineers for rapid resolution. If purchased, an appendix with the Security Monitoring SOW will be included at the end of this document.

My View Portal MyView Portal is a web-based platform that provides a transparent, single source view of network maintenance and operations along with historical system and service delivery information. It can be accessed from a desktop, laptop or tablet web browser. Event Monitoring Reports: See resolution status for incidents and notifications by severity level. Technical Support: View case status details to compare them to committed response times. OnSite Support: Observe case details by severity level and track the progress of onsite support issue resolution. Annual Preventive Maintenance: Access the maintenance status for all sites and quickly identify actions needed to take to optimize system performance. Network Hardware Repair: Track return material authorizations (RMAs) shipped to our repair depot and eliminate the need to call for status updates. Security Patching: Receive automated patch downloads and status on competed updates. Trending Reports: Access up to 13 months of historical data and system activity to analyze case management. Asset and Contract Information: View all the assets purchased for the network, recent orders, and contract information. The data presented in MyView Portal is in support of the appendix SOW's which provide the terms of any service delivery commitments associated with this data.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 6

Appendix A: Network Event Monitoring Statement of Work Network Event Monitoring provides real-time fault monitoring for radio communications networks on a continuous basis. Network Event Monitoring utilizes sophisticated tools for remote monitoring and event characterization of your communications networks. When an event is detected, skilled technologists acknowledge and assess the situation, and initiate a defined response.

The terms and conditions of this Statement of Work (SOW) are an integral part of Motorola's Service Agreement or other applicable agreement to which it is attached and made a part thereof by this reference.

1.0 Description of Network Event Monitoring Services

Network Event Monitoring is a service designed to monitor elements of a communication system for events, as set forth in the Monitored Elements Table. When the SSC detects an event, then, based on the severity of the event, trained technologists acknowledge and remotely diagnose the event and initiate an appropriate response in accordance with the customer handling procedure. Appropriate responses could include, but are not limited to, continuing to monitor the event for further development, attempting remote remediation via engagement of Technical Support resources, or initiating dispatch of a Field Servicer (“Servicer”) for onsite remediation if required.

1.1 Availability

Network Event Monitoring is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Network Event Monitoring availability is based on the level of contracted service and defined in the Customer Support Plan (CSP).

1.2 Geographic Availability

Network Event Monitoring is a globally provided service unless limited by data export control regulations. Timeframes are based on the customer’s local time zone.

1.3 Inclusions

Network Event Monitoring can be delivered on Motorola sold infrastructure as stated in the Monitored Elements Table.

1.4 Limitations and Exclusions

1.4.1 Does not include monitoring of anything outside of the radio network or monitoring of infrastructure provided by a third party, unless specifically stated. Monitored elements must be within the radio network and capable of sending traps to the Unified Event Manager (UEM).

1.4.2 Additional support charges above and beyond the contracted service agreement fees may apply if Motorola determines that system faults were caused by the customer making changes to critical system parameters.

1.4.3 The following activities are outside the scope of the Network Monitoring service, but are optional services that are available to remote Network Monitoring customers at an additional cost:

1.4.3.1 Emergency on-site visits required to resolve technical issues that cannot be

resolved by SSC working remotely with the local customer technical resource.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 7

1.4.3.2 System installations, upgrades, and expansions. 1.4.3.3 Customer training. 1.4.3.4 Hardware repair and/or exchange. 1.4.3.5 Network security services. 1.4.3.6 Network transport (WAN ports, WAN cloud, redundant paths). 1.4.3.7 Information Assurance. 1.4.3.8 Any services not expressly included in this statement of work.

1.4.4 Reference the event catalogue to confirm monitored equipment.

1.5 Motorola has the following responsibilities:

1.5.1. Provide dedicated connectivity through a network connection necessary for monitoring communication networks. The Connectivity Matrix further describes the connectivity options.

1.5.2 If determined necessary by Motorola, provide Motorola owned equipment for monitoring system elements. If Motorola installs or replaces Motorola owned equipment, the type of equipment and location installed is listed in the Motorola Owned & Supplied Equipment Table.

1.5.3 Verify connectivity and event monitoring prior to system acceptance or start date.

1.5.4 Monitor system continuously during hours designated in the CSP in accordance with the pre-defined times specified in section 1.6.2 below.

1.5.5 Remotely access the customer’s system to perform remote diagnosis as permitted by customer pursuant to section 1.6.4.

1.5.6 Create a case, as necessary. Gather information to perform the following:

1.5.6.1 Characterize the issue

1.5.6.2 Determine a plan of action

1.5.6.3 Assign and track the case to resolution.

1.5.7 Cooperate with customer to coordinate transition of monitoring responsibilities between Motorola and customer as specified in section 1.6.13 and 1.6.13.1.

1.5.8 Maintain communication as needed with the customer in the field until resolution of the case

1.6 The Customer has the following responsibilities:

1.6.2 Allow Motorola continuous remote access to enable the monitoring service.

1.6.3 Provide continuous utility service to any Motorola equipment installed or utilized at customer’s premises to support delivery of the service. Customer acknowledges Risk of loss to any Equipment provided to Customer as part of the Services will reside with Customer upon delivery and will remain with Customer until Equipment is returned to Motorola or its authorized representative.

1.6.4 Provide Motorola with pre-defined customer information and preferences prior to Start Date necessary to complete the CSP, including, but not limited to:

1.6.4.1 Case notification preferences and procedure

1.6.4.2 Repair Verification Preference and procedure

1.6.4.3 Database and escalation procedure forms.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 8

1.6.4.4 Submit changes in any information supplied to Motorola and included in the CSP to the CSM.

1.6.5 Provide the following information when initiating a service request:

1.6.5.1 Assigned system ID number

1.6.5.2 Problem description and site location

1.6.5.3 Other pertinent information requested by Motorola to open a Case.

1.6.6 Notify the SSC when customer performs any activity that impacts the system. (Activity that impacts the system may include, but is not limited to, installing software or hardware upgrades, performing upgrades to the network, renaming elements or devices within the network, or taking down part of the system to perform maintenance.)

1.6.7 Allow Servicers access to equipment (including any connectivity or monitoring equipment) if remote service is not possible.

1.6.8 Allow Servicers access to remove Motorola owned monitoring equipment upon cancellation of service.

1.6.9 Provide all customer managed passwords required to access the customer’s system to Motorola upon request or when opening a case to request service support or enable response to a technical issue.

1.6.10 Pay additional support charges above and beyond the contracted service agreements that may apply if it is determined that system faults were caused by the customer making changes to critical system parameters

1.6.11 Obtain at Customer’s cost all third party consents or licenses required to enable Motorola to provide the monitoring service.

1.6.12 Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide the services described in this SOW.

1.6.13 Contact Motorola to coordinate transition of monitoring when monitoring responsibility is to be transferred to or from Motorola. (I.e. normal business hours to after-hours monitoring) as set forth in pre-defined information provided by customer CSP.

1.6.13.1 Upon contact, customer must provide customer name, site id, status on any open cases, severity level, and brief description of case and action plan to Motorola.

1.6.14 Acknowledge that cases will be handled in accordance with the times and priorities as defined in the Event Definition table- Appendix A .

1.6.15 Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide the Network Event Monitoring.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 9

Engagement Matrix

The event types are based on the defined levels as follows:

Severity Level

Severity Definition Engagement Times

1 This is defined as a critical/major incident that causes the system and/or infrastructure to experience a loss of call processing functionality and no work-around or immediate solution is available.

The following are examples of this kind of failure:

o 33% of call processing resources impaired

o Remote Site/sub-system severed

o Site Environment alarms:

o Smoke

o Unauthorized access

o Temperature

o Power failure

Response provided 24 hours, 7 days a week, including US Holidays.

2 This is defined as a moderate/minor incident that causes the system to operate with a continuous reduction in capacity or functionality of core services (core services include, voice, data or network management).


o Less than 33% of call processing resources impaired

o Failure of a single redundant component

Response provided 8 x 5 on standard business days, which is normally Monday through Friday 8AM to 5PM, excluding US Holidays.

3 This is defined as a minor issue, which has little or no impact on the functionality, efficiency or usability of core services. The following are examples of this kind of severity:

o Faults that have no impact in how the user perceives the system to work

o Intermittent issues

o Requests for information

Response provided 8 x 5 on standard business days, which is normally Monday through Friday 8AM to 5PM, excluding US Holidays.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 10

o Preventive Maintenance or upgrade related work

Connectivity Matrix

Request connectivity 8 weeks in advance of service start date

System Type Connectivity Set up and Maintenance

ASTRO® 25 Internet VPN Motorola ASTRO® 25 T1 Motorola

Motorola Owned & Supplied Equipment Table

Equipment Type Location Installed

Firewall/Router Master Site Service Delivery Management Server Master Site for each Zone

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 11

Monitored Elements Table

*Some or all of the above equipment may be monitored depending on system configuration and need. Other equipment (not listed) may be monitored as an option, consult with your Customer Support Manager for details.

Master Site Infrastructure RF Site Equipment Dispatch Site Equipment

Servers & Back up Servers Channels Consoles

MOSCAD (digital inputs & RS232 serial alarms)

MOSCAD (digital inputs & RS232 serial alarms)

AIS Servers

TRAK RF Site Communication Path

Operator Position (OP)

Core LAN Switch Switch Motorola Gold Elite Gateway (MGEG)

Packet Data Gateway (PDG) Site Controller Call Processor

Radio Network Gateway (RNG) Router Logging Replay Station (only within the Radio Network Interface “RNI”)

Zone Database Server (ZDS) Gateway Router Ambassador (AMB)

Gateway Router Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Client Station

Controller – Zone & Domain Firewall Voice Processing Module

(VPM)

Firewall Manager Servers SmartX Site Converter (only the converter, not the legacy sites)

MCC 7500 IP Logging Recorders

Air Traffic Router (ATR) MCC 7100 (only within the Radio Network Interface “RNI”)

Unified Event Manager (UEM) Conventional Channel Gateway (CCGW)

Zone Statistical Server (ZSS)

Install Server

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 12

Appendix B: Technical Support Statement of Work Motorola’s Technical Support service provides telephone consultation for technical issues that require a high level of ASTRO 25 network knowledge and troubleshooting capabilities. Remote Technical Support is delivered through the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) by a staff of technical support specialists skilled in diagnosis and swift resolution of infrastructure performance and operational issues.

Motorola applies leading industry standards in recording, monitoring, escalating and reporting for Technical Support calls from its contracted customers, reflecting the importance of maintaining mission critical systems.

1.1 Description of Technical Support Services

Motorola’s Solutions Support Center’s (SSC) primary goal is Customer Issue Resolution (CIR), providing Incident Restoration and Service Request Fulfillment on Motorola’s currently supported infrastructure. This team of highly skilled, knowledgeable, and experienced specialists is available to the customer as an integrated part of the support and technical issue resolution process. The SSC remotely supports the customer and works with but not limited to fault diagnostics tools, simulation networks and fault database search engines.

Technical Support is available Monday - Friday 8:00am - 5:00pm local site time and 24 hours a day, 7 days a week for Severity 1 Incidents. Technical Support availability for severity 2, 3 and 4 incidents is outlined in the Severity Level Response Goals. Calls requiring incidents or service requests will be logged in Motorola’s Customer Relationship Management (CRM) system. This helps ensure that technical issues are prioritized, updated, tracked and escalated as necessary, until resolution. Technical Support Operations assigns the impact level in accordance with the agreed Severity Level Definitions stated in this document.

Motorola will track the progress of each case from initial capture to resolution. Motorola will advise and inform the customer of the case progress and tasks that require further investigation and assistance from the customer’s technical resources.

This service requires the customer to provide a suitably trained technical resource that delivers maintenance and support to the customer’s system, and who is familiar with the operation of that system. Motorola provides technical consultants to support the local resource in the timely closure of infrastructure, performance and operational issues.

1.2 Scope

Technical Support service is available Monday - Friday 8:00am - 5:00pm local site time and 24 hours a day, 7 days a week for Severity 1 Incidents. See Severity Level Definitions.

1.3 Inclusions

Technical Support service will be delivered on Motorola sold infrastructure including integrated 3rd party products.


The following activities are outside the scope of the Technical Support service, but are optional services that are available to remote Technical Support customers at an additional cost:

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 13

1.4.1 Emergency on-site visits required to resolve technical issues that cannot be resolved with the SSC working remotely with the local customer technical resource.

1.4.2 Third party support for equipment not sold by Motorola.

1.4.3 System installations, upgrades, and expansions. 1.4.4 Customer training. 1.4.5 Hardware repair and/or exchange. 1.4.6 Network security services. 1.4.7 Network transport management. 1.4.8 Motorola services not included in this statement of work. 1.4.9 Any technical support required as a result of a virus or unwanted intrusion is excluded if the system is not protected against these security threats by Motorola’s Pre-tested Security Update Service when applicable.


1.5.1. Provide availability to the Motorola Solution Support Center (800-221-7144), 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to respond to Customer’s requests for Severity 1 support. Refer to Severity Level Response Time Goals for Severity 2, 3 and 4 response times.

1.5.2. Respond initially to Incidents and Technical Service Requests in accordance with the response times set forth in the Severity Level Response Time Goals section of this document and the severity level defined in the Severity Level Definitions section of this document.

1.5.3. Provide caller a plan of action outlining additional requirements, activities or information required to achieve restoral/fulfillment.

1.5.4. Maintain communication with the customer in the field as needed until resolution of the case

1.5.5. Coordinate technical resolutions with agreed upon third party vendors, as needed.

1.5.6. Manage functionally escalated support issues to additional Motorola technical resources, as applicable.

1.5.7. Determine, in its sole discretion, when a case requires more than the Technical Support services described in this SOW and notify customer of an alternative course of action.

1.6. The Customer has the following responsibilities:

1.6.1. Provide Motorola with pre-defined information prior to contract start date necessary to complete Customer Support Plan (CSP).

1.6.2. Submit changes in any information supplied in the Customer Support Plan (CSP) to the Customer Support Manager (CSM).

1.6.3. Contact the SSC in order to engage the Technical Support service, providing the necessary information for proper entitlement services. Including but not limited to the name of contact, name of customer, system ID number, site(s) in question, and brief description of the problem including pertinent information for initial issue characterization.

1.6.4. Maintain suitable trained technical resources that provide field maintenance and technical maintenance services to the system, and who are familiar with the operation of that system.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 14

1.6.5. Supply suitably skilled and trained on-site presence when requested by the SSC.

1.6.6. Validate issue resolution prior to close of the case in a timely manner.

1.6.7. Acknowledge that cases will be handled in accordance with the times and priorities as defined in the Severity Level Definitions and in the Severity Level Response Time Goals section in this document.

1.6.8. Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide the Technical Support

1.6.9 Obtain at Customer’s cost all third party consents or licenses required to enable Motorola to provide the Service.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 15

1.7 Severity Level Definitions

The following severity level definitions will be used to determine the maximum response times:

Severity Level

Severity Definition

Severity 1 This is defined as a failure that causes the system and/or infrastructure a loss of voice functionality and no work-around or immediate solution is available.


• 33% of call processing resources impaired • Site Environment alarms:

o Smoke, o Unauthorized access o Temperature o Power failure

Severity 2 This is defined as a fault that causes the system to operate with a continuous reduction in capacity or functionality of core services (core services consist of: Voice, data or network management).


₀ Less than 33% of call processing resources impaired ₀ Failure of a single redundant component

Severity 3 This is defined as a fault which reduces the functionality, efficiency or usability of core services (voice, data and network management) and there is a viable work-around in place.

The following are examples of this kind of severity:

₀ Intermittent faults that are infrequent and minor impact to core services

₀ Statistical reporting problems

Severity 4 This is defined as a minor issue, which has little or no impact on the functionality, efficiency or usability of core services. The following are examples of this kind of severity:

₀ Faults resulting in minor functions or features being unsupported or unreliable in ways that are not noticeable to the user.

₀ Faults that have no impact in how the user perceives the system to work.

₀ Cosmetic issues. ₀ Requests for information.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 16

1.8 Severity Level Response Goals

The response times are based on the defined severity levels as follows:

Severity Level Response Time

Severity 1 A Motorola SSC Technician will make contact with the customer technical representative within one hour of the request for support being logged in the issue management system. Continual effort will be maintained to restore the system or provide a workaround resolution. Response provided 24 x 7.

Severity 2 A Motorola SSC Technician will make contact with the customer technical representative within four hours of the request for support being logged at the issue management system. Response provided 8 x 5 on standard business days, which is normally Monday through Friday 8AM to 5PM, excluding US Holidays.

Severity 3 A Motorola SSC Technician will make contact with the customer technical representative within the next business day of the request for support being logged at the issue management system. Response provided 8 x 5 on standard business days, which is normally Monday through Friday 8AM to 5PM, excluding US Holidays.

Severity 4 A Motorola SSC Technician will make contact with the customer technical representative within the next business day of the request for support being logged at the issue management system. Response provided 8 x 5 on standard business days, which is normally Monday through Friday 8AM to 5PM, excluding US Holidays.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 17

Appendix C: Network Hardware Repair Statement of Work Motorola provides a hardware repair service for all of the Motorola and select third-party infrastructure equipment supplied by Motorola. The Motorola authorized Repair Depot manages and performs the repair of Motorola supplied equipment as well as coordinating the equipment repair logistics process.

1.1 Description of Services

Infrastructure components are repaired at a Motorola authorized Infrastructure Depot Operations (IDO). At Motorola’s discretion, select third party Infrastructure may be sent to the original equipment manufacturer or third party vendor for repair.

1.2 Scope

Repair Authorizations are obtained by contacting the Solutions Support Center (SSC) which is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Repair authorizations can also be obtained online via Motorola Online at https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com, under Repair Status/Submit Infrastructure RA.

1.3 Inclusions

Network Hardware Repair is available on Motorola sold communication systems which may include some aspect of third party hardware and software. Motorola will make a “commercially reasonable effort” to repair Motorola manufactured infrastructure products for seven years after product cancellation.

1.4 Exclusions

If infrastructure is no longer supported by Motorola, the original equipment manufacturer or a third party vendor, Motorola may return said equipment to the customer without repair or replacement. The following items are excluded from Network Hardware Repair:

1.4.1 All Motorola infrastructure hardware over seven (7) years from product cancellation date.

1.4.2. All Third party infrastructure hardware over two (2) years from product cancellation date.

1.4.3 All Broadband infrastructure over three (3) years from product cancellation date

1.4.4 Physically damaged infrastructure.

1.4.5 Third party equipment not shipped by Motorola

1.4.6 Consumable items including, but not limited to, batteries, connectors, cables, toner/ink cartridges, tower lighting, laptop computers, monitors, keyboards and mouse.

1.4.7 Video retrieval from Digital In-Car Video equipment.

1.4.8 Infrastructure backhaul such as, Antennas, Antenna Dehydrator, Microwave1, Line Boosters, Amplifier, Data Talker Wireless Transmitter, Short haul modems, UPS1

1.4.9 Test equipment.

1.4.10. Racks, furniture and cabinets.

1.4.11. Firmware and/or software upgrades. 1 Excluded from service agreements but may be repaired on an above contract, time and material basis. All UPS Systems must be shipped to IDO for repair. Note! Excludes batteries and on-site services

https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com/

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 18


1.5.1 Enable Customer access to the Motorola call Center operational 24 hours a day, 7 days per week, to create requests for repair service.

1.5.2 Provide repair return authorization numbers when requested by Customer.

1.5.3 Receive malfunctioning infrastructure from Customer and document its arrival, repair and return.

1.5.4 Perform the following service on Motorola infrastructure:

1.5.4.1 Perform an operational check on the infrastructure to determine the nature of the problem.

1.5.4.2 Replace malfunctioning Field Replacement Units (FRU) or components.

1.5.4.3 Verify that Motorola infrastructure is returned to Motorola manufactured specifications, as applicable.

1.5.4.4 Perform a box unit test on all serviced infrastructure.

1.5.4.5 Perform a system test on select infrastructure.

1.5.5 Provide the following service on select third party infrastructure:

1.5.5.1 Perform pre-diagnostic and repair services to confirm infrastructure malfunction and eliminate sending infrastructure with no trouble found (NTF) to third party vendor for repair, when applicable.

1.5.5.2 Ship malfunctioning infrastructure components to the original equipment manufacturer or third party vendor for repair service, when applicable.

1.5.5.3 Track infrastructure sent to the original equipment manufacturer or third party vendor for service.

1.5.5.4 Perform a post-test after repair by Motorola, original equipment manufacturer, or third party vendor to confirm malfunctioning infrastructure has been repaired and functions properly in a Motorola system configuration, when applicable.

1.5.5.5 Re-program repaired infrastructure to original operating parameters based on software/firmware provided by customer as required by section 1.6.7. If the customer software version/configuration is not provided, shipping times will be delayed. If the Infrastructure repair depot determines that the malfunctioning infrastructure is due to a software defect, the repair depot reserves the right to reload infrastructure with a similar software version.

1.5.5.6 Properly package repaired infrastructure.

1.5.5.7 Ship repaired infrastructure to the customer specified address during normal operating hours of Monday through Friday 7:00am to 7:00pm CST, excluding holidays. FRU will be sent two-day air unless otherwise requested. Motorola will pay for such shipping, unless customer requests shipments outside of the above mentioned standard business hours and/or carrier programs, such as NFO (next flight out). In such cases, customer will be responsible for payment of shipping and handling charges.


1.6.1 Contact or instruct Servicer to contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) and request a return authorization number prior to shipping malfunctioning infrastructure.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 19

1.6.2 Provide model description, model number and serial number, type of system, software and firmware version, symptom of problem and address of site location for FRU or infrastructure.

1.6.3 Indicate if infrastructure or third party infrastructure being sent in for service was subjected to physical damage or lightning damage.

1.6.4 Follow Motorola instructions regarding inclusion or removal of firmware and software applications from infrastructure being sent in for service.

1.6.5 Provide customer purchase order number to secure payment for any costs described herein.

1.6.6 Properly package and ship the malfunctioning FRU, at customer’s expense. Customer is responsible for properly packaging the malfunctioning infrastructure FRU to ensure that the shipped infrastructure arrives un-damaged and in repairable condition.

1.6.6.1 Clearly print the return authorization number on the outside of the packaging.

1.6.7 Maintain versions and configurations for software/applications and firmware to install repaired equipment.

1.6.8 Provide Motorola with proper software/firmware information to reprogram equipment after repair unless current software has caused this malfunction.

1.6.9 Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide the infrastructure repair services to customer.


Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 20

Appendix D: Remote Security Patch Installation Statement of Work To verify compatibility with your ASTRO 25 system, Motorola’s Remote Security Patch Installation provides pre-tested 3rd party software (SW) security updates.

In addition to testing the security updates, Remote Security Patch Installation includes remote installation of the updates.

This Statement of Work (“SOW”) is subject to the terms and conditions of Motorola’s Professional Services Agreement, Service Agreement or other applicable agreement in effect between the parties (“Agreement”). Motorola and Customer may be referred to herein individually as a “Party or together as “Parties”

1.1 Description of Remote Security Patch Installation

Motorola shall maintain a dedicated vetting lab for each supported ASTRO 25 release for the purpose of pre-testing security updates. In some cases, when appropriate, Motorola will make the updates available to outside vendors, allow them to test, and then incorporate those results into this offering. Depending on the specific ASTRO 25 release and customer options, these may include updates to antivirus definitions, OEM vendor supported Windows Workstation and Server operating system patches, Solaris and Red Hat Linux (RHEL) operating system patches, VMware ESXi Hypervisor patches, Oracle database patches, PostgreSQL patches, and patches for other 3rd party Windows applications such as Adobe Acrobat and Flash.

Motorola has no control over the schedule of releases. The schedule for the releases of updates is determined by the Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs), without consultation with Motorola. Antivirus definitions are released every week. Microsoft patches are released on a monthly basis. Motorola obtains and tests these updates as they are released. Other products have different schedules or are released “as-required.” Motorola will obtain and test these OEM vendor supported updates on a quarterly basis.

1.2 Connectivity

To accommodate remote installation of security updates, a connection is required from Motorola to the customer ASTRO 25 network. There are two different options. 1) T1 line purchased and maintained by Motorola, or 2) The customer internet connection is used and a Virtual Private Network (VPN) is established between Motorola and the ASTRO 25 network. Since this relies on the customer internet connection, the customer is responsible for the availability of the connection.

Along with the connection itself, Motorola supplied hardware is required to be deployed to the customer premises on the ASTRO 25 network. Motorola shall load software, configure, and ship the hardware to the customer supplied contact for installation. This hardware and its maintenance is part of the connectivity service.

ASTRO 25 connectivity is ordered separately from Remote Security Patch Installation and has a separate statement of work. See that SOW for more detail on terms of the connection.

If connectivity is already established for a different service such as network or security monitoring then the same connection can be used for Remote Security Patch Installation. There is no need for a separate connection to be established.

1.3 Security Update Installation

Motorola shall push the tested security updates over the established connection. The timing and coordination with the customer of each update depends on the updates themselves. Motorola requires IP connectivity to all elements that are in scope for patching. If IP connectivity from

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 21

Motorola is not available then those elements will not be considered for remote patching and will require alternative arrangements outside of the scope of this statement of work.

1.3.1 Antimalware Signature Update Installation

Antimalware signature updates are released often, but Motorola collects and tests them on a weekly basis. The updates are non-intrusive (for example, no reboots or manual configuration changes are required) and automatically implemented. Therefore, antimalware signature updates will be pushed within a week of testing without Customer coordination. An email will be sent to inform the Customer that the signatures have been updated.

1.3.2 Microsoft Windows Security Update Installation

Microsoft typically releases security updates every second Tuesday of the month (aka “Patch Tuesday”); however, selected security updates are sometimes released on other days, and it is possible that no security updates are released during a month. Security updates for some 3rd party Windows software (Non-Motorola and non-Microsoft applications that run on Windows, such as Adobe Reader and Flash) are also released on Patch Tuesday. The most recent Windows and 3rd party Windows security updates available will be acquired by Motorola on each Patch Tuesday. These patch security updates require at least one week for incorporation into the offering and a minimum of 36 hours for testing in the Motorola vetting labs, after which security updates with no issues are then released. Patches may be held back at the discretion of Motorola if they are found to cause any problems to features, performance or functionality and will only be released when the issues are fully resolved.

It is important to understand that it is often the case that after security updates are installed, Microsoft requires the patched computer to be rebooted before the security updates take full effect and vulnerabilities are mitigated. The clients include dispatch consoles and there is no way for Motorola to know when it is safe to reboot. The customer must reboot at a time chosen by them so as to not impact operations.

Once the security updates are vetted, Motorola will start pushing the updates to the customer without customer coordination or notification. An email will be sent requesting that the clients be rebooted. It is the customer’s responsibility to reboot all of the clients before the next set update is sent. When preparing for the next month’s push of security updates, Motorola will first scan to verify all of the previous updates were implemented and if any computer has not been rebooted. Motorola will send an email requesting that the remaining computers be rebooted before any new updates are pushed.

1.3.3 Microsoft Windows Security Updates Outside ASTRO 25 Firewalls

Connections to other networks (from now on referred to as Customer Enterprise Network, or CEN) must be delineated by firewalls. All updates deployed by Remote Security Patch Installation are specific to equipment inside the ASTRO 25 Radio Network with only the following exceptions: Key Management Facility (KMF), Text messaging Services (TMS) and advanced Messaging Services (AMS) and MCC 7100 consoles. In these exceptions, the customer has a choice of including these machines in the Remote Security Patch Installation service, or including them in their own IT security patch procedures.

The KMF, TMS, and AMS are all outside the firewall (relative to the Radio Network) and therefore updates require that the firewall be opened. The default for Remote Remote Security Patch Installation is that these functions are included.

The MCC 7100 console may be directly on the radio network or in the CEN. Any MCC 7100 on the radio network would simply be included in the standard Remote Security Patch Installation offering. However, the MCC 7100 may also be located in the CEN and connected

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 22

through a VPN to a firewall at a dispatch location. In this case, the default for Remote Security Patch Installation is to not update these consoles.

If the customer requires inclusion for the CEN based MCC 7100 consoles, then they must contact their Customer Service Manager and make a formal request. They must also consent to allow Motorola to open the firewall to allow access for updates.

1.3.4 Quarterly Security Update Installation

The quarterly patch updates are for Solaris and Red Hat Linux (RHEL) operating systems, and VMWare ESXi hypervisor (virtualization). They are tested and released on a quarterly basis, at end of March, June, September, and December. Motorola will schedule installation of the updates with the customer in the first weeks of the following quarter. Motorola will send the customer an ITIL with details on the upgrade and scheduling for each of the events.

These updates are intrusive and require customer coordination. Examples of how they affect the customer include reboots to implement the patches and rolling (switching from one zone controller to the other) of the zone controllers. Systems with redundant zone controllers (L2, M2, M3) have low downtime (minutes) as the zone controllers are rolled, but systems with single zone controllers (L1, M1) will be down for longer periods. During these times, the system will be in “Site trunking” mode. It is up to the customer to understand the operational impacts and to coordinate these events with users.

This effort will be done during standard business hours, or 8am to 5pm CST. Customers requesting that downtime be during non-standard hours must submit an official request through their CSM. The ITIL will show work being done during standard hours such as prep work, downloading of the patches to memory, etc and the actual reboots or ZC rollover will be initiated when requested. Additional remote work will proceed the next day during standard hours.

Motorola System Enhancement Releases (“SERs”) and Field Service Bulletins (“FSB’s) are not part of this service. However in some instances, these fixes must be done to allow the latest security patches. If it is possible for the specific required FSB to be installed remotely, then Motorola will include it as part of Remote Security Patch Installation. Otherwise, Motorola will communicate this to the customer and the patches that cannot be delivered. The Customer and their CSM will determine how to get the SER or FSB installed. Once the SER or FSB appears on the system, Remote Security Patch Installation will then install the affected patches.

For minimal downtime and to avoid redundant efforts, the customer should coordinate any maintenance or other updates such as FSB’s and SER’s with Motorola.

1.4 Scope

Remote Security Patch Installation supports the currently shipping Motorola ASTRO 25 System Release (SR) and strives to support five (5) releases prior. Motorola reserves the right to adjust which releases are supported as business conditions dictate. Contact your Customer Service Manager for the latest supported releases.

Remote Security Patch Installation is available for any L or M core system in a supported release. Remote Security Patch Installation is not available for K cores.

Systems that have non-standard configurations that have not been certified by Motorola Systems Integration and Testing (SIT) are specifically excluded from this Service unless otherwise agreed in writing by Motorola. Service does not include pre-tested intrusion detection system (IDS) updates

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 23

for IDS solutions. Certain consoles, MOTOBRIDGE, MARVLIS, Symbol Equipment, AirDefense Equipment, AVL, Genesis, WAVE and Radio Site Security products are also excluded. Motorola will determine, in its sole discretion, the third party software that is supported as a part of this offering.


1.5.1 Obtain relevant third party software (“SW”) security updates as made available from the OEM’s. This includes antivirus definition updates, operating systems patches, hypervisor patches, database patches, and selected other third party patches that Motorola deployed in ASTRO 25 system releases covered by this Remote Security Patch Installation. Motorola does not control when these updates are released, but as much as possible vet the updates on this schedule:

McAfee Antivirus definitions– Weekly

Windows OS updates – Monthly

Solaris, RHEL OS, VMware ESXi updates – Quarterly

1.5.2 Each assessment of relevant third party SW will take at least one week to incorporate the security updates into the Remote Security Patch service and 36 additional hours of examination time to evaluate the impact each update has on the system.

1.5.3 Perform rigorous testing of updates to verify whether they degrade or compromise system functionality on a dedicated ASTRO 25 test system with standard supported configurations.

1.5.4 Address any issues identified during testing by working as necessary with Motorola selected commercial supplier(s) and/or Motorola product development engineering team(s). If a solution for the identified issues cannot be found, the patch will not be posted on Motorola’s site.

1.5.5 Pre-test STIG recommended remediation when applicable.

1.5.6 Release all tested updates to Motorola’s secure extranet site.

1.5.7 Coordinate updates with customer as outlined in section 1.

1.5.8 In the event that no updates are released by the OEM’s during the usual time period, Motorola will send a notice that no new patches were sent.

1.5.9 Notify customer of update releases by email.

1.5.10 A supported Remote Security Patch Installation ASTRO 25 release matrix will be kept on the extranet site for reference.


1.6.1 This service requires connectivity from Motorola to the customer’s ASTRO 25 system. This connectivity must be established prior to service start.

1.6.2 Maintain IP connectivity from Motorola to all elements in the system that require remote patching.

1.6.3 Provide Motorola with pre-defined information (customer contacts, system information, etc) prior to contract start date necessary to complete a Customer Support Plan (CSP).

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 24

1.6.4 Submit changes in any information supplied in the Customer Support Plan (CSP) to the Customer Support Manager (CSM).

1.6.5 Upgrade system to a supported system release as necessary to continue service.

1.6.6 Refrain from making uncertified changes of any type to the system.

1.6.7 Adhere closely to the System Support Center (SSC) troubleshooting guidelines provided upon system acquisition. A failure to follow SSC guidelines may cause the customer and Motorola unnecessary or overly burdensome remediation efforts. In such case, Motorola reserves the right to charge an additional service fee for the remediation effort.

1.6.8 Comply with the terms of the applicable software license agreement(s) between the Customer and Motorola and non-Motorola software copyright owner.

1.6.9. Obtain at Customer’s cost all third party consents or licenses required to enable Motorola to provide the Service.

1.6.10 Upon successful installation of patches on windows clients (e.g. Dispatch Ops Position, NM Client, etc.) and receiving notification indicating the task has been successfully executed by Motorola, affected computers must be rebooted by the customer within 72 hours.

1.6.11 Understand downtime implications associated with reboots and patch activities and internally coordinate with users as necessary.

1.7 Disclaimer:

Motorola disclaims any and all warranties with respect to pre-tested antivirus definitions, database security updates, hypervisor patches, operating system software patches, intrusion detection sensor signature files, or other 3rd party files, express or implied. Further, Motorola disclaims any warranty concerning the non-Motorola software and does not guarantee that customer’s system will be error-free or immune to security breaches as a result of these services.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 25

Appendix E: OnSite Support Statement of Work Motorola‘s OnSite Support service provides case management and escalation for onsite technical service requests. The service is delivered by the Motorola’s Solutions Support Center (SSC) in conjunction with a local service provider. The SSC is responsible for opening a case for onsite support and monitoring the status of that case to maintain response time conformance. The terms and conditions of this Statement of Work (SOW) are an integral part of Motorola's Service Agreement or other applicable agreement to which it is attached and made a part thereof by this reference.

1.0 Description of Services The Motorola SSC will receive customer request for OnSite service provider and dispatch a servicer. The servicer will respond to the customer location based on pre-defined Severity Levels set forth in Severity Level Definitions table and Response times set forth in Severity Level Response Time Goals table in order to restore the system. Motorola will provide case management as set forth herein. The SSC will maintain contact with the on-site Motorola Service Shop until system restoral and case closure. The SSC will continuously track and manage cases from creation to close through an automated case tracking process.

1.1 Scope

OnSite Support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week in accordance with Severity Level Definitions and Severity Level Response Time Goals tables.

1.2 Inclusions

Onsite Support can be delivered on Motorola-sold infrastructure. 2.0 Motorola has the following responsibilities:

2.1. Receive service requests. 2.2. Create a case as necessary when service requests are received. Gather information

to characterize the issue, determine a plan of action and assign and track the case to resolution.

2.3. Dispatch a field servicer (“Servicer”) as required by Motorola’s standard procedures and provide necessary case information.

2.4. Provide the required personnel access to relevant customer information as needed. 2.5. Servicer will perform the following on-site: 2.6. Run diagnostics on the Infrastructure or Field Replacement Units (FRU). 2.7. Replace defective Infrastructure or FRU, as supplied by customer. 2.8. Provide materials, tools, documentation, physical planning manuals, diagnostic/test

equipment and any other requirements necessary to perform the maintenance service.

2.9. If a third party vendor is needed to restore the system, the Servicer may accompany that vendor onto the customer’s premises.

2.10. Verify with customer that restoration is complete or system is functional, if required by customer’s repair verification in the Customer Support Plan. If verification by customer cannot be completed within 20 minutes of restoration, the case will be closed and the Servicer will be released.

211. Escalate the case to the appropriate party upon expiration of a response time.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 26

2.12. Close the case upon receiving notification from customer or servicer, indicating the case is resolved.

2.13. Notify customer of case status as defined by the Customer Support Plan: 2.13.1 Open and closed; or 2.13.2 Open, assigned to the servicer, arrival of the servicer on-site, deferred or

delayed, closed. 2.14. Provide Case activity reports to customer if requested.

3.0 Customer has the following responsibilities:

3.1. Contact Motorola, as necessary, to request service. 3.2. Provide Motorola with the following pre-defined customer information and

preferences prior to start date necessary to complete Customer Support Plan (CSP): 3.2.1. Case notification preferences and procedure. 3.2.2. Repair verification preference and procedure. 3.2.3. Database and escalation procedure forms. 3.2.4. Submit changes in any information supplied in the CSP to the Customer Support

Manager (CSM). 3.3. Provide the following information when initiating a service request:

3.3.1. Assigned system ID number. 3.3.2. Problem description and site location. 3.3.3. Other pertinent information requested by Motorola to open a case.

3.4. Allow Servicers access to equipment. 3.5. Supply infrastructure or FRU, as applicable, in order for Motorola to restore the

system. 3.6. Maintain and store in an easily accessible location any and all software needed to

restore the system. 3.7. Maintain and store in an easily accessible location proper system backups. 3.8 For E911 systems, test the secondary/backup Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP)

connection to be prepared in the event of a catastrophic failure of a system. Train appropriate personnel on the procedures to perform the function of switching to the backup PSAP.

3.9 Verify with the SSC that restoration is complete or system is functional, if required by repair verification preference provided by customer.

3.10. Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide these services.

3.11. Obtain and provide applicable third party consents or licenses at Customer cost to enable Motorola to provide the Services.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 27

4.0 Severity Level Definitions

The following severity level definitions will be used to determine the maximum response times:

Severity Level Severity Definition

Severity 1 This is defined as a failure that causes the system and/or infrastructure a loss of voice functionality and no work-around or immediate solution is available. The following are examples of this kind of severity:

● 33% of call processing resources impaired ● Site Environment alarms:

o Smoke o Unauthorized access o Temperature o Power failure

Severity 2 This is defined as a fault that causes the system to operate with a continuous reduction in capacity or functionality of core services (core services are voice, data or network management). The following are examples of this kind of severity:

● Less than 33% of call processing resources impaired ● Failure of a single redundant component

Severity 3 This is defined as a fault which reduces the functionality, efficiency or usability of core services (voice, data and network management) and there is a viable work-around in place. The following are examples of this kind of severity:

● Intermittent faults that are infrequent and minor impact to core services

● Statistical reporting problems Severity 4 This is defined as a minor issue, which has little or no impact on the functionality,

efficiency or usability of core services. The following are examples of this kind of severity:

● Faults resulting in minor functions or features being unsupported or unreliable in ways that are not noticeable to the user.

● Faults that have no impact in how the user perceives the system to work.

● Cosmetic issues. ● Requests for information. ● Preventive Maintenance

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 28

5.0 Severity Level Response Time Goals

(Customer’s Response Time Classification is designated in the Customer Support Plan.)

Severity Level

Standard Response Time

Severity 1*

Within 4 hours from receipt of notification continuously

Severity 2 Within 4 hours from receipt of notification

Standard Business Day

Severity 3 Within 8 hours from receipt of notification

Standard Business Day Severity 4 Within 12 hours from receipt of notification

Standard Business Day * Premier Response is an option that can be purchased, it provides a 2-hour response time for severity 1 issues.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 29

Appendix F: Annual Preventive Maintenance Statement of Work


Annual Preventative Maintenance will provide an annual operational test and alignment, on the customer’s infrastructure equipment (Infrastructure or Fixed Network Equipment or “FNE”) to monitor the Infrastructure’s conformance to specifications, as set forth in the applicable attached Exhibit(s), all of which are hereby incorporated by this reference.

1.1 Scope

Annual Preventive Maintenance will be performed during standard business hours (unless otherwise agreed to in writing). If the system or Customer requirements dictate this service must occur outside of standard business hours, Motorola will provide an additional quotation. Customer is responsible for any charges associated with unusual access requirements or expenses.

1.2 Inclusions

Annual Preventive Maintenance service will be delivered on Motorola sold infrastructure including integrated third party products per the level of service as defined in Table 1: PM Tasks Performed.


Unless specifically described in Table 1, the following activities are outside the scope of the Annual Preventive Maintenance service, but are optional services that are available to Annual Preventive Maintenance customers at an additional cost:

1.3.1. Emergency on-site visits required to resolve technical issues. 1.3.2. Third party support for equipment not sold by Motorola as part of the original system. 1.3.3. System installations, upgrades, and expansions. 1.3.4. Customer training. 1.3.5. Hardware repair and/or exchange. 1.3.6. Network security services. 1.3.7. Network transport. 1.3.8. Information Assurance. 1.3.9. Motorola services not included in this statement of work. 1.3.10. Any maintenance required as a result of a virus or unwanted intrusion is excluded if the system is not protected against these security threats by Motorola’s Pre-tested Security Update Service when applicable. 1.3.11. Tower mapping analysis or tower structure analysis


1.4.1 Notify the customer of any planned system downtime needed to perform this Service.

1.4.2 Advise customer of any issue that requires immediate attention.

1.4.3 Maintain communication with the customer as needed until completion (“resolution” implies a problem is being fixed) of the Annual Preventive Maintenance.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 30

1.4.4 Determine, in its sole discretion, when a case requires more than the Preventive Maintenance services described in this SOW and notify customer of an alternative course of action.

1.4.5 Provide customer with a report documenting system performance against expected parameters along with recommended actions. Time allotment TBD.

1.4.6 Provide trained and qualified personnel with proper security clearance required to complete Annual Preventive Maintenance service.


1.5.1 Provide preferred schedule for Annual Preventative Maintenance to Motorola. 1.5.2 Authorize and acknowledge any scheduled system downtime. 1.5.3 Maintain periodic backup of databases, software applications, and firmware. 1.5.4 Establish and maintain a suitable environment (heat, light, and power) for the

equipment location and provide Motorola full, free, and safe access to the equipment so that Motorola may provide services. All sites shall be accessible by standard service vehicles.


1.5.6 Provide site escorts in a timely manner if required.

1.5.7 Provide Motorola with requirements necessary for access to secure facilities.


Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 31

Table 1: PM Tasks Performed

MASTER SITE CHECKLIST SERVERS

Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions.

Capture Diags Perform recommended diagnostic tests based on server type. Capture available diagnostic logs.

NM Client Applications

Review UEM events and transport medium types, (microwave/leased line/telco, etc). Event log review for persistent types. Verify all NM client applications are operating correctly.

Verify System SW CD's Perform audit of software media on site. Versions, KC numbers, types, etc.

Complete Backup Verify backups have been done or scheduled. SZ database (BAR), Centracom CDM/ADM database, etc.

ROUTERS

Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions. SWITCHES


Capture Diags Perform recommended diagnostic tests based on switch type. Capture available diagnostic logs.

Verify Redundant Switches

Test redundancy in CWR devices. Core router switchover (coordinate with customer).

DOMAIN CONTROLLERS




FIREWALLS



LOGGING EQUIPMENT



Server CPU Health i.e. memory, HDD, CPU, disk space/utilization. MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 32



Server CPU Health i.e. memory, HDD, CPU, disk space/utilization.

PRIME SITE CHECKLIST SOFTWARE


SWITCHES Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions.


MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions.


Site Frequency Standard Check Check lights and indicators for A/B receivers.

COMPARATORS

Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. Clean Fans and Equipment Use antistatic vacuum to clean cooling pathways

DISPATCH SITE CHECKLIST GENERAL

Inspect all Cables Inspect all cables/connections to external interfaces are secure Mouse and Keyboard Verify operation of mouse and keyboard

Configuration File Verify each operator position has access to required configuration files

Console Op Time Verify console op time is consistant across all ops Screensaver Verify screensaver set as customer prefers

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 33

Screen Performance Verify screen operational/performance Touchscreen Verify touchscreen operation (if applicable) Cabling/Lights/Fans Visual inspection of all equipment - cabling/ lights/ fans Filters/Fans/Dust Clean any filters/ fans/ dust- all equipment Monitor and Hard Drive Confirm monitor and hard drive do not "sleep" DVD/CD Verify / clean DVD or CD drive HEADSET UNPLUGGED TESTING

Speakers Test all speakers - audio quality, volume, static, drop-outs, excess hiss when turned up.

Channel Audio in Speaker Verify selected channel audio in select speaker only. Footswitch Pedals Verify both footswitch pedals operational Radio On-Air Light Verify radio on air light comes on with TX (if applicable)

Radio TX and RX Verify radio TX/RX from both headset jacks. Verify levels OK. Check volume controls for noise/static or drop-outs.

Speaker Mute Verify select speaker muted.

Telephone Operation Verify telephone operational through both headset jacks. Check volume controls for noise/static or drop-outs.

Audio Switches Verify select audio switches to speaker when phone off-hook. (if interfaced to phones)

Radio Takeover in Headset

Verify radio-takeover in headset mic when phone off-hook (mic switches to radio during PTT and mutes to phone).

OTHER TESTS

Phone Status Light Verify phone status light comes on when phone off-hook (if applicable)

Desk Microphone Operation Confirm desk mic operation (if applicable) Radio IRR Operation Verify radio IRR operational (if applicable) Telephone IRR Operation

Verify telephone [if on radio computer] IRR operational (if applicable)

Recording Verify operator position being recorded on long term logging recorder (if applicable)

COMPUTER PERFORMANCE TESTING Computer Reboot Reboot op position computer Computer Operational Confirm client computer is fully operational (if applicable) AUDIO TESTING Audio Levels and Quality

Confirm all conventional resources are functional with adequate audio levels and quality

Secure Mode Confirm any secure talkgroups are operational in secure mode EQUIPMENT ROOM TESTS Recording - AIS Test Verify audio logging of trunked calls

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 34

Recording Test op position logging on analog recorder (with customer assistance)

System Alarms Review alarm system on all equipment for errors


RF SITE CHECKLIST Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. Clean Fans and Equipment Use antistatic vacuum to clean cooling pathways Site Frequency Standard Check Check lights and indicators for A/B receivers. Basic Voice Call Check Voice test each voice path, radio to radio. Control Channel Redundancy (trunking) Roll control channel, test, and roll back. Site Controller Redundancy (trunking) Roll site controllers with no dropped audio.

GTR 8000 Results Sheet

Complete GTR tests - Frequency Error, Modulation Fidelity, Forward at Set Power, Reverse at Set Power, Gen Level Desense no Tx.

MOSCAD CHECKLIST MOSCAD SERVER Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. Check Alarm/Event History

Review MOSCAD alarm and events to find if there are chronic issues.

Windows Event Logs Review Windows event logs. Save and clear if full.

Password Verification Site devices to verify passwords. Document changes if any found.


MOSCAD CLIENT Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. Check Alarm / Event History


Windows Event Logs Review Windows event logs. Save and clear if full.


Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 35


MOSCAD RTU's Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. Verify Connectivity Verify Connectivity

FACILITIES CHECKLIST VISUAL INSPECTION EXTERIOR ASR Sign Verify that the ASR sign is posted. Warning Sign - Tower Verify warning sign is posted on the tower.

Warning Sign - Gate Verify that a warning sign is posted at the compound gate entrance.

10 Rule Sign Verify that a 10 rules sign is posted on the inside of the shelter door.

Outdoor Lighting Verify operation of outdoor lighting/photocell. Exterior of Building Check exterior of building for damage/disrepair. Fences / Gates Check fences/gates for damage/disrepair. Landscape / Access Road Check landscape/access road for accessibility. VISUAL INSPECTION INTERIOR Electrical Surge Protectors Check electrical surge protectors for alarms. Emergency Lighting Verify emergency lighting operation. Indoor Lighting Verify indoor lighting.

Equipment Inspection

Visually inspect that all hardware (equipment, cables, panels, batteries, racks, etc.) are in acceptable physical condition for normal operation.


Regulatory Compliance (License, ERP, Freqency, Deviation) Check station for regulatory compliance. Update station logs. Clean Fans and Equipment Use antistatic vacuum to clean cooling pathways UPS Visual inspection (condition, cabling) Verify corrosion, physical connections, dirt/dust, etc. GENERATOR

Visual Inspection Verify, check panel housing, cracks, rust and whethering. Physical connections, corrosion, dirt/dust, etc.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 36

Fuel Verify fuel levels in back up generators, document date of last fuel delivered from fuel service provider.

Oil Check the oil dipstick for proper level. Note condition of oil.

Verify operation (no switchover)

Check, verify running of generator, ease of start or difficult. Is generator "throttling" or running smooth? Any loud unusual noise? Etc.

HVAC Air Filter Check air filter and recommend replacement if required. Coils Check coils for dirt Outdoor Unit Check that outdoor unit is unobstructed Wiring Wiring (insect/rodent damage) Cooling / Heating Check each HVAC unit for cooling/heating

MICROWAVE CHECKLIST RADIO Alarms Check alarm / event history Software Verify version of application TX Frequency Verify transmit frequency TX Power Verify transmit power RX Frequency Verify receive frequency

RX Signal Level Verify receive signal level and compare with install baseline documentation

Save configuration Save current configuration for off site storage

Backhaul Validation

Monitor UEM status (alarms, logs, etc.) for all links. If UEM not used to monitor microwave, then use provided microwave alarm mgmt server.

WAVEGUIDE Visual Inspection Inspect for wear or dents (from ground using binoculars).

Connection Verification Verify all connections are secured with proper hardware (from ground using binoculars).

DEHYDRATOR Visual Inspection Inspect moisture window for proper color Pressure Verification Verify pressure of all lines

Re-Pressurization Bleed lines temporarily to verify the dehydrator re-pressurizes Run Hours Record number of hours ran

TOWER CHECKLIST

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 37

STRUCTURE CONDITION Rust Check structure for rust. Cross Members Check for damaged or missing cross members. Safety Climb Check safety climb for damage. Ladder Verify that ladder system is secured to tower. Welds Check for cracks or damaged welds. Outdoor lighting/photocell Test outdoor lighting and photocell. Drainage Holes Check that drainage holes are clear of debris. Paint Check paint condition. TOWER LIGHTING Lights/Markers Verify all lights/markers are operational. Day/Night Mode Verify day and night mode operation. Power Cabling Verify that power cables are secured to tower. ANTENNAS AND LINES

Antennas Visually inspect antennas for physical damage (from ground using binoculars).

Transmission Lines Verify that all transmission lines are secure on the tower. GROUNDING Structure Grounds Inspect grounding for damage or corrosion GUY WIRES Tower Guys Check guy wires for fraying and tension. Guy Wire Hardware Check hardware for rust. CONCRETE CONDITION Tower Base Check for chips or cracks.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 38

Appendix G: Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement Overview

Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement is a repair exchange service for Motorola and select third party infrastructure supplied by Motorola. When available, Motorola will provide customer with an advanced replacement unit(s) or Field Replacement Units (FRU’s) in exchange for customer’s malfunctioning equipment. Malfunctioning equipment will be evaluated and repaired by the infrastructure repair depot and returned to depot’s FRU inventory upon completion of repair. For customers who prefer to maintain their existing FRU inventory they have an option to request a “Loaner” FRU while their unit is being repaired. Refer to the Advanced Exchange or Loaner Decision Process flowchart for details on the loaner process.

The Motorola authorized repair depot manages and performs the repair of Motorola supplied equipment as well as coordinating the equipment repair logistics process.


1.0 Description of Services

Infrastructure components are repaired at a Motorola authorized Infrastructure Depot Operations (IDO). At Motorola’s discretion, select third party infrastructure may be sent to the original equipment manufacturer or third party vendor for repair.

1.1 Scope

Repair authorizations are obtained by contacting the Solutions Support Center which is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Repair authorizations can also be obtained online via Motorola Online at under Repair Status/Submit Infrastructure RA.

Motorola Online: https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com

1.2 Inclusions

Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement is available on Motorola sold infrastructure including integrated 3rd party products. Motorola will make a “commercially reasonable effort” to repair Motorola manufactured infrastructure products for seven (7) years after product cancellation.

1.3 Exclusions

If infrastructure is no longer supported by either Motorola, the original equipment manufacturer or a third party vendor, as applicable Motorola may return said equipment to the customer without repair or replacement. The following items are excluded from Network Hardware Repair with Advanced Replacement:

1.3.1 All Motorola infrastructure hardware over seven (7) years from product cancellation date.

1.3.2. All third party infrastructure hardware over three (3) years from product cancellation date.

1.3.3 All broadband infrastructure three (3) years from product cancellation date



Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 39

1.3.4 Physically damaged infrastructure.

1.3.5 Third party equipment not shipped by Motorola.

1.3.6 Consumable items including, but not limited to, batteries, connectors, cables, toner/ink cartridges, tower lighting, laptop computers, monitors, keyboards and mouse.

1.3.7 Video retrieval from digital in-car video equipment.

1.3.8 Infrastructure backhaul such as, Antennas, Antenna Dehydrator, Microwave1, Line Boosters, Amplifier, Data Talker Wireless Transmitter, Short haul modems, UPS1

1.3.9 Test equipment.

1.3.10. Racks, furniture and cabinets.

1.3.11. Non-standard configurations, customer-modified infrastructure and certain third party infrastructure are excluded from advanced replacement service.

1.3.11. Firmware and/or software upgrades. 1 Excluded from service agreements but may be repaired on an above contract, time and material basis. All UPS Systems must be shipped to IDO for repair. Excludes batteries and any on-site services.


1.4.1 Enable customer access to the Motorola call center which is operational 24 hours a day, 7 days per week, to create requests for advanced replacement service.

1.4.2. Use commercially reasonable efforts to maintain FRU inventory on supported platforms.

1.4.3. Provide new or reconditioned FRU’s to the customer, upon request and subject to availability. The FRU will be of similar equipment and version, and will contain equivalent boards and chips, as the customer’s malfunctioning FRU.

1.4.4. Load firmware/software for equipment that requires programming. The software version information must be provided for the replacement FRU to be programmed accordingly. If the customer software version/configuration is not provided, shipping times will be delayed.

1.4.5 Package and ship Advance Exchange FRU from the FRU inventory to customer specified address.

1.4.5.1. During normal operating hours of Monday through Friday 7:00am to 7:00pm CST, excluding holidays, FRU will be shipped from Motorola as soon as possible depending on stock availability and configuration requested. Motorola will pay for the shipping to the customer, unless customer requests shipments outside of standard business hours and/or carrier programs, such as weekend or next flight out (NFO) shipment. In such cases, customer will be responsible for shipping and handling charges.

1.4.5.2. When sending the advanced replacement FRU to customer, provide a return air bill in order for customer to return the customer’s malfunctioning FRU. The customer’s malfunctioning FRU will become property of the Motorola repair depot or select third party and the customer will own the advanced replacement FRU.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 40

1.4.5.3. When sending a loaner FRU to customer, Motorola will pay for outbound shipping charges. Inbound shipping to Motorola for repair is the responsibility of the customer. Motorola will repair and return the customer’s FRU and will provide a return air bill for the customer to return IDO’s loaner FRU. Refer to Advanced Exchange or Loaner Decision Process flowchart for the loaner process and Shipping Charges for shipping charge detail.

1.4.6. Provide repair return authorization number upon customer request for Infrastructure that is not classified as an advanced replacement or loaner FRU.

1.4.7. Provide a repair Return Authorization (RA) number so that the returned FRU can be repaired and returned to FRU stock.

1.4.8. Receive malfunctioning FRU from Customer, carry out repairs and testing and return it to the FRU stock

1.4.9. Receive malfunctioning infrastructure from customer and document its arrival, repair and return.

1.4.10. Perform the following service on Motorola infrastructure:

1.4.10.1. Perform an operational check on the infrastructure to determine the nature of the problem.

1.4.10.2. Replace malfunctioning Field Replacement Units (FRU) or components.

1.4.10.3. Verify that Motorola infrastructure is returned to Motorola manufactured specifications, as applicable

1.4.10.4. Perform a box unit test on all serviced infrastructure.

1.4.10.5. Perform a system test on select infrastructure.

1.4.11. Provide the following service on select third party infrastructure:

1.4.11.1. Perform pre-diagnostic and repair services to confirm infrastructure malfunction and eliminate sending infrastructure with no trouble found (NTF) to third party vendor for repair, when applicable.

1.4.11.2. Ship malfunctioning infrastructure components to the original equipment manufacturer or third party vendor for repair service, when applicable.

1.4.11.3. Track infrastructure sent to the original equipment manufacturer or third party vendor for service.

1.4.11.4. Perform a post-test after repair by Motorola, to confirm malfunctioning infrastructure has been repaired and functions properly in a Motorola system configuration, when applicable.

1.4.12. For loaner equipment, Motorola will ship repaired infrastructure to the customer specified address during normal operating hours of Monday through Friday 7:00am to 7:00pm CST, excluding holidays. FRU will be sent two-day air unless otherwise requested. Motorola will pay for such shipping, unless customer requests shipments outside of the above mentioned standard business hours and/or carrier programs, such as NFO (next flight

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 41

out). In such cases, customer will be responsible for payment of shipping and handling charges.


1.5.1 Contact or instruct Servicer to contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) and request a return authorization number prior to shipping malfunctioning infrastructure or third party infrastructure named in the applicable attached exhibit.

1.5.2 Provide model description, model number and serial number, type of system and firmware version, software options, symptom of problem and address of site id for FRU or infrastructure.

1.5.3 Indicate if FRU or third party FRU being sent in for service was subjected to physical damage or lightning damage.

1.5.4 Follow Motorola instructions regarding inclusion or removal of firmware and software applications from infrastructure being sent in for service.

1.5.5 Provide customer purchase order number to secure payment for any costs described herein.

1.5.6. Pay for shipping of Advanced Replacement or Loaner FRU from Motorola repair depot if customer requested shipping outside of standard business hours or carrier programs set forth in section 1.5.5.1. See Shipping Charges.

1.5.7. Properly package and ship the malfunctioning FRU using the pre-paid air-bill that arrived with the advanced replacement FRU. Customer is responsible for properly packaging the malfunctioning infrastructure FRU to ensure that the shipped infrastructure arrives un-damaged and in repairable condition. Customer will be subject to a replacement fee for malfunctioning FRU’s not properly returned.

1.5.8. Within five (5) business days of receipt of the advanced replacement FRU from Motorola’s FRU inventory, properly package customer’s malfunctioning FRU and ship the malfunctioning Infrastructure to Motorola’s repair depot for evaluation and repair. Customer must send the return air bill back to the repair depot in order to facilitate proper tracking of the returned infrastructure. Customer will be subject to a full replacement fee for FRU’s not returned within 5 business days.

1.5.9. For Infrastructure and/or third party infrastructure repairs that are not exchanged in advance, properly package Infrastructure and ship the malfunctioning FRU, at Customer’s expense and risk of loss to Motorola.

1.5.10. Clearly print the return authorization number on the outside of the packaging.

1.5.11. Maintain information of software/applications and firmware for re-loading of infrastructure.

1.5.12. Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide the infrastructure repair services to customer.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 44

Appendix G: Security Monitoring Service Overview Motorola’s Security Monitoring Services includes anti-malware monitoring and authentication log monitoring. There are also options for firewall monitoring, intrusion detection system (IDS) monitoring, and ASTRO 25 system log monitoring.

Motorola’s ASTRO 25 Security Monitoring is a complete solution that provides peace of mind and reduces the risk that your network availability will be impacted by a security threat. The solution includes 24x7x365 monitoring of the radio network security elements by experienced, specialized security technologists with years of experience working with ASTRO 25 mission-critical networks. For highly complex or unusual security events, our technologists have direct and immediate access to Motorola engineers for rapid resolution.

This Statement of Work (“SOW”) is subject to the terms and conditions of Motorola’s Professional Services Agreement, Service Agreement or other applicable agreement in effect between the parties (“Agreement”). Motorola and Customer may be referred to herein individually as a “Party” or together as “Parties”

1. Description of Security Monitoring Services

1.1. Anti-malware Monitoring

ASTRO 25 comes installed with Anti-malware software (“SW”). Security Monitoring will verify that malware definition updates, as provided by the Anti-malware OEM, are installed and running. The anti-malware SW is monitored for activity such as deletion, quarantine, and alerting of suspicious SW.

1.2. Authentication Monitoring

1.2.1. Active directory (including domain Linux and RADIUS) and two-factor authentication log-ins are monitored.

1.3. Firewall Monitoring – The ASTRO 25 system potentially has several firewall options. See Table 1 in the addendum for a list. In any of these firewall applications, Motorola provisions and deploys the firewalls with the ASTRO 25 system. Motorola will monitor each one that has the firewall monitoring option.

1.4. IDS (Intrusion Detection System) Monitoring. An IDS is an option to ASTRO 25 that may be deployed between the ASTRO 25 firewall and the CEN.

1.5. Centralized Log Monitoring

ASTRO 25 has an option that provides the ability to forward device syslogs to a single virtual server called Centralized Syslog Server. This allows monitoring of Linux components for authentication events.

2. Scope

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 45

The Motorola Secure Operations Center (SOC) consists of highly trained and experienced security specialists. When an event is detected, the technologists will run remote diagnostics and initiate an appropriate response. This response could involve: continuing to monitor the event for further development, attempting to remotely restore the system, or opening of a case for dispatch of a field servicer (“Servicer”).

3. Motorola Responsibilities:

3.1. Provide, maintain, and replace when necessary, hardware (“HW”) and SW required to monitor ASTRO 25 security elements. HW may include a firewall, router, or physical server. SW may include virtual servers either on the ASTRO 25 core or a separate physical server, related OS, SIEM collectors, and SW that allows distribution of updates and remote diagnostics.

3.2. Verify connectivity and monitoring is active prior to system acceptance or start date.

3.3. Coordinate with customer to maintain Motorola service authentication credentials.

3.4. Maintain properly trained and accredited technicians. Monitor the customer’s system 24/7/365 for malicious or unusual activity.

3.5. Reports are posted to the SSC quality webpage. Contact your CSM for access.

4. The Customer has the following responsibilities:

4.1. Security Monitoring requires a connection from the customer’s ASTRO 25 system to Motorola’s SOC in Schaumburg. Motorola offers either a T1 option or a Virtual Private Network (VPN) option through a customer supplied internet connection.

4.2. Allow Motorola continuous remote access to monitor the ASTRO 25 system. This includes keeping the connection plugged-in, providing passwords, and working with Motorola to understand and maintain proper administration privileges.

4.3. Provide continuous utility service to any Motorola equipment installed or utilized at the customer’s premises to support delivery of this service.

4.4. Provide customer contact information necessary to complete the Customer Support Plan. Notify your CSM within 2 weeks of any contact changes.

4.5. As necessary, upgrade the ASTRO 25 system to supported releases.

4.6. Allow Motorola dispatched-servicers physical access to the equipment when required.

4.7. Comply with the terms of the applicable software license agreements between Customer and Motorola and the non-Motorola software copyright owners.

4.8. Cooperate with Motorola and perform all acts that are reasonable or necessary to enable Motorola to provide the services described in this SOW.

4.9. Obtain at Customer’s cost all third party consents or licenses required to enable Motorola to provide the Services.

5. Disclaimer

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 46

Motorola disclaims any warranty concerning the non-Motorola software and does not guarantee that customer’s system will be error-free or immune to security breaches as a result of these services.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 47

Addendum

Potential ASTRO 25 Firewalls CNI Customer Network Interface. This firewall separates the ASTRO 25 Radio

Network from the customer’s IT network (often referred to as the CEN or Customer Enterprise network). There are single and redundant (high-availability) options for the CNI, the redundant option meaning there are two firewalls. Both firewalls must be monitored in the redundant case.

DSR Dynamic System Resilience. This is an ASTRO 25 option where a geographically separated backup master site is implemented as a “hot-standby” in case of disaster at the primary. This option potentially doubles the number of firewalls in the system.

ZCP Zone Core Protection. This ASTRO 25 option places firewalls at the master site where the RF and console sites connect. This protects the core from attack from a compromised site and propagation of the attack to the other sites. There are always 2 firewalls in this option for redundancy.

TI Telephone Interconnect. This ASTRO 25 option allows calls to be made to/from ASTRO 25 subscribers. A firewall is required to protect the RNI from the telephone connection. One firewall may serve the dual purpose of the TI and ISSI interface.

ISSI Inter RF Subsystem Interface. This option allows connectivity to a separate system. The original intent of this option was to connect to another P25 system supplied by either Motorola or any other P25 compliant vendor. This standard has since been used to allow connection to non-P25 systems through additional interfaces such as WAVE. In any case, a firewall is necessary to protect the RNI from this connection.

MCC 7100 The MCC 7100 dispatch console may be configured such that it can connect via Virtual Private Network (VPN) through an internet connection. A firewall is required to terminate on the ASTRO 25 side of that connection. This firewall may be physically located at either a console site or the master site and there may be multiple firewalls for this purpose.

Custom Some customers may opt to install their own firewalls and want them monitored, most commonly at console sites. The customer will have to work with Motorola to determine if and how custom firewalls can be monitored. Additional charges may apply.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 48

Appendix H: Preventive Maintenance Level 2


Annual Preventative Maintenance will provide an annual operational test and alignment, on the customer’s infrastructure equipment (Infrastructure or Fixed Network Equipment or “FNE”) to monitor the Infrastructure’s conformance to specifications, as set forth in the applicable attached Exhibit(s), all of which are hereby incorporated by this reference.

1.1 Scope

Annual Preventive Maintenance will be performed during standard business hours (unless otherwise agreed to in writing). If the system or Customer requirements dictate this service must occur outside of standard business hours, Motorola will provide an additional quotation. Customer is responsible for any charges associated with unusual access requirements or expenses.

1.2 Inclusions

Annual Preventive Maintenance service will be delivered on Motorola sold infrastructure including integrated third party products per the level of service as defined in Table 1: PM Tasks Performed.


Unless specifically described in Table 1, the following activities are outside the scope of the Annual Preventive Maintenance service, but are optional services that are available to Annual Preventive Maintenance customers at an additional cost:

1.3.1. Emergency on-site visits required to resolve technical issues. 1.3.2. Third party support for equipment not sold by Motorola as part of the original system. 1.3.3. System installations, upgrades, and expansions. 1.3.4. Customer training. 1.3.5. Hardware repair and/or exchange. 1.3.6. Network security services. 1.3.7. Network transport. 1.3.8. Information Assurance. 1.3.9. Motorola services not included in this statement of work. 1.3.10. Any maintenance required as a result of a virus or unwanted intrusion is excluded if the system is not protected against these security threats by Motorola’s Pre-tested Security Update Service when applicable. 1.3.11. Tower mapping analysis or tower structure analysis


1.6.1 Notify the customer of any planned system downtime needed to perform this Service.

1.6.2 Advise customer of any issue that requires immediate attention.

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 49

1.6.3 Maintain communication with the customer as needed until completion (“resolution” implies a problem is being fixed) of the Annual Preventive Maintenance.

1.6.4 Determine, in its sole discretion, when a case requires more than the Preventive Maintenance services described in this SOW and notify customer of an alternative course of action.

1.6.5 Provide customer with a report documenting system performance against expected parameters along with recommended actions. Time allotment TBD.

1.6.6 Provide trained and qualified personnel with proper security clearance required to complete Annual Preventive Maintenance service.


1.7.1 Provide preferred schedule for Annual Preventative Maintenance to Motorola. 1.7.2 Authorize and acknowledge any scheduled system downtime. 1.7.3 Maintain periodic backup of databases, software applications, and firmware. 1.7.4 Establish and maintain a suitable environment (heat, light, and power) for the

equipment location and provide Motorola full, free, and safe access to the equipment so that Motorola may provide services. All sites shall be accessible by standard service vehicles.


1.7.6 Provide site escorts in a timely manner if required.

1.7.7 Provide Motorola with requirements necessary for access to secure facilities.


Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 50

Table 1: PM Tasks Performed

MASTER SITE CHECKLIST SERVERS Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions. x x


x x

NM Client Applications

Review UEM events and transport medium types, (microwave/leased line/telco, etc). Event log review for persistent types. Verify all NM client applications are operating correctly.

x x


x x


x x

Server Check Disks Perform checkdisk on server hard drives x

Verify Redundant ZC's Perform Zone Controller switchover. ZC1 to ZC2 and back again (coordinate with customer).

x

ROUTERS Level 1 Level 2

Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions. x x

SWITCHES Level 1 Level 2



x x



x x

DOMAIN CONTROLLERS Level 1 Level 2



x x


x x

FIREWALLS Level 1 Level 2



x x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 51

LOGGING EQUIPMENT Level 1 Level 2



x x

Server CPU Health i.e. memory, HDD, CPU, disk space/utilization. x x

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Level 1 Level 2



x x

Server CPU Health i.e. memory, HDD, CPU, disk space/utilization. x x

PRIME SITE CHECKLIST SOFTWARE Level 1 Level 2


x x

Verify System SW Installed

Verify software versions installed on system. Document any changes.

x

SWITCHES Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions. x x


x x



x

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Check LED and/or other status indicators for fault conditions. x x


x x


x x

Server CPU Health i.e. memory, HDD, CPU, disk space/utilization. x

Site Controller Redundancy (trunking) Roll site controllers with no dropped audio.

x

COMPARATORS Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. x x

Clean Fans and Equipment Use antistatic vacuum to clean cooling pathways

x x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 52

DISPATCH SITE CHECKLIST GENERAL Level 1 Level 2

Inspect all Cables Inspect all cables/connections to external interfaces are secure x x

Mouse and Keyboard Verify operation of mouse and keyboard x x

Configuration File Verify each operator position has access to required configuration files

x x

Console Op Time Verify console op time is consistant across all ops x x Screensaver Verify screensaver set as customer prefers x x Screen Performance Verify screen operational/performance x x Touchscreen Verify touchscreen operation (if applicable) x x Cabling/Lights/Fans Visual inspection of all equipment - cabling/ lights/ fans x x Filters/Fans/Dust Clean any filters/ fans/ dust- all equipment x x Monitor and Hard Drive Confirm monitor and hard drive do not "sleep" x x DVD/CD Verify / clean DVD or CD drive x x Time Synchronization Verify console time is synchronized with NTP server x

Anti-Virus Verify anti-virus is enabled and that definition files are up to date (within two weeks of current date)

x

HEADSET UNPLUGGED TESTING Level 1 Level 2

Speakers Test all speakers - audio quality, volume, static, drop-outs, excess hiss when turned up.

x x

Channel Audio in Speaker Verify selected channel audio in select speaker only.

x x

Footswitch Pedals Verify both footswitch pedals operational x x Radio On-Air Light Verify radio on air light comes on with TX (if applicable) x x

Radio TX and RX Verify radio TX/RX from both headset jacks. Verify levels OK. Check volume controls for noise/static or drop-outs.

x x

Speaker Mute Verify select speaker muted. x x

Telephone Operation Verify telephone operational through both headset jacks. Check volume controls for noise/static or drop-outs.

x x

Audio Switches Verify select audio switches to speaker when phone off-hook. (if interfaced to phones)

x x

Radio Takeover in Headset

Verify radio-takeover in headset mic when phone off-hook (mic switches to radio during PTT and mutes to phone).

x x

OTHER TESTS Level 1 Level 2

Phone Status Light Verify phone status light comes on when phone off-hook (if applicable)

x x

Desk Microphone Operation Confirm desk mic operation (if applicable)

x x

Radio IRR Operation Verify radio IRR operational (if applicable) x x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 53

Telephone IRR Operation

Verify telephone [if on radio computer] IRR operational (if applicable)

x x

Recording Verify operator position being recorded on long term logging recorder (if applicable)

x x

IRR Setup Parameters Check IRR set-up parameters, and also audio card set-up and level adjustments

x

Paging Controls Confirm all paging controls are functional (including third party encoders if under maintenance)

x

COMPUTER PERFORMANCE TESTING Level 1 Level 2 Computer Reboot Reboot op position computer x x Computer Operational Confirm client computer is fully operational (if applicable) x x

For XP and older Operating Systems: Hard Drive Fragmentation Check status of hard drive fragmentation- perform if needed

x

Event Logs Pull event logs and review for major errors x Hard Drive Backup Create backup of drive for offsite storage. x Memory Usage Check memory usage x

Application Logs and Alerts Review built in application logs and alerts

x

Hard Drive Usage Check available space (10% minimum) x AUDIO TESTING Level 1 Level 2 Audio Levels and Quality

Confirm all conventional resources are functional with adequate audio levels and quality

x x

Secure Mode Confirm any secure talkgroups are operational in secure mode x x

Trunked Resources

Confirm all trunked resources on screen are functioning by placing a call in both directions (at the customer discretion) and at a single op position

x

EQUIPMENT ROOM TESTS Level 1 Level 2 Recording - AIS Test Verify audio logging of trunked calls x x

Recording Test op position logging on analog recorder (with customer assistance)

x x

System Alarms Review alarm system on all equipment for errors x x


x x

SDM AUX I/O Server Confirm all AUX I/O's functional on one operator position x

Backup Resources Confirm all backup radios meet RF specs and combiner/antenna system fully functional

x



x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 54

IP Network Redundancy If redundant equipment used (e.g., routers, switches), then switch to redundant equipment and confirm operation.

x

RF SITE CHECKLIST Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. x x


x x


x x

Basic Voice Call Check Voice test each voice path, radio to radio. x x

Control Channel Redundancy (trunking) Roll control channel, test, and roll back.

x x

Site Controller Redundancy (trunking) Roll site controllers with no dropped audio.

x x

GTR 8000 Results Sheet

Complete GTR tests - Frequency Error, Modulation Fidelity, Forward at Set Power, Reverse at Set Power, Gen Level Desense no Tx.

x x

MOSCAD CHECKLIST MOSCAD SERVER Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. x x

Check Alarm/Event History


x x

Windows Event Logs Review Windows event logs. Save and clear if full. x x


x x


x x


Verify software versions installed on server. Document any changes.

x

Server CPU Health i.e. memory, HDD, CPU, Ddsk space/utilization. x

Verify Patches Verify security patches monthly/quarterly (Motorola and 3rd Party). Document any changes.

x

MOSCAD CLIENT Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. x x

Check Alarm / Event History


x x

Windows Event Logs Review Windows event logs. Save and clear if full. x x


x x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 55


x x

Verify Patches Verify security patches monthly/quarterly (Motorola and 3rd Party). Document any changes.

x

Server CPU Health i.e. memory, HDD, CPU, disk space/utilization. x


x

MOSCAD RTU's Level 1 Level 2 Equipment Alarms Verify no warning/alarm indicators. x x Verify Connectivity Verify Connectivity x x


x

Check Alarm / Event History

Review MOSCAD alarms and events to find if there are chronic issues.

x


x



x

FACILITIES CHECKLIST VISUAL INSPECTION EXTERIOR Level 1 Level 2 ASR Sign Verify that the ASR sign is posted. x x Warning Sign - Tower Verify warning sign is posted on the tower. x x

Warning Sign - Gate Verify that a warning sign is posted at the compound gate entrance.

x x

10 Rule Sign Verify that a 10 rules sign is posted on the inside of the shelter door.

x x

Outdoor Lighting Verify operation of outdoor lighting/photocell. x x Exterior of Building Check exterior of building for damage/disrepair. x x Fences / Gates Check fences/gates for damage/disrepair. x x

Landscape / Access Road Check landscape/access road for accessibility.

x x

VISUAL INSPECTION INTERIOR Level 1 Level 2 Electrical Surge Protectors Check electrical surge protectors for alarms.

x x

Emergency Lighting Verify emergency lighting operation. x x Indoor Lighting Verify indoor lighting. x x

Equipment Inspection

Visually inspect that all hardware (equipment, cables, panels, batteries, racks, etc.) are in acceptable physical condition for normal operation.

x x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 56


x x

Regulatory Compliance (License, ERP, Freqency, Deviation) Check station for regulatory compliance. Update station logs.

x x


x x

UPS Level 1 Level 2 Visual inspection (condition, cabling) Verify corrosion, physical connections, dirt/dust, etc.

x x

Verify rollover and rollback Verify automatic switch to backup power when main power fails

x

Battery voltage checks Verify, check and measure battery voltages. x GENERATOR Level 1 Level 2

Visual Inspection Verify, check panel housing, cracks, rust and whethering. Physical connections, corrosion, dirt/dust, etc.

x x

Fuel Verify fuel levels in back up generators, document date of last fuel delivered from fuel service provider.

x x

Oil Check the oil dipstick for proper level. Note condition of oil. x x

Verify operation (no switchover)

Check, verify running of generator, ease of start or difficult. Is generator "throttling" or running smooth? Any loud unusual noise? Etc.

x x

Verify rollover and rollback

***Depends on configuration of Transfer switch. Auto versus manual*** Rollover should be tested weekly under load.

x

HVAC Level 1 Level 2 Air Filter Check air filter and recommend replacement if required x x Coils Check coils for dirt x x Outdoor Unit Check that outdoor unit is unobstructed x x Wiring Wiring (insect/rodent damage) x x Cooling / Heating Check each HVAC unit for cooling/heating x x

MICROWAVE CHECKLIST GENERAL Level 1 Level 2

Transport Performance Confirm transport performance by viewing UEM for site link warnings or errors.

x

RADIO Level 1 Level 2 Alarms Check alarm / event history x x Software Verify version of application x x TX Frequency Verify transmit frequency x x TX Power Verify transmit power x x RX Frequency Verify receive frequency x x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 57

RX Signal Level Verify receive signal level and compare with install baseline documentation

x x

Save configuration Save current configuration for off site storage x x

Backhaul Validation

Monitor UEM status (alarms, logs, etc.) for all links. If UEM not used to monitor microwave, then use provided microwave alarm mgmt server.

x x

WAVEGUIDE Level 1 Level 2 Visual Inspection Inspect for wear or dents (from ground using binoculars). x x

Connection Verification Verify all connections are secured with proper hardware (from ground using binoculars).

x x

DEHYDRATOR Level 1 Level 2 Visual Inspection Inspect moisture window for proper color x x Pressure Verification Verify pressure of all lines x x

Re-Pressurization Bleed lines temporarily to verify the dehydrator re-pressurizes x x

Run Hours Record number of hours ran x x

TOWER CHECKLIST STRUCTURE CONDITION Level 1 Level 2 Rust Check structure for rust. x x Cross Members Check for damaged or missing cross members. x x Safety Climb Check safety climb for damage. x x Ladder Verify that ladder system is secured to tower. x x Welds Check for cracks or damaged welds. x x

Outdoor lighting/photocell Test outdoor lighting and photocell.

x x

Drainage Holes Check that drainage holes are clear of debris. x x Paint Check paint condition. x x TOWER LIGHTING Level 1 Level 2 Lights/Markers Verify all lights/markers are operational. x x Day/Night Mode Verify day and night mode operation. x x Power Cabling Verify that power cables are secured to tower. x x ANTENNAS AND LINES Level 1 Level 2

Antennas Visually inspect antennas for physical damage (from ground using binoculars).

x x

Transmission Lines Verify that all transmission lines are secure on the tower. x x GROUNDING Level 1 Level 2 Structure Grounds Inspect grounding for damage or corrosion x x GUY WIRES Level 1 Level 2 Tower Guys Check guy wires for fraying and tension. x x Guy Wire Hardware Check hardware for rust. x x

Advanced Services

© Motorola 2018

Page 58

CONCRETE CONDITION Level 1 Level 2 Tower Base Check for chips or cracks. x x